Pioneer Elite PRO-1140HD Operating Instructions
Register Y our Pr oduct on www .pioneerelectr onics.com (US) www .pioneerelectr onics.ca (Canada) PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM PRO-1540HD PRO-1140HD PRO-940HD Operating Instructions PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 1 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
Read these instructions. K eep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not bloc k any v entilation openings . Install in accordance with the manuf acturerâ s instr uctions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers , stov es , or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not def eat the saf ety pur pose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A g rounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide b lade or the third prong are provided f or y our saf ety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician f or replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being w alk ed on or pinched par ticularly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where the y e xit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manuf acturer . Use only with the car t, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified b y the manuf acturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . Unplug this apparatus during lightning stor ms or when unused f or long periods of time. Ref er all ser vicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any w a y , such as po wer-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e f allen into the apparatus , the apparatus has been e xposed to rain or moisture, does not oper ate normally , or has been dropped. 11) 12) 13) 14) WARNING: This produc t equipped with a three- wire grounding (earthed) plug - a plug that has a thi rd (grounding) pi n. This pl ug only fits a g rounding-type power outlet. If you are unable to insert the plug into an outlet, cont act a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly gro und ed o ne. D o not def eat th e safety purpose of the grounding plug D3-4-2-1-6_A_En WARNING: To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame source s (such as a lighted ca ndle) on the equipment. D3-4-2 -1-7a _A_En NOTE TO CA TV SYSTEM INST ALLER THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CA TV SYSTEM INST ALLERâÂÂS A T TENTION TO ARTICLE 820-40 OF THE NEC THA T PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR PROPER GROUNDING AND, IN P ARTICULAR, SPECIFIES THA T THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF THE BUILDING, AS CL OSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE ENTRY AS PRACTICAL. D1-4-2-8_En This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digi tal premium cab le television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such pr ogramming. A security card provided by your cable operator is required to view encrypted digital programming. C ertain advanced and interactive digital cable s ervices such as video-on- demand, a cable ope ratorâÂÂs enhanc ed program guide and data-enha nced televis ion services may require the use of a se t-top box. Fo r more inform ation call your local cable operator. VENTILATION CAUTION: When installing this unit, m a k e s u r e t o l e a v e s p a c e around the unit f or ventilation t o improve heat radiation. For the minimum space re quired, see page 20. WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided fo r ventilati on to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect i t from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or c overed with items (suc h as newspapers , table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick c arpet or a bed. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 2 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
English WARNING: THE APPARATUS IS NOT WATERPROOFS, TO PREV ENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE AND D O NOT PUT AN Y WATER SOURCE NEAR THIS APPARATUS, SU CH AS VASE, FLOWER POT, COSMET ICS CONTAINER AN D MEDICINE BOTTLE ETC. WARNING: Handling the co rd on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause canc er and birth defe cts or other repro ductive harm. Wash hands after handling . Information to User Alteration or modificati ons carried out without appropriate authoriz ation may invalidate the userâÂÂs right to operate the equipme nt. [For Canadian mode l] This Class B digital apparatus complies wi th Canadian ICES-003. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference th at may ca use undesired operation. Product Name: Plasma Display System Model Number: PRO-1540HD/PRO-1140HD/P RO-940HD Product Category: Cl ass B Personal Comput ers & Peripherals Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC. Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Phone: 800-421-1625 For Business Customer URL http://www.PioneerUSA .com STANDBY: When placed into the standby mode, the main power flow is cut and the unit is no longer fully operational. STANDBY/ON Indicator: The indicator is lit red when the unit is in th e standby mode and lit bl ue when it is in the power-on mode. No operation can be performe d when the indica tor is off. However, th e Plasma Display System will still consume s o m e p o w e r a s l o n g as the power cord is inserted into th e power outlet. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE â THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS L OCA TED IN THE REAR . PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCL OSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY . D1-4-2-6-1_En CAUTION: The power switch does not completely separate the unit from the mains in off position. Therefore install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the mains plug in case of the accident. The mains plug of unit should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time. CAUTION: Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 0 ÃÂC to 40 ÃÂC ( 32 ÃÂF to 104 ÃÂF), less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 3 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
4 En Contents Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instruc tions so you will know how to operate yo ur model properly. Afte r you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shap e of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanatory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. Illustrations shown in this manual are fo r the PRO-1140HD unless otherwise specified. 01 Important User Guidance Information 02 Safety Precautions 03 Supplie d Accessor ies 04 Part Names Plasma Display ........................................... 13 Remote control unit ................................... 19 05 Preparation Installing the Plasma Display ................... 20 Moving the Plasma Display ....................... 20 Preventing the Plasma Display from Falling Over ................................................. 21 Attaching/detaching the PIONEER stand (for PRO-940HD only) ................................ 22 Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels ............. 23 Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable ....................................................... 23 Inserting the CableCARD⢠....................... 23 Switching between antenna A and B ....... 23 Preparing the remote control unit ............ 24 Inserting batteries ................................. 24 Cautions regarding batteries ................ 24 Allowed operation range of the remote control unit ............................................. 24 Cautions regarding the remote control unit .......................................................... 24 Connecting the po wer cord ....................... 25 Routing cables ........................................... 25 06 Basic Operations Turning on the power ................................. 26 Turning off the power ................................. 26 Watching TV channels ............................... 27 Selecting the antenna ........................... 27 Changing channels ............................... 27 Changing the volume and sound ......... 28 Changing the language ........................ 28 Setting MTS/SAP mode ........................ 29 Viewing a channel banner .................... 30 Using the POD service ......................... 30 Using the multiscreen functions ............. 30 Splitting the screen .............................. 30 Freezing images .................................... 31 07 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup About the TV Guide On Screen⢠system ........................................................ 32 Setting up the TV Guide On Screen⢠system ........................................................ 32 08 Menu Setup Menu Configuration .................................. 36 AV mode menus ................................... 36 PC mode menus ................................... 36 Menu operations ................................... 36 09 Tuner Setup Setting up TV channels ............................. 37 Using Auto Channel Preset ................. 37 Setting for skip ping unwanted channels ................................................ 37 Setting up TV channels manually ....... 37 Checking signal strength ..................... 37 Checking the CableCARD ID ............... 38 Parental Control ........................................ 38 Changing the password ....................... 38 Clearing the password ......................... 39 Activating the Parental Control ........... 39 Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MPAA) ..................................... 39 Setting the TV ratings ........................... 39 Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) ...................................... 40 Blocking Not Rated TV programs ........ 40 Canadian rating systems ..................... 40 Setting Canadian En glish ratings ....... 41 Setting Canadian French ratings ........ 41 Setting new ratings .............................. 41 Deleting new ratings ............................ 42 Temporarily deactivating the Parental Control ................................................... 42 Setting your favorite channels ................. 43 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 4 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
5 En Contents English Setting up closed captions ....................... 43 Activating the closed caption .............. 43 Selecting the type of conventional closed captions ..................................... 43 Selecting digital closed captions ........ 44 Selecting digital closed caption parameters ............................................ 44 Clock Setting ............................................. 44 10 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation Using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system ........................................................ 46 Screen components .................................. 46 TV Guide On Screen⢠icons ................ 46 TV Guide On Screen⢠navigation ....... 47 The Listings screen ................................... 47 Recording programs ................................. 48 Setting program reminders ...................... 49 Searching for programs ........................... 51 Searching by category .......................... 51 Searching by keyword .......................... 52 Alphabetical search ............................. 53 The search Episode Options menu ..... 53 Scheduling recordings and reminders ... 54 The Schedule Options menu ............... 54 Changing setup options ........................... 55 Changing the System Settings ............ 55 Changing the Channel Display settings .................................................. 55 Changing the Default Options ............. 56 11 Adjustments and Settings Sleep Timer ................................................ 57 AV Selection .............................................. 57 Basic picture adjustments ....................... 58 Advanced picture adjustments ................ 59 Using PureCinema ............................... 59 Using Color Temp ................................. 59 Using CTI ............................................... 60 Using Color Man agement .................... 60 Using Color Space ................................ 60 Using Intelligent Color ......................... 60 Eliminating noise from images ........... 61 Using the Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) functions .................................... 61 Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode ............. 62 Sound adjustments ................................... 62 FOCUS ................................................... 63 Front Surround ..................................... 63 Power Control ............................................ 63 Energy Save ........................................... 63 No Signal off (AV mode only) ............... 63 No Operation off (AV mode only) ......... 64 Power Management (PC mode only) ...................................... 64 Image position adjustment (AV mode only) .......................................... 64 Automatic image position and clock (Hertz) adjustments (PC mode only) ....... 64 Manual image posi tion and cloc k adjustments (PC mode only) .................... 65 Selecting a screen size manually ............. 65 Selecting a screen size automatically ..... 66 Selecting a screen size for 4:3 aspect ratio signals ........................................... 66 Changing the brightness on both sides of the screen (Side Mask) ............................. 67 Language setting ....................................... 67 12 Using External Equipment About External Equipment ....................... 68 Watching a DVD image ............................ 68 Connecting a DVD player ..................... 68 Displaying a DVD image ...................... 68 Watching a VCR image ............................. 68 Connecting a VCR ................................. 68 Displaying a VCR image ....................... 68 Using HDMI Input ..................................... 69 Connecting HDMI equipment ............. 69 Using a game console or watching camcorder images .................................... 70 Connecting a game console or camcorder ............................................. 70 Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder .......................... 70 Recording digital TV programs using a VCR .......................................................... 70 Avoiding unwanted feedback .............. 70 Connecting a recorder ......................... 71 Connecting other au dio equipment ......... 71 Connecting an AV receiver .................. 71 Watching an image from a computer ..... 72 Connecting a person al computer ........ 72 Displaying an image from a PC ........... 72 Computer compatibility chart .................. 73 G-LINK⢠connection ................................. 73 Connecting control cables ....................... 74 About SR ............................................ 74 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 5 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
6 En Contents Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ............ 75 Making network connections ............... 76 Connecting a USB device ..................... 76 Starting the Home Media Gallery function .................................................. 77 Enjoying movie files .............................. 79 Enjoying music files .............................. 82 Enjoying photo files ............................... 83 Other useful fu nctions .......................... 86 Glossary .................................................. 91 13 Useful Remote Control Features Learning function of the remote control unit ................................................. 92 Using the learning function ................. 92 Presetting manufacturer codes to control other devices ................................. 92 Presetting manufac turer codes ........... 92 Library Search ........................................ 92 Delete Learning ..................................... 92 Manufacturing Reset ............................ 93 Programming codes ............................ 94 CABLE .................................................... 94 SATELLITE .............................................. 94 VCR ......................................................... 95 PVR ......................................................... 97 DVD ......................................................... 97 DVD-R ..................................................... 98 LD ............................................................ 98 Using the remote cont rol unit to control other devices .............................................. 99 Receiver control buttons ....................... 99 CBL/SAT control buttons .................... 100 VCR control buttons ............................ 101 DVD/DVR control buttons ................... 102 14 Append ix Troubleshooting ....................................... 103 Specifications ........................................... 117 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 6 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
7 En Important User Guidance Information 01 English Important User Guidance Information In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pioneer PureVision PRO-1540HD/PRO - 1140HD/PRO-940HD Plasma Display Panel, please first read this information carefully. With the Pioneer PureVision PRO-154 0HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD, you can be assured of a high qual ity Plasma Display Panel with long-life and high re liability. To achieve images of exceptional quality , this Pioneer Plasma Display P anel incorporates state-of-the-art desi gn and construction as well as precise and highly advanced technology. The Pioneer PureVision PRO-1 540HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD incorporates the latest in co lor filter technology â Direct Color Filter. This filter techno logy improves color reproduction over previous models. It al so eliminates the need for a glass panel to be layered in front of the plasma panel. This feature which furthers PioneerâÂÂs goal of reducing environmental waste in consumer electronics, d uring the manufac turing process and in the future during the recycling process. Over the course of its life time, the luminosity of the Pione er PRO-1540HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO -940HD Plasma Display System will diminish very slowly, which happens to all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). To enjoy b eautiful and bright imag es on your Pioneer Plasma Display Panel for many years to come, pl ease carefully read and follow th e usage guidelines below. Usage guidelines All phosphor-based screens (inclu ding conventional tube-type televisions) c an be affected by static im ages appearing f or a prolonged period. Plasma displa ys are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effe cts on the screen can be avoided by taking so me basic precautions. ⢠Whenever possible, av oid showing the same i mage or low- motion pictures (e.g. closed-capt ioned images or video game images which have static portions). ⢠Avoid viewing the On Screen Display (OSD) for extended periods (from a DVD player, VCR, and al l other components ). ⢠Do not leave the same picture , freeze-framed or paused continuously, shown over a long period of time when using the still picture mode from a TV, VCR, DVD playe r or any other component. ⢠Images which have both very bright areas and very dark areas side by side should no t be displayed for a prolonged period of time. ⢠When playing a video game, the âÂÂGAMEâ mode setting within âÂÂAV Selectionâ is strongly re commended. However, please do not use this mode fo r long periods of time. ⢠After playing a game, displayi ng a PC image, or any stil l image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂFULLâ screen setting for over 3 times longe r than the previous still/moving image was shown. ⢠After using the Plasma D isplay System, always switch the display to Standby. ⢠Extensive viewing of content with top, bottom, or side masks may cause uneven wear. After vi ewing masked content, view full screen motion video for an equal or greater amoun t of time. Installation guidelines The Pioneer PureVision PRO-1 540HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD Plasma Display Panel incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety, please take the proper measures when mounting or installing the Plasma Display. Prevent the unit from tipping over during vibr ation or accidental movement. This product should be installed by using only parts and accessor ies designed by PIONEER. Us e of instal lation or mounting accessories other th an PIONEER-approved stands or brackets may result in instab ility and could cause injury. For custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. To ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER is not responsible for accident or dama ge caused by the use of parts and/or accessories manufa ct ured by other unauthorized companies. To avoid malfu nction and overheat ing when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. To ensure proper venting: ⢠Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. For the minimum space required around the unit, see page 20. ⢠Do not place the unit inside a narrow place where ventilation is poor. ⢠Do not cover with a cloth, etc. ⢠Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up. Use a vacuum clea ner set to its lowest suction setting to clear dust. ⢠Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket. ⢠Do not leave the product tilted at an angle without proper anchoring. ⢠Do not invert the product. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction. When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain de gree, the display automatically powers OFF in order to cool the internal electronics. Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper as sembly/installatio n/mounting, improper operation of or modifica tions made to this pr oduct, etc. PIONEER is not responsible for accidents or malf unction caused by the above situati ons. NOTE The following points are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display an d as such, are not covered by the manufacturerâÂÂs limited warrantie s: ⢠Permanent residual images upon the panelâÂÂs phosphors. ⢠Existence of a small number of inactive light cells. ⢠Panel generated sounds (Fan moto r noise, electrical circuit humming, glass panel buzzing, etc.) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 7 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
8 En Important User Guidance Information 01 CAUTION PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damage arising from incorrect use of the product ma lfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable. Plasma Display protection function When still images (such as pho tos and computer imag es) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen slightly dims. This f unction automatically a djusts the brightness to protect the screen when a still image is detected. The screen is dimmed for a pproximately three minutes. Information of pixel defect Plasma screens dis play information using pix els. Pioneer plasma display panels contain a very large number of pixels. (A 42" panel has over 2. 3 million pixels, a 50 " panel has over 3.1 million pixels and a 60" panel over 3.1 million pixels ). All Pioneer plasma panels are ma nufactured using a very high level of ultra-precision techno logy and undergo individual quality control. In rare cases, one or more pixels may remain switched Off or On. A pixel that remains Off appears as a tiny black dot on the screen while an active pixel appears as a dot o f a particul ar color. This effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a consequence of the technology. If the defective pixels are visible at a normal viewing distance of between 2.5 and 3.5 meters (8.2 and 11.5 feet) while viewing a normal broadcast (i.e. not a test card, still image, or sing le color display) please contact Pioneer Customer Support Div. (USA) or Customer Satisfaction Dept. (CANADA). See back cover for contact information. If, however, the fixed pixel(s) ca n only be seen from a dist ance of less than 8 feet or during single color displays then the appearance is considered normal for plasma technology. Infrared rays The Plasma Display rele ases infrared rays because of the panel characteristics. Surrounding eq uipment with remote controls and wireless headphones us ing infrared signals can experience interference. Move any affected equipment to a location away from the plasma panel. Radio interference While this product meets required specifications, the panel emits a small amount of ele ctronic noise. This noise can affect radio, computer, and VCR reception. Move devices away from the panel to reduce or elim inate interference. Plasma Display driv ing sound The screen of the Plasma Di spla y is composed of extremely fine pixels and these pixels em it light according to received video signals. This principle ma y cause you to hear a buzz or electrical hum coming from the Plasma Display. Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the product. ⢠Labels and tape can mar or discolor the cabinet. When n ot using the prod uct for a long time ⢠If you do not use the product for a long time, the functions of the product may be adversely affected. Switch ON and run the product occasion ally to maintain qualit y. Condensation ⢠Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the panel when the unit is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or when a heater is turned On in the room. When condensation occurs, do not switch On the panel until condensation disappears. Operating the panel when there is condensation can damage the unit. Cleaning the surface of the scree n and the glossy surface of the fron t cabinet ⢠When cleaning the surface of the screen or the glossy surface of the front cabinet, gently wipe with the supplied cleaning cloth or a si milar cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.). Using a dirty or course mate rial cloth can scratch and damage the panelâÂÂs surfaces. ⢠If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets may enter into the product, resulting in a malfunction. Cleaning the cabinet ⢠When cleaning other panel s urfaces, gently wipe with a clean soft cloth (e.g., cotton, fl annel, etc.). Using a dirty or course material cloth can scra tch and damage the panelâÂÂs surfaces. ⢠The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benz ene or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals can strip the surface coating or cause cabinet deterioration. ⢠Do not expose the product to a volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not apply rubber or vinyl products to the cabinet for long periods of time . The effect of plasticizer on the cabinet can strip the surface coating or cause deterioration. ⢠If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets may enter into the product, resulting in a malfunction. Handles at the rear o f the Pla sma Displa y ⢠Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma Display. ⢠When moving the Plasma Displa y, ask another person for help and use the handles attach ed to the rear of the Plasma Display. Do no t move the Plasma Di splay by hold ing only a single handle. Use the hand les as shown on page 20. ⢠Do not use the handles to hang, suspend, or anchor the panel. Fan motor noise The rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases when the ambient temperature of the Plasma Display becomes high. You may hear the sound of the fan motor at that time. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 8 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
9 En Important User Guidance Information 01 English About the menu window size following video format switch The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD). This Plasma Display is designed to scale to either HD or SD signals. If the video programâÂÂs definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on the screen (fo r example: HD â SD or SD â HD), the menu size may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is com plete. For example, switching between a TV program and an external digital video recorder (D-VHS) while viewing a menu can cause the menu window size to fluctuate. If this happens, the menu will ret urn to its normal size after two to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate a problem with your Pl asma Display Panel. Image Retention When a static image is shown on a display for several hours, a faint imprint of the image, kn own as image retention, can remain. This imag e retention may be te mporary or permane nt. Although caused by different things, image retention can occur on all display technologi es, including plasma and LCD. On todayâÂÂs plasma disp lays, pe rmanent image retention is less of a worry. Most image retentio n can be improved simply by watching a motion video sequence. Image retention, also known as burn-in, can occur in all phosphor-based display systems (including CRT television systemsâÂÂboth direct view and projectionâÂÂas well as plasma display systems). To avoid imag e retention or burn-in, do not show a still image for an ex tended period. Recommended guidelines are as follows: ⢠Do not display static im ages such as still images, fixed i m a g e s f r o m P C o r T V g a m e e q u i p m e n t , a n d / o r f i x e d i m a g e s s u c h a s t i m e o f d a y i n d i c a t o r o r channe l logo display for long periods. ⢠Do not display content in the 4:3 aspect ratio (black or gray bars on left and right side of content) or letter-box content (black bars above and below co ntent) for extended periods of time, or use either of these viewing modes repeate dly within a short period of time. This plasma display system is equipped with multiple wi de-screen viewing modes; use one of these screen modes to fill the entire screen with content. ⢠Displaying dark images afte r showing a still image for an extended time may cause i mage retention. In most cases, the image retention can be corr ected by displaying bri ght images for a similar period of time. Warning: Displaying a st ill imag e on the pane l for a long period of time can cause the image to be burned in to the screen permanently. CAUTION Panel sticking and after-image lag ⢠Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-im age lagging. This may occur in t he following two cases. 1 After-image lagging du e to remaining electric load When image patterns with ve ry high peak luminance are displayed for more than one(1) mi nute, after-image l agging may occur due to the remaining electrical load. The after- images remaining on the screen d isappears when moving images are shown. The time for the after-image s to disappear depends on the luminance of the still image and the length of time displayed. 2 After-image (lag image) due to burning Avoid displa ying the same ima ge on the Plasma Display continuously over a lo ng period of time . If the same image is displayed continuo usly for several hours, or for shorter periods but over several days, a perman ent after-image m ay remain on the screen due to burning of th e fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if movi ng images are later displayed but they do no t di sappear completely. NOTE ⢠When a program menu, TV Guide screen or frozen image is displayed for 5 to 10 minutes, the system automatically turns the screen off to prevent da mage from screen burning. ⢠To prevent screen burning, the display position is automatically cha nged slightly when the powe r is switched on or the input changed. Depending on the broadcast content, some parts of the picture may not be visible. Preventing damage from scree n burning ⢠Please show imag es in full screen unless doing so causes copyright infringement. See page 65. ⢠The Energy save function can be set to help prevent screen burn-in. See page 63. CAUTION DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNSTABLE CART, STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY FALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT. USE ON LY WITH A CART, STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACT URER, OR SOLD WITH THE PRODU CT. FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURERâÂÂS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INSTALLING THE PRODUCT. ONLY USE MOUNTI NG ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. A PRODUCT AND CART COMBIN ATION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURFACES MAY CAUSE THE COMBINED UNIT TO OVERTURN. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 9 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
10 En Safety Precautions 02 Safety Precautions This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety. However, improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. To pre vent injury, please observe the following instructions when inst alling, operating and cleaning the product. To ensure your safety and prolong the service life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. ⢠Read all operating instructions before operating the panel. ⢠Keep this manual safe for future reference. ⢠Observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructi ons. ⢠Follow all operating i nstructions. ⢠CleaningâÂÂUnplug the power co rd from the wall outlet before cleaning the product. To clean the product, use the supplied cleaning cloth or ot her soft cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.). Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. ⢠Do not use attachments unless recommended by the manufacturer. Use of unauthori zed attachments can result in accidents. ⢠Do not use the product near water (bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink, laundry area, swi mming pool, in a wet or damp basement, etc.). ⢠Do not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the panel. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommende d by the manufacturer or sold with the unit. When mounting the product on a wall, follow the manufacturerâÂÂs instructi ons precisely. Use only mounting hardware recommend ed by the manufacturer. ⢠Sudden st ops, excess ive pus hing and uneven floors can cause a unit mounted on a cart to fall. Move the cart with caution. ⢠Openings in the cabi net are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheatin g and/or shorten the life o f the panel. Do not place the pro duct on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface since materi al can block the vents. This product is not designed for built-in installations. Do not place the product in an encl osed place such as a bookcase or rack unless properly vented. ⢠This product must operate on a power source as stated on the specification label. If you ar e not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company. ⢠Power cord protectionâÂÂThe power cords must be routed properly to prevent being stepped on or being pinched between objects. Check entire length of all cab les to guard against pinching. ⢠This panel contains glass el eme nts. Sudden impacts from dropping or hitting the panel ca n break the glass. If the panel is broken, avoid contact with the glass shards. ⢠Do not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock. ⢠Never insert objects through ve nts or openings. High voltage flows in the product, inserting an object can cause electrical shock and/or short internal part s. For the same reason, do not spill water or liquids into the products. ⢠Do not attempt to service th e product yourself. Removing covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. Re quest service from qualifie d and author ized service personnel. ⢠If any of the following condit ions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and a rrange for repairs with qualified service personnel. ⢠power cord or plug is damaged ⢠liquid spilled or objects fallen in to unit ⢠exposed to rain or water ⢠product fails to perform as described in the operating instructions Do not touch the controls ot her than those described in the operating instructions. Improper adjustments can cause damage, which often requires correction by a qualified technician ⢠unit dropped or damaged ⢠abnormal appearance of picture ⢠Replacement parts must meet or exceed specifications set by the manufacturer. Use of una uthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger. ⢠Upon compl etion of service or repair work, request that the service technician pe rform periodic safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition. ⢠When mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, inst all the panel according to the method recommended by the manufacturer. ⢠Keep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat -generating de vices (including amplifiers). ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before installing the speak ers. ⢠Never expose the screen of t he Plasma Display Panel to a strong impact. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury. ⢠Do not expose the Plasma Disp lay Panel to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warping. ⢠The approximate weight of each Plasma Display Panel is as follows: - PRO-1540HD - 51. 5 kg (113.6 lbs.) - PRO-114 0HD - 34.3 kg (75.7 lbs. ) - PRO-940 HD - 31.7 kg (69.9 lbs. ) (with stand) Unpacking, carrying, and insta lling requires two or more people. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 10 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
11 En Safety Precautions 02 English Installation Precautions Observe the following precautions when installing the panel using option al mounting methods such as the bracket. When using the optional brackets or equiv alent items ⢠Ask your dealer to perform the installation. ⢠Use only the supplied bolts. ⢠For details, see the instruction manual that comes wi th the optional bracket (or equival ent mounting item). When using other items ⢠Consult your dealer. ⢠The following four to six mounting hole s can be used for the installat ion: CAUTION ⢠Use at least four mounting holes symmetrical to the vert ical and horizontal median lines. ⢠Use M8 screws, which go 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inch es) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display. See the side view above. ⢠Be careful not to block rear vents on the Plasma Display. ⢠Install the Plasma Display on a flat surface to avoid warping the glass. ⢠The diagrams above show the location of standard mounting screw holes. Holes othe r than those shown above are for specific mounting methods and should not be used unless a mounting optionâÂÂs instructions require their use. NOTE ⢠Use the optional PIONEER mount ing products whenever possible. ⢠PIONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or property damage that results from using mountin g items other than the optional PIONEER products. Side view Moun ti ng s urf ace Plas ma Display Mounting bracket (or equivalent item) M8 screw 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) Mounting hole Mountin g hole Median line Median line Rear view (PRO-940HD) Mounting hole Median line Median line Mountin g hole Rear view (PRO-1540 HD) Rear view (PRO-1140 HD) Mountin g hole Median line Mountin g hole Median line PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 11 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
12 En Supplied Accessories 03 Supplied Accessories Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet ) Bead band ÃÂ 3 Cleaning cloth AA size battery x 2 (Alkaline battery for remote control unit) Remote control unit Operating instructions G-LINK cable (3 m /9.8 feet) Hexagonal w rench x 1 (Diagonal size: 6 mm) (for PRO-940HD only) Speed cl amp ÃÂ 3 Ferrite core Warranty card Terminal position sheet (for use when mounting the Plasma Display on the wall) (for PRO-1540HD only) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 12 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
13 En Part Names 04 English Part Names Plasma Display 1 a POWER button (See page 26) 2 POWER ON indicator (See page 26) 3 STANDBY indica tor (See page 26) 4 REC TIMER indica tor 5 Remote control sensor (Side view) 6 STANDBY/ON button 7I N P U T button ( ENTER button*) 8 VOLUME UP/DO WN buttons ( UP/DOWN buttons*) 9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons ( LEFT/ RIGHT buttons*) 10 TV GUIDE button* 11 USB port 12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) * ability to operate the TV Guide On Scree n⢠system. 5 6 8 9 10 7 11 13 12 14 1 3 2 4 Front/side view (PRO-1540HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 13 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
14 En Part Names 04 1 a POWER button (See page 26) 2 POWER ON indicator (See page 26) 3 STANDBY indicator (See page 26) 4 REC TIMER indicator 5 Remote control sensor (Side view) 6 STANDBY/ON button 7I N P U T button ( ENTER button*) 8 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons ( UP/DOWN buttons*) 9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons ( LEFT/ RIGHT buttons*) 10 TV GUIDE button* 11 USB port 12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) * ability to operate the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. 5 4 6 8 9 10 7 11 13 12 14 1 3 2 Front/side view (PRO-1140HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 14 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
15 En Part Names 04 English 1 a POWER button (See page 26) 2 POWER ON indicator (See page 26) 3 STANDBY indica tor (See page 26) 4 REC TIMER indica tor 5 Remote control sensor (Side view) 6 STANDBY/ON button 7I N P U T button ( ENTER button*) 8 VOLUME UP/DO WN buttons ( UP/DOWN buttons*) 9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons ( LEFT/ RIGHT buttons*) 10 TV GUIDE button* 11 USB port 12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) * ability to operate the TV Guide On Scree n⢠system. 6 8 9 10 7 11 13 12 14 5 1 4 3 2 Front/side view Viewed from below of the display (PRO-940HD) Viewed from the front side of the display PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 15 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
16 En Part Names 04 1 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 2 CableCARD⢠slot 3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 4 ANT B IN terminal 5 AC IN terminal 6 Ethernet cable port 7 HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/I NPUT 6) 8 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 9 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 10 G-LINK terminal 11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO) 13 SUB WOOFER terminal 14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO) 19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) 25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 26 CONTROL OUT termina l 27 CONTROL IN terminal 28 SPEAKER (R/L) te rminals 1 2 3 8 7 9 10 6 26 27 28 25 16 13 14 11 12 15 17 21 18 22 23 19 20 24 4 5 Rear view (Terminals located on the upper edge of the compartment) (PRO-1540HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 16 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
17 En Part Names 04 English 1 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 2 CableCARD⢠slot 3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 4 ANT B IN termi nal 5 AC IN termina l 6 Ethernet cable port 7 HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/INPUT 6) 8 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 9 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 10 G-LINK terminal 11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO) 13 SUB WOOFER terminal 14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO) 19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) 25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 26 CONTROL OUT terminal 27 CONTROL IN terminal 28 SPEAKER (R/L) terminals 1 2 3 8 7 6 9 10 26 27 28 25 16 13 14 11 12 15 17 21 18 22 23 19 20 24 4 5 Rear view (Terminals located on the upper edge of the compartment) (PRO-1140HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 17 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
18 En Part Names 04 1 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 2 CableCARD⢠slot 3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 4 ANT B IN terminal 5 AC IN terminal 6 Ethernet cable port 7 HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/I NPUT 6) 8 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 9 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 10 G-LINK terminal 11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO) 13 SUB WOOFER terminal 14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO) 19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) 25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 26 CONTROL OUT termina l 27 CONTROL IN terminal 1 2 3 8 6 7 9 10 26 27 25 16 13 14 11 12 15 17 21 18 22 23 19 20 24 4 5 Rear view (Terminals located on the upper edge of the compartment) (PRO-940HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 18 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
19 En Part Names 04 English Remote control unit This section describes the butto n functions when the mode is set to TV. To use the remot e fo r controlling other equipment, see âÂÂUsing the remote control unit to control other devicesâ starting on page 99. 1T V a : Turns ON the Plasma Display Pa nel or places it in Standby. 2 Transmission co nfirmation LED 3I N P U T : Selects an input source for the Plasma Display Panel. (INP UT 1, IN PUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4 , INPUT 5, INPUT 6 and PC) 4 SCREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size. 5S L E E P : Sets the sleep timer. 6I N F O : Displays a channel banner when a TV program is being wat ched. (When the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is in operation, in formation about the current ly highlighted channel appe ars on screen (when available).) 7H O M E M E N U : Displays the Home Menu screen 8 DAY /â : Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings in the TV Guide On S creen⢠Listing service. 9 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen 10 REC : When using the TV Guide On Screen⢠System, triggers recording to a con nected VCR 11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D) : Selects any of the four preset channels (see page 43 for details to set the FAVORITE CH) While watching, togg le the set channe ls by pressing A , B, C and D . 12 0 â 9 : Selects the channel 13 â¢(dot) : Enters a dot When entering the number of a sub-channel. 14 CH /â : Selects the channel. 15 SPLIT : Switches the scre en mode: 2-screen, picture- in-picture, single-screen 16 FREEZE : Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function. 17 MTS : Selects MTS/SAP or langu age depending on the program being watched 18 D : Lights up all buttons Lights turn off if no operatio ns are performed withi n 5 seconds. This is used for remote control use in dark locations. 19 ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B) (see page 23 for details) 20 AV SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (AV mode: STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, PURE, USER. PC mode: STANDARD, USER) 21 DISPLAY : Displays the chan nel information 22 TV GUIDE : Displays the TV Guide On Screen⢠system 23 ENTER : Executes a command 24 PAGE /â (for the TV Guide On Screen⢠system): Scrolls the program listing screen vertically. 25 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen 26 MENU : Displays a panel men u in the TV Guide On Screen⢠system 27 CH ENTER : Executes a channel number 28 CH RETURN : Returns to the previous chan nel This button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is displayed. 29 VOL /â : Sets the volume 30 M MUTING : Mutes the sound 31 SHIFT : Moves the small screen to a different location when in the picture-in-picture mode 32 SWAP : Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode NOTE ⢠When using the remote control, aim it at the Plasma Display. ⢠See pages 92 to 102 for butto ns not listed on this page. 1 10 11 13 12 14 23 24 25 5 3 4 19 18 20 21 22 7 8 9 26 15 17 16 28 27 30 29 32 31 2 6 Mode switch (with âÂÂTVâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 19 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
20 En Preparation 05 Preparation Installing the Plasma Display Location ⢠Avoid direct sunlight. ⢠Maintain adequa te ventilat ion. ⢠Because the Plasm a Display is heavy, have someone help you when moving or installing the panel. NOTE ⢠Allow enough space around the installed Plasma Display Panel to ensure proper ventilation. Using the optiona l PIONEER stand (for PRO-1540HD and PRO-1140HD ) ⢠For details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the stand. Using the opt ional PIONEE R speakers (for PRO-1540HD and PRO-1140HD ) ⢠For details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the speaker. Moving the Plasma Display (PRO-1540HD) (PRO-1140HD) (PRO-940HD) CAUTION ⢠These Plasma Display Panels are thin and can be unstable when held upright. Therefore, at least two people must move and install thes e panels. ⢠Do not hold by the speaker. ⢠Install the panel on a flat, stab le location to avoid warping the glass components. ⢠When installing on a rack, et c., someone must steady the panel at all times. Over 50 cm (19 11/16 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15/16 inches) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 20 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
21 En Preparation 05 English Preventing the Plasma Displa y from Falling Over During installation, someone mu st steady the panel at all times. Stabilizing on a table or floor Stabilize the Plasma Displ ay as shown in the diagram using screws that are 6 mm (1/4 inch) and at least 20 mm (13/16 inch) long (available from your dealer or other hardware sources). CAUTION The installation site should have adequate strength to support the Plasma Display. A weak inst allation site could result in personal injury and propert y damage. Please take the necessary safety measures to prevent it from falling during emergencies, such as earthquake s or construction accidents. If you do not take these precaut ions, the Plasma Display coul d fall, causing injury or property damage. Screws, hooks, chains, and othe r fittings used to secure the Plasma Display vary according to the compositi on and thickness of the surface to whic h the panel is attached. Inspect the mounting surface carefully to determine its thickness and composition; consult a profess ional installe r if necessary. Using a wall for stabilization 1. Attach fall-prevention bolts (hooks) to the Plasma Display. 2. Use strong cords to fi rmly attach the panel to a wall, pillar, or other sturdy construction. 3. Repeat attachment for the other side of the panel. NOTE Use hooks, cords, and fittings that are available from your dealer or other hardware sources. Recommended hook: Nomi nal diameter 8 mm (3/8 inch) Length 12 mm to 15 m m (1/2 inch to 5/8 inch) 20 mm min. (13/16 inch min.) 9 mm to 15 mm (3/8 inch to 5/ 8 inch) 6 mm (1/4 inch) 12 mm to 15 mm (1/2 inch to 5/ 8 inch) M8 â Hook â Cord Fitting PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 21 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
22 En Preparation 05 Attaching/detaching the PIONEER sta nd (for PRO-940HD only) The PRO-940HD comes with th e PIONEER table top stand attached. You can mount the display in a rack by detaching the stand. The method for attaching/detaching the stand vari es depending on the particular panel. CAUTION ⢠If mounting the panel on a stand, use only the attached stand for this model. Other stand models are not authorized for this panel. ⢠Two or more people are required to assemble and install this unit. Detaching the stand 1 Loosen the two installation bolts â using the enclosed hexagonal wrench. 2 Remove the two installation bolts â using the same hexagonal wrench. 3 Lift the Plasma Display from the stand. ⢠Keep the installation b olts â and â for reattaching the stand to the Plasma Display at a later date. NOTE ⢠Install the panel on a flat, stab le location to avoid warping the glass components. Reattaching the stand 1 Fit the standâÂÂs support column s under the Plasma Display shown below. Slowly ease the panel down on the supports. ⢠Be extremely careful not to insert the stand supports into any part of the Plasma Display other than the stand insertion slots. If the pane l is mounted improperly, the communication ports could be damaged or the stand could be warped. 2 Bolt the Plasma Display to the stand at the points indicated by the arrows. 3 Tighten the installation bolts â firmly using the enclosed hexagonal wrench. NOTE ⢠Install the panel on a flat, stab le location to avoid warping the glass components. ⢠Insert the screws in the holes vertical ly. ⢠Do not tighten them with more force than necessary. Installation bolts â (M8 x 30 mm: silve r) Installation bolts â (M8 x 60 mm: sil ver) Line up t he column supports with the bottom of the Plasm a Display . Installation bolts â (M8 x 60 mm: silver) Installation bolts â (M8 x 30 mm: sil ver) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 22 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
23 En Preparation 05 English Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels This system is equipped with two termi nals fo r inputting TV broadcasting signals, ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN. The ANT/CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and conventional TV broadcasting signals while the ANT B IN terminal accepts only convention al TV broadcasting signals. When using cable TV to wa tch digital and/or conventional TV channels, connect to the ANT/CA BLE A IN terminal as shown. To add an outdoor antenna for clearer pictures, connect an antenna to the ANT B IN terminal. If your outdoor antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial ca ble with an F-type connector, plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Plasma Display. Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable NOTE ⢠Connect coa xial cables as sh own above. Signal reception may fail if cables ar e connected improperly. ⢠In order to watch cable TV channels, be sure to connect the cable to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal. ⢠The ANT/CABL E A IN and AN T B IN termin als must not receive the same signals. For example, do not connect the cable TV line to both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals. Similarly, do not connect an antenna cable to both the ANT/C ABLE A IN and ANT B IN t erminals. ⢠The TV Guide On Screen⢠system may not be available in all areas and is not available with satellite sys tems. In addition, as content providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide data ma y be unavail able or become unavailable. Inserting the CableCARD⢠The Plasma Display prov ide s a slot for inserting a CableCARDâ¢. When you are watc hing digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use the cable companyâÂÂs Point of Deployment (PO D) service. This service presents various types of useful information in Internet- styled text. 1 C onfirm that the AN T/CABLE A IN terminal is connected to the Cable Converter box using a coaxial cable. 2 Slide the slot cover tab on th e rear of the Plasma Display to the left then remove the cover while pulling the tabâÂÂs latch down. 3 I nsert the specif ied Cable CARD⢠completely into the slot. NOTE ⢠Be sure to insert only the specif ied CableCARDâ¢. ⢠Do not insert a PC card. ⢠The CableCARD⢠automaticall y generates a cable channel list. It is unnecessary to acti vate the âÂÂAuto Channel Presetâ option. Switching between antenna A and B To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, press ANT on the remote control. ⢠While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the feed from the other antenna. ⢠While watching in the 2-screen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected, press ANT to view the feed from the other antenna. â¢P r e s s i n g ANT while w atching in the 2-screen mode with two TV images displayed has no effect. ANT/ CABLE A IN VHF antenna Coaxial Cable TV Plasma Display (rea r) U/Vmixer UHF antenna Coaxial Ta b 1 2 (Viewed from below of the Plasma Display) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 23 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
24 En Preparation 05 Preparing the remote control unit Inserting batteries 1 Open the battery cover. 2 Load the supplied two AA batteries. Insert the negative polarity (âÂÂ) ends first. ⢠The battery polarities must correspond with the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators in the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery cover. Cautions regarding batteries ⢠The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the batteries in the unit are weak . When this happens, replace the batteries with new ones. ⢠Use alkaline batteries rath er than mangane se batteries. ⢠Do not mix battery brands. Diffe rent brands have different characteristics. ⢠Do not mix old and new batte ries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new b atteries or ca use chemical leaka ge in old batteries . ⢠Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control. Dead batteries leak chemicals. If you find any chem ical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a clean cloth. ⢠The batteries supplied with th is product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. ⢠If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, re move the batteries. Allowed operation range of the remote control unit To use the remote control, point it at the sensor located at the bottom right corner of the Plasma Display. The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (23 fee t) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees left or right. NOTE ⢠Although the SR logo also appears in the lower right corner on the PRO-940HD, the sensor is in the same location for all three panels. Cautions regarding the remote control unit ⢠Do not expose the remote control to shock, liquid, or high humidity. ⢠Do not place the remote contro l unit under direct sunlight, the unit may deform. ⢠The remote control may not work properly if the panelâÂÂs remote sensor window is under direct sunlight or strong room lighting. If the remote co ntrol fails to function in a bright environment, try changing the signal angle or move closer to the panel. ⢠Objects placed between the remote control and the panel sensor may block the signal. ⢠As the batteries become weak, the remote control may need to be used closer to the pane l. Replace the batteries with new ones if necessary. ⢠The Plasm a Display emits ve ry weak infrared rays from its screen. Other nearby equipment using an infrared remote control such as a VCR may receiv e scrambled or incomplete commands from its remote contro l. In this situation, move the equipment away from the Pl asma Display. ⢠Depending on the environment, infrared rays from the Plasma Display may corrupt si gnals sent by the remote control. These IR waves could also require that the remote control be used closer to the pa nel. The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on the image bei ng displa yed. Battery disposal When disposing of us ed batt eries, please comply with governmen tal regulati ons or enviro nmental public institutionâÂÂs rules that a pply in your country/area. 30ú 30ú 7 m Remote control sensor (23 feet) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 24 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
25 En Preparation 05 English Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord last, after all other componen ts are connected. Plasma Displ ay (rear vi ew) NOTE ⢠Always turn the panelâÂÂs power OFF when connecting or disconnecting power cords. ⢠Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet when the Plasma Display Panel is not go ing to be used for a long period of time. Routing cables Attaching speed clamps to the ma in unit Attach the speed clam ps using an y of the 4 holes yo u prefer (50 inches, 3 holes: 42 in ches, 2 holes) marke d with an arrow ( ) below, depending on your r outing sy stem. for PRO-1540HD for PRO-1140HD for PRO-940HD Attaching and removing speed clamps Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma Display then snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to release once in place. Please attach them carefully. Use pliers to twist the clamp 90ú, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and becom e damaged if removed. NOTE ⢠Use the supplied speed clamps as necessary. ⢠Bundle speaker cables so that none are pinched. Power cord Noise fi lter Partially eliminates noise caused by the power source. AC IN terminal is located on the upper edge of the compartme nt. Rear view When the speakers are installed on the sides Speaker cable Speed clamp Speaker cable Speed clamp 1 2 CAUTION ⢠Use only the supplied power cord. ⢠Use only the specified power supply voltage; neglecting this can result in fire or elec tric shock. ⢠For the Plasma Display System, a three-core pow er cord with a ground terminal is used for safety reasons. Always connect the pow er cord to a three-pronged outlet and make sure that the cord is properly grounded. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 25 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
26 En Basic Operations 06 Basic Operat ions Turning on the power (from Standby) 1 Press a POWER on the Plasma Display if the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off . ⢠The STANDBY indicator on th e Plasma Display lig hts up red. 2 Press TV a on the remote control unit or STAND BY/ON on the Plasma Display to turn the system on. ⢠The POWER ON indicator on t he Plasma Display lig hts up blue. Turning off the power (to Standby) 1 Press TV a on the remote control unit or STAND BY/ON on the Plasma Display. ⢠The system enters the standby mode and the im age on the screen disappears. â¢T h e S T A N D B Y i n d i c a tor lights up red. ⢠This allow s the system to au tomatically receive digital TV program information while in St andby. NOTE ⢠If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Plasma Display status indicators The table below shows the operational status of the Plasma Display Panel. Panel indicators re flect the current status of the Plasma Display. For other than the above, see âÂÂTroubleshooting âÂÂon page 103. CAUTION ⢠If the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are of f, the system cannot be powered ON. Pressing the TV a or STANDBY/ON button has no effect. Press POWER then wait for the Standby indicator to light (red). ⢠The Plasma Display Syste m co nsumes some power as long as the plug is inserted into an outlet. Plasma Display (PRO-1540HD) (PRO-1140HD) (PRO-940HD) Viewed from below of the displ ay (left). Indicator Status System Status POWER ON ST ANDBY The Plasma Display has be en unplugged or the Plasma Display is off . P ower to the system is o n. The system is in Standby . STANDBY indicator POWER ON indicator POWER button STANDBY indicator POWER ON indicator POWER button STANDBY indicator POWER ON indicator POWER button STANDBY/ON button (Right side view) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 26 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
27 En Basic Operations 06 English Watching TV channels TV channels must be programmed into your panel. Refer to âÂÂSetting up TV channelsâ on page 37. NOTE ⢠When watching a digital TV program, you may see emergency alert me ssages scroll ing at the top of the screen. Those messages are broadcas ted by TV stations as necessary when in emergency situations. Selecting the antenna After confirming that the Mode switch on the remot e control has been set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ, press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B. ⢠This selection depends on the connections to the panelâÂÂs antenna input terminals (page 23). Changing channels To increase the channel number, press CH on the remote control. To decrease the channel number, press CH â . ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â on the remote control. â¢P r e s s CH RET URN to switch back to the previous channel. Press CH RETURN again to return to the current channel. Using 0 â 9 and ⢠(dot) on the remote control unit Press any combi nation of buttons 0 to 9 to select a specific channel. To select subchanne ls, use the ⢠(dot) button. EXAMPLE ⢠To select channel 5 (1- digit channel), press 5 . ⢠To select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 then 5 . ⢠To select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , 2 , then 5 . ⢠To select subchannel 10.01, press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), 0 , then 1 . ⢠To select subchannel 10.001 (for cable TV), press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), 0 , 0 , then 1 . NOTE ⢠After entering a channel or subchannel number, press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly. ⢠Each time you change a channel, a channel banner appears that shows information about the currently selected channel. To clear the channel banner, press IN FO . ⢠If you do not activate the T V Guide On Screen⢠system, the channel banner may not displa y certain types of program information. DTV 2 ⢠1002.102 A 12:30pm â 2:00pm XXXXXXXXXX 12:33pm XXX Plasma Display (right side view) CHANNEL /â Channel banner PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 27 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
28 En Basic Operations 06 Changing the volume and sound To increase the volume, press VOL on the remote control. To decrease the volume, press VOL â . ⢠VOLUME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /â on the remote control. ⢠To mute the sound output, press MUTING . The symbol â â appears on the screen. To return to the previous volume, press MUTING again. Pressing VOL also quits muting. Plasma Display (right side v iew) Changing the language If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi- language services, switch am ong the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control. Each time you press MTS , the language switches. NOTE ⢠Switchable languages differ depending on the broadcast. ⢠If the language selected t hrough language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you hear that language. ⢠If you are watching a digital TV program without sound or without language information, âÂÂN/Aâ appears on the screen. If a language other than English, French, or Spanish is selected, âÂÂOthersâ appears on the screen. Volume adjust ment display Muting disp lay VOLUME /â PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 28 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
29 En Basic Operations 06 English Setting MTS/SAP mod e When watching conventional TV programs, use the Multi- channel Television Sound (MTS) function to enjoy stereo sound and/or Secondary Audio Programs (SAP). ⢠Stereo broadcasts Sports, shows, and concerts can be shown with dynamic stereo sound. ⢠SAP broadcasts MAIN sound: The normal progr am soundtrack (either in mono or stereo). SAP sound: Listen to a seco nd language, supplementary commentary and other informat ion. (SAP is mono sound.) NOTE ⢠Conventional TV channels: TV channels received through the conventional VHF/UHF frequencie s or conventional cable TV channels ⢠When stereo sound is difficul t to hear, manually switch to MONO for clearer sound. ⢠Once MONO is selected, the Plasma Display sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. You must reselect STEREO to hear stereo sound again. ⢠Selecting MTS while the source is from an INPUT (1 to 6) or a PC does not change the type of sound. The video source determines the type of sound. Press MTS to cycle through the types of sound. NOTE â¢T h e MTS button is disab led while the TV Guide O n Screen⢠system is displayed. ⢠In each of the sound types, the display changes according to the broadcast signals. When receiving STEREO sound signals When receiving MONO SAP sound signals When receiving STERE O SAP sound signals When receiving MONO sound signals STEREO STEREO mode SAP SAP mode MONO MONO mode A 125 STEREO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO A 125 MONO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO (SAP) A 125 SAP (MAIN) A 125 MONO (SAP) In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO (SAP) A 125 SAP (STEREO) A 125 MONO (SAP) In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO A 125 MAIN A 125 MONO PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 29 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
30 En Basic Operations 06 Viewing a channel banner While watching a TV program, pressing INFO causes a banner to appear. Pressing INFO again causes the banner to disappear. 1 Station name 2 Current time 3 Channel number 4 Input (Ant. A or Ant. B) 5 Program title 6 Program time schedule 7 Channel logo 8 TV rating name or icon NOTE ⢠The above information is not displayed unl ess included in broadcast signals. ⢠If you do not activate the TV Gui de On Screen⢠system, the channel banner may not displa y certain types of program information. Using the POD se rvice If you watch digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, you can use the POD serv ice provi ded by the cable TV company. This service prese nts various types of useful information, using Internet-style text. Press HOME MENU , 9, 9 , then 9 to view the POD display. Using the multiscre en functions Splitting the screen Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture- in-picture mode. 1 Press SPLIT to select the display mode. ⢠Press SPLIT to cycle through the display options: 2- screen, picture-in-pict ure, and single-screen. DTV 2 ⢠1002.102 A 12:30pm â 2:00pm XXXXXXXXXX 12:33pm XXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-screen Picture-in-picture PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 30 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
31 En Basic Operations 06 English ⢠In 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SWAP to switch the position of the 2 screens. The active screen (left side) is indicated by a â â symbol. The a ctive screenâ s picture and sound can be adjusted. ⢠In 2-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the left screen. ⢠In picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the position of the small sc reen counter-clockwise. 2 To select an input source, press the appropriate input source button. ⢠If watching conventional TV, press CH /â to change the channel. NOTE â¢T h e SPLIT button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is displayed. ⢠The multiscreen function ca nnot display images from the same input source or two exte rnal input sources at the same time. Attempting to do so causes a warning message to appear. â¢P r e s s HOME MENU to return to single-screen viewing. The corresponding menu appears. ⢠When the two screens show the same analog bro adcasting coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may differ between the two screens. ⢠If you select 1920 ïµ 1080 p@24 Hz for the main scree n in the SPLIT mode, video images may not display properly. ⢠Displaying pictures in multi- sc reen mode for an extended period may cause an after-image. Freezing images Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame. 1 Press FREEZE . A still image appear s on the right s creen while acti on continues on the left sc reen. 2 Press FREEZE again to cancel the function. NOTE ⢠Freeze is not available when watching in Split Screen. ⢠If this function is not av aila ble, a warning message appears. ⢠Unless another action is ta ken, FREEZE automatically cancels after five minutes. ⢠Displaying pictures in FREEZE mode for an extended period may cause an after-image. Moving image Still image PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 31 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
32 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup About the TV Guide On Screen⢠system The TV Guide On Screen⢠system is a free, interactiv e on- screen television program guide. The system offers program listings, searching by keyword, timer recording, reminders and more. The TV Guide On Screen⢠system is a convenient way to find out whatâÂÂs on right now or during the coming week. Listings can be arranged by cha nnel or by genre. It also allo ws you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily . Before you can use the TV Guide On Screen⢠syste m, youâÂÂll need to set it up. Legal Notices In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are regi stered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide Internat ional, Inc. and/or one of its affi liates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transc ontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide Internati onal, Inc. NOTE ⢠The TV Guide On Screen⢠interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready a nd digital cable se rvices as well as conventional broadcasts . It does not provide listings for satellite servi ces. ⢠Depending on the current settings and selected items, the setup screen order may differ from the one give n in this manual. Follow the instructions shown on your panelâÂÂs screen. ⢠TV Guide may not be availa ble in all area s. As content providers move to digital pro grammin g and broadc asting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or be come unavailable. Setting up the TV Guide On Screen⢠system When the Plasma Displa y is powe red On for the first time, you are automatically taken throug h the setup process. Once the panelâÂÂs setup is complete, the TV Guide On Screen⢠setup Welcome Screen appears. Access the TV Guide On Screen⢠setup menu from the initial Setup reminder screens, or by pressing TV GUIDE for the first time. NOTE ⢠Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen⢠system it may take up to 24 hours for TV program listings to appear. Initially, all eight days of listings may ta ke up to one week to load (see Screen 7). Welcome Scr een Panel setup includes the TV Guide On Screen⢠Welcome screen. Or press TV GUIDE to begin setup. ⢠The Welcome Screen lists features in the Guide. â¢P r e s s ENTER to display Screen 1. Reminder Screen If you previously ski pped TV Guide setup, the Reminder Screen appears when you power On the panel. To make a selection, press / to highlight an option then press ENTER . ⢠âÂÂSet up TV Guide On Screen nowâ displays the first setup screen. ⢠âÂÂRemind me to set it up laterâ returns you to watching TV. ⢠âÂÂDonâÂÂt remind me againâ returns you to watching TV and stops the reminder screen from appearing upon power On. NOTE ⢠If you decide not to set up the Guide immediately, this reminder screen appears each time you power On the panel unless âÂÂDonâÂÂt remind me againâ is selected. System Setup Screens NOTE ⢠Once you star t the setup procedure, you cannot return to the previous screens. If you real ize you entered incorrect information, continue with setup. The last screen of the procedure gives you the opportuni ty to correct any mistakes before you exit TV Guide On Screen⢠setup. Screen 1: Country ⢠This screen asks for the location of your panel. ⢠Press / to highlight a country. â¢P r e s s ENTER to display Screen 2. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 32 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
33 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 English Screen 2: Enter ZIP or Postal Code ⢠If you selected USA in Screen 1 , you see the ZIP Code screen. ⢠Input ZIP Code. Press the number keys or use / to display a number then / to move to anot her field. â¢P r e s s ENTER to di splay Screen 3. ⢠If you selected Canada in Sc re en 1, yo u see the Post al Code screen. ⢠Input Postal Code by pressing / to display a character or number then / to move to another field. â¢P r e s s ENTER to di splay Screen 3. Screen 3: Do you have Cable? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 4. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 5. Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? ⢠Select âÂÂANT/C ABLE A INâ or âÂÂANT B INâ (automatically advances to Screen 5 after the selection) Screen 5: Do you have an antenna connec ted? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 6. (Depending on your setup configuration, you may see an additional screen. After that screen, you see Screen 6.) ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 6. NOTE ⢠If you selected âÂÂNoâ in Screen 3 then you must se lect âÂÂYesâ in this screen to receive a channel lineup and listings. Screen 6: Are the settings correct? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 7. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 1. Screen 7: Co ngratulations â¢P r e s s ENTER to di splay Screen 8. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 33 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
34 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 Screen 8: Is a V CR Connec ted? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 9. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 14. Screen 9: VCR Configuration Diagram ⢠This screen shows the correct way to install the G-LINK cable from the back of the device to the recording device. Make sure the G-LINK cable is properly installed. â¢P r e s s ENTER to advance to Screen 10. Screen 10: VCR Brand Name ⢠Press / to select the brand of the recording device. â¢P r e s s ENTER to advance to Screen 11. Screen 11: VCR Preparation ⢠Follow the on-screen instructions then press ENTER to display Screen 12. Screen 12: VC R Code Testin g ⢠When testing is done, Screen 13 displays automatically. Screen 13: Did yo ur VCR stop playi ng? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 14. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, a di fferent code is tested from Screen 12. NOTE ⢠Many VCRs require testing of more than one code to ensure proper operation with the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. If you select âÂÂTest this code againâÂÂ, the same code from Screen 12 is sent again. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 34 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
35 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 English Screen 14: Confir ming Your Settings Verify that the Setup information is correct. ⢠If it is, select âÂÂYes, end setupâ t o advance to Screen 15. ⢠If it is not, select âÂÂNo, repeat setup processâÂÂ, to return to Screen 1. Screen 15: Congratulat ions ⢠You have succ essful ly com pleted Setup! â¢P r e s s ENTER to advance to Screen 1 6. Screen 16: Helpful Information ⢠This screen provides valuable information on using the TV Guide. â¢P r e s s ENTER to wat ch TV. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 35 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
36 En Menu Setup 08 Menu Setup Menu Configuration AV mode menus PC mode menus Menu operations The following describes the typi cal procedure for setting up the menus. For the actual procedure s, see the appropriate pages that describe individual functions. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Press / (scr oll) to se lect a menu item then press ENTER . 3 Scroll down to the desired submenu item. ⢠The number of menu layers differs depending on the menu items. ⢠If you select âÂÂTuner Setupâ , a menu bar appears at the bottom of the screen. To select a sub menu item on the bar, press / instead of / . 4 Press / to se lect an option (or parameter) then press ENTER . ⢠For some menu items, press / instead of / . 5 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. NOTE ⢠To return to the upper menu levels, press RETURN . Home Menu Item Page Picture AV Selection 57 Contrast 58 Brightness 58 Color 58 Tint 58 Sharpness 58 P ro Adjust 58 Rese t 58 Sound T reble 62 Bass 62 Balance 62 Rese t 62 FOCUS 63 F ront Surround 63 Power Control Energy Save 63 No Signal off 63 No Operatio n off 64 Sleep Timer 57 Option Po s i ti o n 6 4 Auto Size 66 4:3 Mode 66 Side Mask 67 HDMI Input 69 Monitor Out 70, 71 Digital Audio Out 72 Language 67 T uner Setup Pare ntal Control 38 â 42 F avorites 43 Channel Setup 37 Closed Captions 43 â 44 Clock 44 Home Media Gallery 75 â 91 Home Menu Item Page Picture AV Selection 57 Contrast 58 Brightness 58 Red 58 Green 58 Blue 58 Rese t 58 Sound T reble 62 Bass 62 Balance 62 Rese t 62 FOCUS 63 F ront Surround 63 Power Control Energy Save 63 P ower Manageme nt 64 Sleep Timer 57 Option Auto Setup 64 Manual Setup 65 Home Media Gallery 75 â 91 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 36 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
37 En Tuner Setup 09 English Tuner Setup Setting up TV channels This section describes how to search and set up TV channels. Unless you set up TV channels using Auto Channel Preset, you may not be able to t une in all available channe ls. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel Preset auto matically se arches and sets up TV channels. Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. Aâ or âÂÂAnt. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂAuto Channel PresetâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 6 S elect âÂÂAirâ or âÂÂC ableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Channel search automaticall y starts. ⢠To quit Auto Channel Preset, press D . 7 After Auto Chan nel Pr eset finishes, press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠When using the Cable Converte r, you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. ⢠When a CableCARD is functioning, select âÂÂA nt.Bâ in step 4 to run Auto Channel Preset. Setting for skipping unwanted channels From among TV c hannels adde d using Auto Channel Preset, you can select channels to be skipped using CH /- . Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. Aâ or âÂÂAnt. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂC hannel Keep/SkipâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a cha nnel to be skipped. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The check mark next to the channel disappears. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore skipped channels, use the above procedure but select (add a check mark) a channel in step 6. ⢠When using the Cable Converte r, you may need to manually add Cable Converter ou tput channels. Press ENTER after each selection. Setting up TV channels manually This section describes how to ma nually set up TV channels that have not been set up by Auto Channel Preset. Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. Aâ or âÂÂAnt. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂAdd Channelâ . ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a channel number to be added. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠You can also use buttons 0 â 9 to enter a channel number. ⢠A confirmation screen appears after ENTER is pressed. 7 Press A to complete the setup process. 8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To include analog channels, manually add these channels. Digital channels canno t be added manual ly. Checking signal strength When you have selected an tenna A, check the current channelâÂÂs signal strength. Al so, use this function when receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna. Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. AâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂSignal Streng thâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Adjust the antenna directio n to maximize the signal strength. 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Channel Setup Begin Preset Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Air Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Enter Home Menu D Channel Setup Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset ⢠Cable One Moment Please ⦠xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu D Channel Setup Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu Channel Setup Ant. A Add Channel 000 Ant. A Add Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 Exit Home Menu Channel Setup Exit Ant. A Signal Strength Ant. A Current: 100 Maximum: 100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu Signal Strength PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 37 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
38 En Tuner Setup 09 NOTE ⢠This function is available only when receiving digital broadcasting signals. ⢠When you use the TV Guide On Screen⢠system with a cable service, select âÂÂCab leâ for âÂÂAuto Channel PresetâÂÂ. ⢠Executing more than one scan for cables can cause broadcast reception to fail. Checking the CableCARD ID The Plasma Display has a slot for a CableCARD that is used for managing your information by the cable T V company. The CableCARD slot is located on th e rear of the Plasma Display. To check your CableC ARD ID and the Host ID, follow t hese steps. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂPOD IDâÂÂ. ( / ) ⢠The Host ID and CableCARD ID appe ar. 5 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Parental Control With the Parental Control, adults can prevent younger audiences from watching in appropriate TV programs, VCR tapes or DVD contents. When an attempt is made to watch a blocked program (or content), the Plasma Display shows a message over a black screen. Th e Parental Control applies to both conventional and digital TV channels. There are three rati ng systems in the United States: the TV ratings, TV Parental Guidelin es, and movie ratings. Movie ratings are provided by the Mo tion Picture Association of America (MPAA) and are used for original movies not ed ited for television. For the rating system in Canada, see page 40. NOTE ⢠In the U.S. TV Parental Guid eli ne Rating System, programs with a rating of âÂÂNoneâ may be blocked on this product. Examples of programs with a âÂÂNoneâ rating include: ⢠Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS messages, weather warning and others) ⢠Locally originated programming â¢N e w s â¢P o l i t i c a l ⢠Public Service Announcements â¢R e l i g i o u s ⢠Sports ⢠Weather ⢠No Parental Control settings can be ente red for INPUT 5 and INPUT 6. Voluntary movie ra ting system (MPAA ) NOTE ⢠The voluntary movie rating syst em uses an age-based rating. TV ratings NOTE ⢠The system also allows you to select âÂÂNoneâÂÂ, which blocks programs with a rating of âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. Changing the password Using a password prevents others from changing Parental Control settings. The 4-digit password i s 1234. Use the following procedure to change the password. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂChange PasswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using the numb er buttons . 7 Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using the number buttons. 8 When prompted, enter the same password again. ⢠A confirmation screen appears. 9 Press A . Rating Description Age-Base N/A Not applicable for MP AA ratings G General audi ences. All ages admitted. PG P arental guidance suggested. So me material may not be suitable for children. PG-13 P arents strongly cautioned. Some material ma y be inappropriate for childr en under 13. R Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian (age varies in some jurisdictions). NC-17 No one 17 and under adm itted. NR Not rated. Rating Description Age-Base TV -Y All children TV -Y7 Children 7 and above TV -G General au di ences TV -PG P arental guidance sugges ted TV -14 P arents strongly cautioned TV -MA Mature au diences onl y Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 38 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
39 En Tuner Setup 09 English 10 Press HO ME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Write down the password and keep i t somewhere safe. Clearing the password Use the following procedure to clear the password. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂPasswordâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂClear Password âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using the number buttons. ⢠A confirmation screen appears. 7 Press A . 8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠The above procedure resets the password to the factor y default (1234). Activating the Parental Control 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / the n ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂOnâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting the voluntary movi e rating system (MPAA) 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂMPAA Ratings âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ra tings to be automatically b locked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocke d. Setting the TV ratings 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂTV RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu We suggest you write down your pass word and keep in a safe place. If you forge t the password When the message âÂÂEnter your Passwordâ is displayed in step 6 under âÂÂClearing the passwordâÂÂ, press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer. The password reverts to âÂÂ1234âÂÂ. PRO-1540HD/P RO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD Your password No.: Parental Control MPAA Ratings N/A MPAA Ratings Blocked MPAA Ratings N/A, G, PG,PG-13, R, NC-17 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx G PG Exit Home Menu TV Ratings TV-Y TV-Y TV-Y7 TV Ratings Blocked TV Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TV-G TV-PG Exit Home Menu Parental Control TV-None PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 39 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
40 En Tuner Setup 09 NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ratings to be automatically blocked. Likewise , unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Setting the TV Parental Guide lines (TV Guidelines) 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂTV Parental GuidelinesâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears beside the blocke d rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships wi th all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Blocking Not Rated TV programs Use the following procedure to block TV prog rams whose rating information is unavailable. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂUnavailable R atingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂBlockâ or âÂÂD onâÂÂt BlockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠The Plasma Display ships wi th all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Canadian rating systems Choose either the Canadian Engl ish ratings or the Canadian French ratings. These ratings are based on the Canadian Radio-Televisi on and Telecommunicati ons Commission (CRTC) policy . Canadian English ratings Parental Control TV Parental Guidelines Fantasy Violence TV Parental Guidelines Blocked TV Parental Guidelines xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Violence Sexual Situations Exit Home Menu Unavailable Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Unavailable Ratings Block DonâÂÂt Block Parental Control Exit Home Menu Rating Description Age-Base E Exempt: Includes news, sports, documentaries and other information pr ogr amming; talk sh ows, music videos, and variety programming. C Children: Intended for yo unger chil dren under the age of 8 years. P ays careful atten tion to theme s that could threaten their sense of security and well-being. C8 Children over 8 years ol d: Contains no portrayal of violence as the preferred, acceptable, or only way to resolve conflict; nor encourages children to imitate dang erous acts whi ch they may se e on the screen . G Ge neral: Cons idered a ccept able for all age groups. Appropriate viewing for the entire family, contains very little violence, physical, verbal or emotional. PG P arental Guidance: In tended fo r a general audience, but may not be suitable for younger children (under th e age of 8) because it could contain controversial themes or issues. 14 Over 14 Y ears: Could contain themes where violence is one of the dominant eleme nts of the stor yline, but it mu st be integral to th e development of plot or cha racter . Language usag e could be pr ofane and nudity pres ent within t he context of the the me. 18 Adults: Intende d for viewers 18 yea rs and older and might contai n depictions of violence, which while relat ed to the de velopment o f plot, ch aracter or themes, are intended for adult viewi ng. Could contain graphic langua ge and portrayals of sex and nudity . PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 40 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
41 En Tuner Setup 09 English Canadian French ratings Setting Canadian English ratings 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂC anadian English RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select then change to the desired rating. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ra tings to be automatically blocked. Likewise, unblock ing a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblo cked. Setting Canadian French ratings 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂCanadi an French Ratingsâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ra tings to be automatically blocked. Likewise, unblock ing a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblo cked. Setting new ratings Digital broadcasts now carry new ratings that are not compatible with the Plasma Display PanelâÂÂs original Parental Control settings. When you fi rst tune in one of these broadcasts, a New Parental Cont rol menu appears on the screen. This tells you that you must now change your Parental Control settings to handle th ese new ratings. Otherwise, previously blocked rating s may become unblo cked. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The new menu is displayed when Status is selected. The message âÂÂRegional ra tings have changed. Set Parental Control ratings again.â appe ars on the right of the screen. Rating Descriptio n Age-Base E Exempt programming. G G eneral: All ages and children, contains minimal direct violence, bu t may be integrated into the plot in a humorous o r unrealistic mann er . 8ans General but inadvisable for young children: May be viewed by a wide public audience , but could contain scenes disturbing to childre n under eight who cannot disting uish between imag inary and real situations. R ecommended for v iewing with parent. 13ans Over 13 years: Could co ntain scenes of frequent violent scenes and therefore recomme nded for viewing with parent. 16ans Over 16 years: Could co ntain frequent violent scenes and intense violence. 18ans Over 18 years: Only fo r ad ult viewing. Co uld contain frequent violent scenes and extreme violence. Parental Control Canadian English Ratings E Canadian English Ratings Blocked Canadian English Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx C C8 Exit Home Menu Parental Control Canadian French Ratings E Canadian French Ratings Blocked Canadian French Ratings E, G, 8 ans , 13 ans , 16 ans , 18 ans xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx G 8 ans Exit Home Menu Parental Control Status Status MPAA Ratings TV Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx New XXXXXXXXXXXXX Exit Home Menu PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 41 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
42 En Tuner Setup 09 4 Select and change the desired rating. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The menu appears between âÂÂU navailable Rati ngsâ and âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. ⢠The password entry screen appears. 5 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears beside the blocke d rating. ⢠When you are finished, the word âÂÂNewâ disappears from the Parental Control menu. 6 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Deleti ng new ratin gs You can delete a New Parental Control menu. When the menu is deleted, all blocks are removed. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâ and then âÂÂOffâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 5 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. 6 Select A for âÂÂAcceptâ or D for âÂÂCancelâÂÂ. ⢠The New Parental Control me nu remains. However, if no settings are entere d within 60 seconds, the selection screen for deleting new ratings disappears. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. NOTE ⢠Broadcasts with new (arriving) ratings are not reflected while the Parental Control menu is open. ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ratings to be automatically blocked. Likewise , unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Temporarily deac tivating the P arental Control When the activated Parental Control senses a blocked TV program (or content), the Plasma Display shows a message over a blank screen. The method for temporarily deactivating the Parental Control differs, depending on the selected input source. Antenna A or antenna B: The following screen appears. Press ENTER . Enter your 4-digit password. ⢠The password entry screen appears for approximately 60 seconds. If the screen disappears prematurely, press ENTER to reveal the screen again. Input 1 â 4: Enter your 4-digit pa ssword. Pressing ENTER again causes the password entry screen to disappear. ⢠The above password entry scr een also appears during 2- screen mode, picture-in-picture , and while freezing an image. ⢠The password entry screen appears for approximately 60 seconds. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again. Parental Control New (xxx) New (xxx) New (xxx) Password New (xxx) Unavailable Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx XX XX Exit Home Menu Parental Control Status Change Password Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A Cancel Clear Entry D Enter your Password A Off Parental Control Status Change Password Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A Cancel Accept D Reset Digital regional ratings? A Off _ _ _ _ WWWWWWW 1000.0000 (Ant. B) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Parental Control Disable Parental Control Enter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Cancel Clear Entry D A Enter your Password Parental Control Please Input Y our Passw ord. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 42 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
43 En Tuner Setup 09 English Setting your favorite channels Set up to 10 TV channels for each of the four color buttons on the remote control (40 channels in total). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂFavorites âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select a color button (A, B, C, D). ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select a TV channel to be registered. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠A star appears beside the favorite channels currently selected. ⢠To register another TV channel under the same color button, repeat step 5. To register another TV channel under a different color button, repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting up closed captions Your Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder. Closed caption allows you to view conversations, narration, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitl es on your Plasma Display screen. Many digital TV programs also off er closed captioning. Digital closed captions support changi ng parameters such as fonts and colors. ⢠Not all programs and v ideos offer closed caption. Please look for the â â symbol to check for closed captioning on a program or video. Activating the closed caption 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂClosed Ca ptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / the n ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Selecting the type of conventional closed captions Select a conventiona l TV channe l before deciding on a type of closed captioning. Some digi tal TV programs provide only conventional closed captions. ⢠âÂÂCC1âÂÂ, âÂÂCC2âÂÂ, âÂÂCC3âÂÂ, or âÂÂCC4â displays subtit les of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture. ⢠âÂÂText1âÂÂ, âÂÂText2âÂÂ, âÂÂT ext3âÂÂ, or âÂÂText4â superimposes i nformation over the picture (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is independent from the TV program in progress. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂClosed Ca ptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂAnalog Setting sâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired clos ed caption. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The fact ory default is âÂÂCC1âÂÂ. 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Favorites Favorites Current Favorites A Line Up B0008.000 A0009.000 Favorites B 9.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A 11.0 B 11.0 A Exit Home Menu A A0011.000 B 8.0 A 9.0 Item Description Off (factory d efault) Does not show closed captions On Always shows closed captions On If Mute Shows closed ca ptions only when sound is bein g muted Closed Captions Status Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx On On If Mute Off Exit Home Menu Analog Settings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Analog Settings CC3 CC2 CC1 T ext 1 CC4 Exit Home Menu PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 43 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
44 En Tuner Setup 09 Selecting digital closed captions Use the following procedure to se lect digital closed capt ions: Service 1 to 6. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂDigital ServiceâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 6 Select the desired clos ed caption. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The fact ory default is âÂÂService 1âÂÂ. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. NOTE ⢠When available, the Primary Caption Service is usually offered for Service 1, and the Secondary Language Service is usually offered for Service 2. Selecting digital closed caption parameters Use the following procedure to ch ange digital closed captions parameters such as font si ze, font type, foreground and background colors. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂFont SizeâÂÂ, âÂÂFontâÂÂ, or any other item. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary. ( , / ) 8 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. The following table shows the av ailable parameters for each item. 1 Font 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 3 (monospaced without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionally spaced without ser- ifs)/ Font 5 (casual font)/ Font 6 (cursi ve font)/ Font 7 (small capitals font) With âÂÂAutoâ selected, parameters specifie d by the provid er are used. If not specified by the provider, the bolded default parameters are used. Selected parameters override any other parameters, including th ose from the provider . Clock Setting With âÂÂAuto Setâ selected for Cl ock Setting, the system acquires and sets the time automatically. You can also manually set the time. If power is lost (unplugged or power outage), the set time is cleared. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂTime ZoneâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select a time zone for your area. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select âÂÂD.S.T.âÂÂ. ( , / , then ENTER ) 7 Select âÂÂAppliesâ or âÂÂDoes Not ApplyâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) ⢠Set this option if your area uses Daylight Savings Time. 8 Select âÂÂAuto/Manual SetâÂÂ. ( , / , then EN TER ) 9 Select âÂÂAuto Setâ or âÂÂManual SetâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) Digital Settings Digital Settings Digital Ser vice xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Digital Service Service 3 Service 4 Service 5 Service 2 Service 1 Exit Home Menu Digital Settings Digital Settings Font Size xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Font Size Small Standard Large Exit Home Menu Item Selection Font Size Auto / Large/ Standard/ S mall Font 1 Auto / Fo n t 1 / Fo n t 2 / Fo n t 3 / Fo n t 4 / Fo n t 5 / Fo n t 6 / Fon t 7 Font Color Auto / B lack/ White/ R ed/ Green/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magenta/ Cyan Font Opacity Auto / Solid/ T ra nsparent/ T ranslucent/Flashing Background Color Auto / Black/ White/ R ed/ Green/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magenta/ Cyan Background Opacity Auto / Solid/ T ransparent/ T ranslucent Clock Time Zone Atlantic Eastern Time Zone xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Central Mountain Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:55 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 Clock Daylight Savings Time Applies D.S.T . xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Does Not Apply Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:56 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 44 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
45 En Tuner Setup 09 English 10 If you chose âÂÂAuto SetâÂÂ, select an antenna (A or B) and a channel number using / and ENTER . ⢠The date and time is corrected automat ically using data from the selected channel. If you select âÂÂManual S etâÂÂ, ma nually set the date and time u s i n g /, / a n d ENTER . 11 Press HO ME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠If the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is active, the Plasma Display accesses time through the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. When the TV Guide is provid ing the time data, you cannot set up the clock using the menu. If you select a parameter for the Clock menu then press ENTER , the menu screen disappears and a dialog box appears. Press A to clear the dialog box. Auto/Manual Set Clock Set Channel Ant. A Auto/Manual Set â¢Auto Set 2.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 Auto/Manual Set Date and Time 3 /17/04 Auto/Manual Set â¢Manual Set 11:58pm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock 5 4 3 6 Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 45 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
46 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation Using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system Before you can use the TV Guide On Screen⢠syste m, youâÂÂll need to set it up. If you havenâÂÂt already done this, please turn to âÂÂTV Guide On Screen⢠System SetupâÂÂon page 32 before proceeding. In order to record TV programs with a VCR, you need to correctly connect the equipment to the Plasma Display. For VCR connection information, see page 71. NOTE ⢠The TV Guide On Screen⢠interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready a nd digital cable se rvices as well as conventional broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite servi ces. ⢠Once the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is acti vated it may take up to 24 hours to begin re ceiv ing TV program listings. Initially, of al l eight days of li stings may take up to on e week to load. ⢠TV Guide may not be availa ble in all area s. As content providers move to digital pro grammin g and broadc asting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or be come unavailable. Screen components Many of the screens have common elements to make using the system easier. 1 TV GUIDE logo 2C l o c k â Shows the current time 3T i m e s l o t â Half-hour time slots are displayed horizontally 4T i m e t a b â Indicates the currently selected time slot 5 C urrent service label â Indicates the currently selected service 6 Service bar â Gives access to the various TV Guide services. 7 Title â Shows the title of the TV program 8 Info Bar â Shows various icons to convey information or show the status of an item 9 Vi deo window â Allows you to co ntinue watching the current program while using the Guide 10 Panel ads and panel m enu entry â Space for show or product advertising (and the panel menu) 11 Channel logo 12 Info Box â Shows information about the highlighted item 13 Channel ads â Space to advertise upcoming programs and specia ls TV Guide On Screen⢠icons Various icons are used to convey information or show the status of an item. These icons can be o n the Info Bar, inside the Info Box, or beside program titles. ⢠Info icon â Alerts that additional information is available (press INFO to di splay) ⢠Progress Bar â Shows the elapsed time of the current program ⢠HDTV â Indicates that a program is a high-definition broadcast ⢠New â The program is new (not a repeat) ⢠Stereo â The program is broadcast in stereo ⢠CC â The program is broadcas t with closed captioning ⢠TV Rating â Indicates t he age rating for the program ⢠Record On ce â One-time only recording ⢠Record Daily â Records the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual recording only) ⢠Record Regu larly â Records the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time ⢠Record Weekly â R ecords a program every week at the same time/day ⢠Record Suspend â The program is set to record, but is suspended because of a conflict with another recording or auto tune reminder. The recording resumes when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Record Off â The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but is not recorded until the frequency is changed to one of the above ⢠Remind Once â One-time only reminder ⢠Remind Dai ly â Reminds for the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only) ⢠Remind Regularly â Reminds the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time ⢠Remind Weekly â Remi nds every week at the same time/day ⢠Remind Suspend â A reminder is set for the program, but is suspended because of a conflict with another auto tune reminder or recording. The reminder resumes when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Remind Off â The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but the reminder is held unt il the frequency is changed to one of the above. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 46 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
47 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English TV Guide On Screen⢠naviga tion The table below summari zes the TV Guide On Sc reen⢠syst em navigation buttons for the remote control. You can also use the panelâÂÂs buttons, TV GUIDE , ENTER, UP / DOWN , and LEFT/RIGHT to make selections. The UP /DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT buttons o perate the same as t he / and / buttons on the remote control. The Listings screen The Listings screen is the m ain menu for the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. This is the screen you see when you press TV GUIDE . Options on the Listings screen include: ⢠View eight days of program list ings. ⢠Display information about individual programs. ⢠Select a program to start watching. ⢠Set a reminder about a program. ⢠Set a program to record. ⢠See a thumbnail of any channel in the video window. ⢠Access panel and channel ads. 1 Press TV GUIDE to display the Listings screen. ⢠With âÂÂLISTINGS â highlighted in the Service bar (top of the screen), press INFO to display (then close) Help information. ⢠Press TV GUIDE anytime to exit. 2 P r e s s /// t o n a v i g a t e t h e L i s t i n g s s c r e e n . ⢠With a program highlighted, press ENTER to start watching that program. ⢠Move right for programs showing at later times. ⢠Press PAGE /â to scroll one menu page at a time. ⢠Press INFO to display additional information (if available) about the currently selected show. ⢠Press DAY /â to jump to the next/previous day in the listings grid. 3 To set the highlighted pro gram to record, press ï« REC . Pressing ï« REC just once sets the program to record. Press ï« REC repeatedly to change th e frequency of the recording: ⢠Once â Just records the highlighted program ⢠Regularl y â Records the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time 1 Key What it does TV GUIDE P ress to display the TV Guide On Screen⢠system (also use to exit ). /// Use to navigate screens (highlight an item) ENTER P ress to confirm a select ion or execute an action Can also be used to display the panel m enu when a future program is highlighted MENU P ress to display a panel menu INFO P ress to cycle through th e av ailable information for the current program or screen ï« REC P ress to set the highligh ted program to record Number buttons Use f or numeric entr y PAGE /â Press to select the previous/next page of information (whe re appli cable) DAY /â P ress to jump to the next /previous day of program listings (if applicable) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 47 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
48 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 ⢠Weekly â Records t he same program at t he same time 1 / day every week ⢠No record icon â Does not record. 1 The program is recorded if it starts any time up to the midway point of the originall y schedule d program. For e xample, up to 9:15 for a 9: 00 to 9:30 progra m. These recording options use the default settings. To record using settings other th an the defaults, use the panel menu recording option described b elow. NOTE ⢠When TV Guide On Screen⢠is not being displayed, you can record a program simply by pressing the REC button on the remote control. Press the REC button to record the current program episode. Recording b egins immediately. I f the program is listed in the TV Guide On Screenâ¢, recording stops at the end of the program. If the program is not listed in the TV Guide On Screen⢠system, reco rding continues for 30 minutes. ⢠When TV Guide On Screen⢠is not displayed, pressing the REC button more than once has no effect. Recording programs The simplest way to record a pro gram is to highlight it then press ï« REC (as described above) . Howe ver, if you want to set the recording options to anything other than the default, use the Recording Options panel menu. Here you can adjust the start and end times, the desti nation of the recording, etc. 1 From LISTINGS, SCH EDULE, or SEARCH, highlight the program you want to record. 2 Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. 3 Highlight âÂÂset recordingâ then press ENTER . 4 Set the recording options: Press / to highlight a field then press / to change the setting. ⢠frequency â select whether the program will be recorded Once , Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or Weekly (every week at the same time/day). The Off option adds the prog ram to the recording schedule but doesnâÂÂt record it (you can set it to record later). ⢠start â set the start time of the recording to On time , or up to 120 minutes before or after the scheduled time. ⢠end â set the end time of the re cording to On time , or up to 120 minutes before or after the scheduled time. ⢠recorder â select a recorder to be used for recording. ⢠If you want to cancel the recording, highlight cancel then press ENTER . 5 Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to highlight âÂÂschedule recordingâ then press ENTER again. ⢠The recording is now set (l isted in SCHEDULE) and the appropriate icon appears on the show title. If there is a time c onflict with a previously sc heduled recording or auto-tune reminder, you wi ll be alerted by one of the messages below. You can select to record the conflicting program, or cancel the recording. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 48 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
49 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English When the recording is about to start The TV Guide On Screen⢠syst em alerts you when a scheduled recording is about to start and gives you the chance to cancel the recording. When you see the on-screen alert, select the next action; ⢠âÂÂchange channel, start recordingâ â¢ âÂÂdonâÂÂt change channel; cancel recordingâ Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear. Press A to start recording as scheduled or D to cancel recording. While recording is in progress If you attempt to change the channel during recording, the following screen appears. Select the next action: ⢠âÂÂdonâÂÂt change; keep recordingâ â¢ âÂÂchange; stop recordingâ Depending on the situation, th e following screens may appear. This reminder remains on-screen for 15 seconds. Press A to change the channel and quit recording; or press D not to change the channel and to continue recording. Setting program reminders By setting a program reminder you can have the TV alert you when a program is about to start on another channel. You can set reminders for individual episodes, or for every time a program airs. 1 From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE, or SEAR CH, highli ght the program. 2 Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. 3 Highligh t âÂÂset reminderâ then press ENTER . 4 Set the reminder options. Press / to highlight a field; press / to change the setting. ⢠freque ncy â select whether to be reminded just On ce , Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or Weekly (every week at the same time/day). T he Off option adds the program to the reminder schedule but no reminder is given (to be set later). ⢠auto tune â choose whether the TV should automatically change channels when a remi nder is due. ⢠when â set when the reminder appears (before, on time, or after a program has started). The following timer is about to begin: T ues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000.000 BRA V022 The following timer is about to begin: Wed. 1/5 4 : 06 am - 9 : 08 am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000. 5 BRA V022 PLASMA DISPLA Y Changing channels will interrupt a recording in progress. Recording In Progress Change Channel Now A Don't Change Channel D Changing channels will interrupt a recording in progress. Don't Change Channel Change Channel Now D A Recording In Progress REC PLASMA DISPLA Y PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 49 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
50 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 5 Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to highlight âÂÂschedule re minderâÂÂ, then press E NTER again. ⢠The reminder is now set (listed in SCHEDULE) and the appropriate icon appears on the show title. If there is a time conflict with a previously sched uled auto-tune reminder or recording, you w ill be alerte d. One of the messages below will appear. You ca n select to set a reminder for the conflicting program or cancel the reminder. When a scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is OFF) Depending on your settings, the reminder will appear on your TV screen shortly before the progr am is scheduled to start. This happens when you have selected âÂÂNOâ for the auto t une. The reminder remains on-screen for three minutes before it automatically disappears. Press ENTER to switch to the high lighted program in the reminder or hi ghlight âÂÂhide remi ndersâ to di smiss the reminder. If more than one reminder is set for the same time, press / to select which program to watch. Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear. The reminder remains on-screen for 15 seconds. Press A to leave the reminder in effect, or D to dismiss the reminder. When scheduled r eminder is due (a uto-tune is ON) If the âÂÂauto-tuneâ setting was set to âÂÂyesâ in the Remind Options, one of the following screens appears, depending on the situatio n. The screen remains visible for 15 seconds. Press A to make the Timer Al ert screen disappear. T ues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000.000 BRA V022 Wed. 1/5 4 : 06 am - 9 : 08 am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000. 5 BRA V022 PLASMA DISPLA Y T ues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am Accept A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000.000 BRA V022 Wed. 1/5 4 : 06 am - 9 : 08 am Accept A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000. 5 BRA V022 PLASMA DISPLA Y PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 50 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
51 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English Searching for programs The Search screen lets you se arch for programs alphabetically, by category, or by keyword. You can also search for HDTV programs. Searching by category This option supports searching for programs by category, and then by a further sub-category. 1 Select âÂÂSEARCHâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Press to move to the search category ba r, then press / to select a search category. ⢠Available categorie s may include: â¢M o v i e s ⢠Sports ⢠Children â¢E d u c a t i o n a l â¢N e w s â¢V a r i e t y â¢S e r i e s â¢H D T V 3 Press to highlight the search sub-categories then select a sub-category. ⢠Sub-categories availability depends upon the category you choose. 4 Press ENTER to list upcoming programs that match the categories you chose. 5 Highligh t a program listing then press ME NU to display the Episode Options menu. ⢠If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start watching it immediately. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 51 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
52 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 Searching by keyword This option supports searching for shows based on keywords you enter. The keywords you create are stored so you can use them again. 1 Select âÂÂSEARCHâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Pres s to move to the search category bar, then press / to select âÂÂKEYWORDâÂÂ. ⢠Previously entered keywords are displayed. S imply select one to search fo r it again. ⢠To edit or delete a ke yword, highlig ht it then pres s MENU . From the panel menu you can choose âÂÂedit searchâ or âÂÂdelete sear châÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER to display the Keyword Search menu. 4 Select âÂÂnew searc hâÂÂ. 5 If you want to change the cate gory, scroll up to select the category you want. â¢T o s e a r c h u s i n g o n l y t h e k e y w ord , leave the category set to âÂÂAllâÂÂ. ⢠If you select a category (âÂÂHD TVâÂÂ, for example) then youâÂÂll only see programs in that categ ory that also match the keyword. 6 Highlight âÂÂenter keywordâ then press ENTER . 7 Input the keyword for the search. ⢠H i g h l i g h t c h a r a c t e r s b y p r e s s i n g ///, t h e n p r e s s ENTER to input the letter or number. ⢠The new keyword is stored for future searches. 8 Select âÂÂDONE â to start the search process. 9 Highlight a program listing, then press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. ⢠If the program is currently showing, press E NTER to start watching it immediately. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 52 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
53 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English Alphabetical search This search is designed to display all programs that start with a particular letter. 1 Select âÂÂSEARCHâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Press to move to the search category ba r, then press / to select âÂÂALPHABETICALâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER . 4 Select a letter, then press ENTER to display all prog rams starting with that letter. 5 Highligh t a program then press MENU to display the Episode Options m enu. ⢠If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start watching it immediately. The search Episode Opti ons menu From the Episode Options menu you can s elect: ⢠go to Service bar â closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠tune to channel / watch now â exits the TV Guide On Screen⢠guide and tunes to the channel ⢠set recording â goes to the Record Options menu ⢠set reminder â goes to the Remind Opt ions menu ⢠cancel â closes the panel menu and returns to the highlighted program Navigation and search tips ⢠The / buttons move the highlight between options in the menu. Use the number buttons to input information. ⢠If a highlighted field has arrows on either side, press / to cycle through the options. â¢P r e s s ENTER on any option t o highlight the default command (e.g., Done ) then press ENTER again to execute and close the menu. ⢠Select Cancel then press ENTER to close the menu and return to the previous screen, or press MENU to close the menu without saving the changes. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 53 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
54 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 Scheduling recordings and reminders From the Schedule area you can review, edit or delete future recording sessions and reminders. 1 Select âÂÂSCH EDULEâ from the Serv ice bar at the top of the screen. Programs marked for reminding or to be recorded (referred to as scheduled âÂÂeventsâÂÂ) are listed. The icon on the right indicates the status of the event. ⢠Once only recording ⢠Daily Records the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual recording only) ⢠Regularly â Records the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time 1 ⢠Weekly recording (every week at the same time/day) ⢠Record Suspen d â The program is set to record, but is suspended because of a conflict with another recording or auto tune reminder. The recording resumes when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Off : The progr am remains in th e SCHEDULE list, but is not recorded. ⢠Once only reminder ⢠Daily Reminds for the same channel and tim e every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only) ⢠Regularly â Reminds the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time 2 ⢠Weekly reminder (every week at the same time/day ) ⢠Remind Suspend â A reminder is set for the program, but is suspended because of a conflict with another auto tune reminder or recording. The reminder activates when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Off : The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but the reminder is not sent. 1 The program records if it star ts any time up to the mid way point of the originally schedu led program. For example, up to 9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program. 2 The reactivated reminder appear s if the prog ram starts any time up to the midway point of the original schedule. F or example, up to 9:15 for a 9: 00 to 9:30 prog ram. 2 Highlight a program in the list then press MENU to display the Schedule Options menu. ⢠Highlight a program i n the list to see information related to that program (data appears in the Info Box). The Schedule Options menu Press MENU with either âÂÂSCHEDULEâ (in the Servi ce bar) or a program highlighted to access the Schedule Options menu. When âÂÂSCHEDULEâ is hi ghlighted in the service bar: ⢠go to Service Bar â closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠sort by â select a sort order for the program listings ⢠new manual recording â select then fill in the necessary fields to set the recording Select âÂÂschedule recordingâ t o save and exit or sele ct âÂÂcancelâ to exit witho ut saving. ⢠new manual reminder â select and then fill in all the necessary fields to set the reminder. Select âÂÂschedule reminderâ when youâÂÂre done to save and exit, or select âÂÂcancelâ to exit without saving. ⢠done â closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠cancel â closes the menu without saving changes and returns to the Service bar at the top of the scr een When a program is highlighted: ⢠go to Service Bar â closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠watch now â selected program appears (this option is âÂÂtune to channelâ for a future program) ⢠cancel â closes the menu and returns to the highlighted program listing For recording: ⢠set recording â set the program to record (opens the Record Options menu) ⢠delete recording â remove the recordin g from the schedu le (requires confirmation) ⢠edit recording â edit the recording settings (opens the Record Options menu) For reminder: ⢠set reminder â set a reminder notice for the pr ogram (opens the Remind Options menu) ⢠delete reminder â remove the reminder from the schedule (requires confirmation) ⢠edit reminder â edit the reminder settings (opens the Remind Options menu) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 54 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
55 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English Changing setup options You can change TV Guide On Screen⢠settings from the Setup menu. Setup options are divided into three categories: System Settings, Channel Displa y, and Default Options. 1 Select âÂÂSETUPâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Press to select a Setup option. Adjustment options appear with each highlighted menu item. ⢠System Settings â ZIP/postal code, cable setup, etc. ⢠Channel Display â Channel position, tuning channel, display on/off, etc. ⢠Default Options â General, recording and reminder defaults Changing the System Settings The System Settings include your ZIP/postal code and your cable TV setup. 1 Highligh t the âÂÂChange Sy stem Settingsâ item. 2 Press ENTER to display the current settings and the options to change them. 3 S elect one of the options, then follow the on-screen instructions. ⢠Yes, everything is correct (d isplays a helpful information screen). Press ENTER to qui t the TV Guide O n Screen ⢠System. ⢠Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect (displays a screen with alternate channel lineups). Press ENTER to display the Channel Editor screen. ⢠No, repeat setup process (d isplays Screen 1 shown on page 32). Changing the Channel Display settings From the Channel Display se ttings you can set/change: ⢠the display setting to always display (On), never display (Off), or display only when channel information is available (Auto Hide) ⢠the tuned channel number ⢠the channel position in the channel listing 1 Highligh t the âÂÂChange Ch annel Displayâ ite m. 2 Press ENTER to display the channel editor. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 55 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
56 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 3 Press / to highlight a channel then press ENTER to go to the Grid Options menu. From the Grid Options menu you can set: ⢠channel â On (display in channel list), Off (donâÂÂt display) or Auto Hide (hide when no program information is available) ⢠service â the type of service that the channel operates on (cable, etc.) ⢠tune channel â the channel number that t he channel listing is tuned to ⢠position â place that the channel appears in the channel list 4 After making all selections for the channel, highlight âÂÂdoneâ then press ENTER . ⢠To cancel without saving the changes, select âÂÂcancelâÂÂ. Changing the Default Options The menu provides options to change the default settings for recordings, reminders, an d other general settings. 1 Select the âÂÂChange De fault Optionsâ item. 2 S elect a default option category. A different panel menu appears for each option. General default options ⢠box size â the initial size of the Info Box (no, small, large, last used) ⢠box cy cle â the cycle behavior of the Info Box (no only, small only, large only, no & small, no & large, small & large, all) ⢠auto guide â Display TV Guide On Scre en⢠guide automatically when you turn on the TV Record defaults ⢠start â when to start a recording (up to 120 minutes earlier or later than the program start time, or On time) ⢠end â when to end a recording (up to 120 minutes earlier or later than the program end time, or On time) ⢠recorder â selects a recorder to be used for recording. Remind defaults ⢠auto tune â automatically tunes to the correct channel when a reminder becomes due (Yes or No) ⢠when â set the display time for the reminder (15 minute s early to 15 minutes late, or On time) 3 When the settings are complete, highlight âÂÂdoneâ then press ENTER . ⢠To cancel without saving the changes, select âÂÂcancelâÂÂ. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 56 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
57 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Adjustments and Settings Sleep Timer When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into standby. Press SLEEP to select the desired time. ⢠The timer starts counting. ⢠Each time you press SLEEP , the selection cycles as below: ⢠The factory default is âÂÂOffâÂÂ. NOTE ⢠To cancel the S leep Timer, select âÂÂOf fâ by pressing SLEEP . ⢠Five minutes be fore the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears every minute. You can also use this me nu to set the Sleep Timer. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSleep Tim erâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select the desired time. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. AV Selection Viewing options depend upon th e current environment (e.g., room brightness), the type of the current TV program, or the type of images input from external equipment. To change the view, follow the directions below. 1 Press AV SELECTION . ⢠The current AV Selection mode appears. 2 Press AV SELECTION again before t he displayed mode disappears. ⢠For AV source, the mode cycles in this order; STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, PURE and USER. ⢠For PC source, the mode toggles between STANDARD and USER. You can also use the menu to change the options. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂAV Selectio nâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select the desired option. ( / then ENTER ) For AV source For PC source 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠You can also press AV SELECTION on the remot e control unit to change the viewing option. ⢠Selecting the DYNA MIC viewing se tting causes all other viewing options to become unavailable (grayed out). 30 60 90 120 Off (cancel) (minutes) A V Selection ST ANDARD D YNAMIC MO VIE GAME PURE USER Item Description ST ANDARD F or a highly defi ned imag e in a normally bright room This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources. DYNAMIC F or a very sharp image with maximum contrast This mode does not allow manual image quality adjustment. This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources. MOVIE Fo r m o v i e s This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources. GAME Lowers image brightness for easier viewing This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources PURE R eflects input signals a s faithfully as possible For example, you may select this option to check image materials. USER Allows you to custom iz e settings as desire d You can set the mode for each input source. Item Description ST ANDARD F or a highly defined im age in a normally bri ght room USER Allows y ou to customize settings as desired You can set the mode for each input source. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 57 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
58 En Adjustments and Settings 11 Basic picture adjustments Adjust the picture to your preference unless DYNAMIC was selected. The DYNAMIC setting automatically adjusts the image. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select the desired level. ( / ) ⢠When an adjustment screen is displayed, you can also press / to change the item to be adjusted. 5 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. For AV source For PC source For PC source, the following screen appears: NOTE ⢠To perform advanced picture adjustments, select âÂÂPro Adjustâ in step 3 then press ENTER . For the subsequent procedures see âÂÂAdvanced picture adjustmentsâ on page 59. ⢠To rest ore the factory de faults for all items, press / to highlight âÂÂResetâ in step 3 then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ then press ENTER . Item button button Contrast F or less contrast F or more contrast Brightness F or less brig htness F or more brightness Color F or less color intensity F or more color intensity Tint Skin tones become purplish Skin tones become greenish Sharpness For less sharpness F or more sharpness Item button button Contrast F or less contrast F or more contrast Brightness F or less brig htness F or more brightness Red F or weaker red For stronger red Green F or weaker green F or stronger green Blue F or weaker blue For stronger blue Picture A V Selection Contrast Brightness Color Tint Sharpness Pro Adjust Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 Contrast 40 Picture A V Selection Contrast Brightness Red Green Blue Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 58 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
59 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Advanced picture adjustments The Plasma Display System provides various advanced functions for optimizing the picture quality. For details on these functions, see the following tables. Using PureCinema 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 Select âÂÂPureCinemaâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) 5 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠For the selectable paramete rs, refer to the table below. NOTE ⢠âÂÂStandardâ is unavailable for 480p or 720p@60 Hz or 1080p@24 Hz (HDMI) signals. ⢠âÂÂADVâ is unavailable for 1080p@24 Hz (HDMI) signals. Using Color Temp 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂColor TempâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) 6 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you have selected a desired parameter in this step, skip steps 7 and 8. ⢠An option is to apply a fine adjustment. To do this, select âÂÂManualâ first and then press and hold ENTER for at least three (3) seconds. Th e manual ad justment screen appears. Continue to step 7. 7 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 8 Select the desired lev el. ( / ) ⢠To adjust another item, press RETU RN , then repeat steps 7 and 8. ⢠Press / to select another item for adjustment. 9 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. PureCinema Automatically detects a film-ba sed source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high- definition picture quality. Selections Off Deactivat es th e P ureCinema. Standard Produces smooth an d vivid moving images (film specific ) by automatically detecting recorded image information when displaying DVD or high-defi nition images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per secon d. ADV P roduces smooth and quality moving images (as shown on theatre screens) by converting to 72 Hz when displaying DVD images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per secon d. Color Temp Adjusts the color temper ature, resulting in a better whit e balance. Selections High White with bluish tone Mid-High Intermediate to ne between High and Mid Mid Natural t one Mid-Low Intermediate tone betwe en Mid and Low Low White with reddish tone Manual Color tempe rature adju sted to your prefer ence Item button button R High Fine adjustme nt for bright portio ns F or weaker red F or stronger red G High For weaker green F or stronger green B High F or weaker b lue F or stronger blue R Low Fine adjustme nt for dark portions F or weaker red F or stronger red G Low For weaker green F or stronger green B Low F or weaker blue F or stronger blue PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 59 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
60 En Adjustments and Settings 11 Using CTI 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂCTIâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using Color Management 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂColor ManagementâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 7 Select the desired level. ( / ) ⢠To adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat steps 6 and 7. ⢠Press / to select another item for adjustment. 8 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using Color Space 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂColor SpaceâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using Intelligent Color 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂIntelligent ColorâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. CTI Color T ransient Improvem ent (CTI) provides imag es with clearer color contours. Selections Off Deactivates CTI On Activates CTI Item button button R Closer to magenta Closer to yellow Y Closer to red Closer to green G Closer to yellow Closer to cyan C Closer to gre en Closer to blue B Closer to cyan Closer to magenta M Closer to blue Closer to re d Color Management 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y R G C B M Color Space Changes t he color reprod uction spa ce. Selections 1 Optimized for vivid, vibrant color reproduction 2 S tandard color reproduction Intelligent Color Intelligen t Color (IC) au tomaticall y selects the op timum color to nes for an image. Selections Off Deactivat es Intelligent Color On Activates In telligent Color PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 60 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
61 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Eliminating noise from images 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂNRâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Choose âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâ or â BNRâÂÂ. 6 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using the Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) functions 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂDREâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Choose âÂÂDynamic ContrastâÂÂ, âÂÂBla ck LevelâÂÂ, âÂÂACLâÂÂ, âÂÂGammaâ or âÂÂIntelli gent DREâÂÂ. 6 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. DNR Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) eliminat es video noise for cl ean, crisp images. Selections Off Deactivates DNR High Enhanced DNR Mid Standard DN R Low M oderate DNR MPEG NR MPEG NR , video noise reduction for MPE G-encoded content, elimin ates mosquito nois e (tiny irregularit ies in the imag e) from video when a DVD is played. The result is a noise-free image. Selections Off Deactivates MPEG NR High Enhanced MPEG NR Mid Standard MPEG N R Low Mod erate MPEG NR BNR Block Noise Reductio n (BNR) help s reduce mosq uito noise a ppearing in high-definition images. Selections Off Deactivates BNR On Ac tivates BN R Dynamic Contrast Dynamic Contrast (DC) emphasizes imag e contrast so that the difference between bright and dark ar eas become more distinct. Selections Off Deactivates Dynamic Cont rast High Enhanced Dynamic Contrast Mid Standard Dynamic Contrast Low Mod erate Dynamic Contra st Black Level Black Level (B L) emphasize s the dark portions of i mages so that the difference between br ight and da rk areas become more distinct. Selections Off Deactivates Black Level On Activates Black Level ACL Automatic Contrast Lim iter (ACL) automatically selects the optimum contrast for an imag e. Selections Off D eactivates ACL On Activates ACL Gamma Gamma adjusts t he image gradat ion characte ristics. Selections 1 Se lects gamma characteristics 1 2 Selects gamm a characteristics 2 3 Selects gamm a characteristics 3 Intelligent DRE Intelligent Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) optimi zes the image quality . Selections Off D eactivates Intelligent DRE On Activates Inte lligent DRE PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 61 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
62 En Adjustments and Settings 11 Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂOthersâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 5 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Choose âÂÂ3DYCâ or âÂÂI-P ModeâÂÂ. 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠In I-P Mode, th e individu al pa rameters are unavailable for 480p and 720p@60 Hz signal s. Sound adjustments Adjust the sound to your preference. See page 57. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / ) 4 Select the desired level. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore all factory defaults, press / to select âÂÂR esetâ in step 3 then press EN TER . A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ then press ENTER . 3DYC 3DY C optimizes characteristics for se parating brightness sig nals and color signals. This works for bot h video and still images. Selections Off Deactivates 3DYC High Enhanced 3D Y C Mid Standard 3DY C Low Moderate 3 DY C I-P Mode I-P Mode opti mizes conversion from interlace signals to progressive signals. This works for bo th video and still imag es. Selections 1 Optimum for video images 2 Standard setting 3 Optimum for still images Item bu tton button Tr e b l e For weaker treb le For stronger treb le Bass F or weaker bass For stronger bass Balance Decreases audio from the right speaker Decreases aud io from th e left speak er Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surr ound 0 0 Off Off 2 Sound ST ANDARD PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 62 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
63 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English FOCUS Focus shifts the sound-source direction (sound image) upward and produces clear sound contours. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂFOCUSâ . ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Front Surround Front Surround provides three-di mensional sound effects and/ or a deep, rich bass. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂFront SurroundâÂÂ. ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠(WOW) FOCUS is on and TruBass SRS is selected for Front Surround ⢠trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠WOW technology is incorpora ted under license from SRS Labs, Inc. Power Control Power Control provides conven ient power saving options. Energy Save There are three Energy Save modes to reduce power consumption. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPower Contro lâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂEnergy SaveâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) 4 Select âÂÂSave1âÂÂ, âÂÂSave2â or âÂÂPicture OffâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠When the signal is coming from a PC, use the Home menu to set this option. No Signal off (AV mode only) The system automa tically enters Standby if no signal is received for 15 minutes. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPower Contro lâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂNo Signal offâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂEnableâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Five minutes before the system is placed into Standby, a message appears as each minute counts down. ⢠The system may not enter Stan dby if the TV program signal has a high video noise level. Item Description Off Deactivates FOC US On Activates FOCUS Item Description Off Dea ctivates both SRS an d T ruBass SRS Reproduces highly effectiv e three-dimensi onal sound T ruBass (factory defa ult) P rovides deep, rich bass using a new technolog y T ruBass SRS Provides both T ruBass and SRS effect s Item Description Standard Maximum pic ture brightness; may increase glass panel buzzing Save1 Slightly reduced power co nsumption an d brightness; optimal setting fo r most uses Save2 Lowest power consumption ; slightly decreased brightne ss Picture Off Deactivates the screen to save power . T o restore the screen display , press any button other than VOL /â and MUTING . This setting is not memori zed by the system. Item Description Disabl e (factory defa ult) Does not place the system in to Standby Enable Places the system into St andby if no signal is received for 15 minutes PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 63 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
64 En Adjustments and Settings 11 No Operation off (AV mode only) The system automatically enters Standby when no operation is performed for three hours. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPower ControlâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂNo Operation offâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Five minutes before the system is placed into Standby, a message appears as ea ch minute counts down. Power Management (PC mode only) The system automatically enters St andby when no signal is received from the PC. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPower ControlâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPower ManagementâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂMode1â or âÂÂMode2âÂÂ. ( / then ENT ER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Image position adjustment (AV mode only) This function adjusts an imageâÂÂs horizontal/vertica l position on the Plasma Display. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPositionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂH/ V Position AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Adjust the vertical position ( / ) or horizontal position (/) . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore the factory defaults, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4 then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ then press ENTER . ⢠Adjustments are stored separately for each input source. ⢠Depending on the d isplayed video, the image position may not change even after adjustment. Automatic image position and clock (Hertz) adjustments (PC mode only) Use Auto Setup to automaticall y adjust image positions and clock speeds when coming from a PC. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂAuto SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Auto Setup begins. 4 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠When Auto Setup is finish ed, âÂÂAuto Setup completed.â appears. ⢠Although âÂÂAuto Setup complete d.â appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depend ing on conditio ns. ⢠Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or a monochrome pict ure. If Auto Setup fails, change the PC image and try again. ⢠The PC and the Plasma Display must be turned On before starting Auto Setup. Item Description Disable (factory d efault) Does not place the syst em into Standb y Enable Pla ces the syste m into Standby if n o operation is performed for th ree hours Item Description Off (factory d efault) No power management Mode1 ⢠Places the system into Standby when no sign al is received fr om the PC fo r eight m inutes ⢠Althoug h the PC is acce ssed and a sig nal is received again , the system stays off . ⢠P ress STANDBY /ON on the Plasma Display or TV on the re mote contro l to turn the panel On Mode2 ⢠Places the system into Standby when no sign al is received for eight seconds ⢠Access the P C (a signal is re ceived again), th e system turns On ⢠P ress STANDBY /ON on the Plasma Display or TV on the re mote contro l to turn the panel On . P osition H/V P osition Adjust Reset Option Auto Setup Manual Setup PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 64 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
65 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC mode only) Usually you can easily adjust th e positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Se tup to optimize the posit ions and clock of images when necessary. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂManual Setupâ . ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Perform adjustment. ( / or / ) ⢠With âÂÂClockâ or âÂÂPhaseâ selected, you can change the parameter using / . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore all factory defaults, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4 then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ t hen press ENTER . Selecting a screen size manually In single-screen mode, pre ss SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the screen. The Video signal determin es the available screen size options. ⢠The selectable screen sizes di ffer depending on the type of input signal. AV mode NOTE ⢠Avoid displaying signals that do not completely fill the screen. This may cause temp orary or permanent image retention depending on the frequency and duration. PC mode except for XGA signals PC mode for XGA signals (Ex. 1024 à768 input with PRO-1140HD/PRO-1540HD ) NOTE ⢠In 2-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the left screen. ⢠For the PRO-940HD the number of panel pixels is different. Signal processing and actual viewing conditions vary slightly. Manual Setup H/V P osition Adjust Clock Phase Reset 0 0 Item Description 4:3 For 4:3 âÂÂstandardâ pictures (side bar appears on each side) FULL F or 16:9 squeezed pictures ZOOM F or 16:9 letter box pictu res (bars may appear on the top and bottom on some progra ms) CINEMA For 14:9 letterbox pic tures (bars may appear on the top and bottom on some progra ms) WIDE In this mode pictures are stretch ed to fill the screen , side to side Item Description 4:3 Fills the screen without altering the input signal aspect ratio FULL F ull 16:9 screen display Dot by Dot Matches input signal to the same number of screen pixels Item Description 4:3 Matches input signal to the same number of screen pixels Optimized for 1024 à768 d isplay FULL1 F ull 16:9 screen display Optimized for 1024 à768 d isplay FULL2 F or wide signal display Use when displaying 1360 à768 signal resolution PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 65 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
66 En Adjustments and Settings 11 ⢠When watching a High Defini tion TV broadcast, press SCREEN SIZE to cycle through FULL, ZOOM, WIDE, and 4:3. ⢠High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE selected may hide some of the screen image. If this is the case, select FULL. ⢠Some HD broadcast s may display 4:3 content wi th side masks. Extended viewing with the sides masked can cause uneven wear. After viewing 4:3 content, try watching a program in full screen motion video. AV mode PC mode except for XGA signals PC mode for XGA signals NOTE ⢠The sel ectable screen sizes may d iffer depending on the conditions. Selecting a screen size automatically The Plasma Display automati cally selects an appropriate screen size when video signals are received from a connected HDMI device (s ee page 69). To activate this function, use the following procedure. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂAuto SizeâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂOn âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Manually select an appropriate sc reen size if an image does not automatically switch to the correct screen format. ⢠When the video signal contains no aspect ratio information, automatic screen sizi ng is unavailable. Selecting a screen size for 4:3 aspect rat io signals With the Auto Size function activated, choose whe ther the Plasma Display should choose the 4:3 mode or WIDE mode when 4:3 aspect ratio signals are receive d. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂ4:3 ModeâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂ4:3âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. 4:3 WIDE FULL CINEMA ZOOM 4:3 Dot by Dot FULL 4:3 FULL2 FULL1 Item Description Off (factory d efault) Deactivate s the Auto Si ze function On Activates t he Auto Size function Item Description WIDE (factory d efault) Wide im age without s ide masks 4:3 4:3 aspect ratio with side masks Auto Size Off On 4:3 Mode WIDE 4:3 4:3 WIDE PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 66 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
67 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Changing the brightness on both sides of the screen (Side Mask) With the 4:3 screen size se lected for the AV mode, you can change the brightness of the gray vertical bars (side masks) that appear on the sides of the screen. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂSide MaskâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 4 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Displaying pictures in 4:3 sc reen mode for an extended period may cause an after-image. View another program at full screen afterwards to avoid this issue. Language setting To change the language being used for on-screen displays (such as menus in French or Spanish instead of English), follow the instructions below. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂLanguageâ . ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select a language. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Item Description Fixed (factory defa ult) Always sets the same brightness for the gray side masks Auto Adju sts the brightness of the gra y side masks according to the brightness of im ages Language Menu English PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 67 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
68 En Using External Equipment 12 Using External Equipment About External Equipment You can connect many types of devices to your Pla sma Display System. Some examples are a DVD player, VCR, PC, game console, or camcorder. To view images com ing from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control or the INPUT button on the Plasma Display. CAUTION ⢠To protect equipment, always unplug the Plasma Display from the power outlet before adding to a DVD player, VCR, PC, game console, camcorder, or other device. NOTE ⢠Refer to the deviceâÂÂs operating i nstructions (DVD player, PC, etc.) before connecting the equipment. Watching a DVD image Connecting a DVD player Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player or other audio/visual equipment. Displaying a DVD image To watch a DVD image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2. NOTE ⢠Refer to your DVD player inst ruction manual for the signal type. ⢠The INPUT 2 terminals are checked whether they are connected in the following orde r; 1) Component Video, 2) S- Video, 3) Vi deo. Use the desired connection for viewing. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. Watching a VCR image Connecting a VCR Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a VCR or other audio/visual equipment. Displaying a V CR image To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1. NOTE ⢠INPUT 1 checks for S-Video conne ctions first then for Video. Use the desired connection for viewing. Plasma Display (rear view ) DVD player Component Video cable (sold separate ly) AV cable (sold sep arately) S-Video cable (sold separa tely) Plasma Display (rea r view) VCR S-Video cable (sold separ ately) AV cable (sold separa tely) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 68 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
69 En Using External Equipment 12 English Using HDMI Input The INPUT 5 and INPUT 6 terminals are HDMI terminals for digital video and audio signals. To use the HDMI terminal, specify the types of video and audi o signals being sent f rom the connected equipment. For signal types refer to the deviceâÂÂs operating manual. Before bringing up the menu, press INPUT 5 (or INPU T 6 ) on the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT 5 (or INPUT 6). For audio, the panel supports the following: ⢠Linear PCM (S TEREO 2ch) ⢠Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz NOTE ⢠PC signals are not supported. ⢠Images are sometimes slow to appea r with some external devices. Connecting HDMI equipment To specify the digital video signal type: 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂVideoâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the type of digital video signals. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you select âÂÂAutoâÂÂ, the pane l automatically attempts to identify the type of digital video signal. 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠If you select a parameter other than âÂÂAutoâÂÂ, verify that t he setting results in th e appropriate colors. ⢠If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type. ⢠Refer to the external deviceâÂÂs ope rating instruct ions for digital video signal types. To specify the type of audio signa ls: 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂAudioâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the type of audio signals. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you select âÂÂAutoâÂÂ, the pane l automatically attempts to identify the type of audio signal. 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠If there is no sound, specify another audio signal type. ⢠Refer to the external deviceâÂÂs ope rating instruct ions for audio signal types. ⢠Depending on the equipment to be connected, you may also need to connect analog audi o cables. Input signal correlation table 1920 ïµ 1080i@59.94/60 Hz 720 ïµ 480p@59.94/60 Hz 1280 ïµ 720p@59.94/60 Hz 720(1440) ïµ 480i@59.94/60 Hz 1920 ïµ 1080p@24 Hz Plasma Display (rea r view) HDMI equipm ent HDMI cable wi th the HDMI mark (sold separately) Audio cable (sold separately) Use whe n inputtin g analog audio signals. Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Disp lay Item Description Auto (factory defa ult) Automatica lly iden tifies i nput digi tal vide o signals Color -1 Digital Comp onent Video signals (4:2: 2) locked Color -2 Digital Comp onent Video signals (4:4: 4) locked Color -3 Digital RGB signals locked Item Description Auto (factory defa ult) Automatically ident ifies input audio signals Digital Accepts digi tal audio signals Analog Accepts analog audio signals PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 69 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
70 En Using External Equipment 12 Using a game console or watching camcorder images Connecting a game console or camcorder Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder, or other audio/visual equipment. NOTE ⢠INPUT 4 checks for Component Video connections first then for Video. Use the desired connection for viewing. ⢠Only connect external equipment to terminals that are to be actually used. Displaying an image of th e game console or camcorder To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder, press INPUT 4 on the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4. Recording digital TV programs using a VCR To record, connect recording equipment such as a VCR to the panelâÂÂs MONITOR OUT terminals (rear of the Plasma Display). You can also record digital TV programs more easily by using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. Connect the supplied G- LINK cable to the G-LINK terminal on the rear of the Plasma Display. Position the G-LINK ca bleâÂÂs wand so that its light emitting section faces the re mote control sensor on the recording equipment. For more information, see page 73. Avoiding unwanted feedback You can prevent unwanted feedba ck from affecting the image quality. To block the signal from the output terminal causing interference , follow the steps below. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂMonitor O utâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂINPUT1 ProhibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT2 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT3 ProhibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT4 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT 5 Prohi bitâ or âÂÂINPUT 6 Prohib itâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Plasma Display (left side view) Camcorder/Game Console Component Video cable (sold separately) AV cable (sold separately) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 70 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
71 En Using External Equipment 12 English Connecting a recorder NOTE ⢠About the MONITOR OUT terminals The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following signals: ⢠Video signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal ⢠Video signals from a PC ⢠Digi tal video and audio signals f rom the HDMI termina ls ⢠When watching images from a VCR connected to the panelâÂÂs MONITOR OUT, select an input source (e.g., TV channel reception) on the VCR other th an an external input source. Selecting an external input source may cause distorted images or noise. ⢠Place the VCR in Standby when selecting TV programs to record using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. ⢠Using MONITOR OUT may cause delays between the speaker and AUDIO. If this delay occurs, try muting the speakers on the Plasma Disp lay. However , you may still experience some delay between audio and video. ⢠The MONITOR OUT terminals ca nnot output any signals for networked audio or video. ⢠If degraded picture quality is observed while viewing copy- protected VOD movies connect the Plasma Display directly to other TV sets. Do no t connect through a VCR. Connecting other audio equipment The panelâÂÂs digital audio output terminal (optical) can output Dolby Digital signal s. Using an optical digital cable, connect an AV receiver to the optical te r minal on the rear of the Plasma D i s p l a y . T h i s a l l o w s h i g h - q u a l i t y a u d i o , s u c h a s d u r i n g a d i g i t a l TV broadcast, to play. If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect MONITOR OUT (AUDIO) on the rear of the Plasma Display to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver. This method may cause sound de lays between the speakers and AUDIO. Try muting the speakers on the Plasma Display, however, you may still experience a de lay between audio and video. NOTE ⢠When using the digital audio ou tput terminal (optical), set according to the AV receiverâÂÂs requirements. For more information, refer to the AV re ceiverâÂÂs operating instructions. Connecting an AV receiver NOTE ⢠For details, refer to the audi o deviceâÂÂs operating instructions. ⢠The audio accompanying the im ages shown on the display is always output to the SU BWOOFER OUTPUT term inal. ⢠When signals are input from th e HDMI terminals, no digital or analog signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal. ⢠Input signals from the Home Media Gallery may cause audio delays between the speakers and OPTICAL. Try muting t he speakers on the Plasma Disp lay; however, you may still experience delays between audio and vi deo. Plasma Display (r ear view) VCR AV cable (sold separately) G-LINK cable (supplied) Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display Ferrite core Plasma Display (rea r view) AV receiver This connection is not required when connecting an AV amp equipped with surround sound to a subwoofer. Optical digital cable (sold separately) Subwoofer AV cable (sold separately) Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 71 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
72 En Using External Equipment 12 Switching the optical audio signal type Set up for the DIGITAL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL), according to your AV receiverâÂÂs operating instructions. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂDigital Audio OutâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂDolby Digitalâ or âÂÂP CMâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Watching an image from a computer Connecting a personal computer Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer (PC). NOTE ⢠The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible. ⢠Ability to use Plug & Pla y depends on the computer. Displaying an image from a P C When connected to a PC, the input signal type is automatically identified. If the imag e from the PC does not come in clearly, you may need to use Auto Setup. See page 64. To watch an image coming from the PC, press PC on the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select âÂÂPCâÂÂ. NOTE ⢠The PC terminals are for PC use only. Do not connect audio/ visual equipment to PC terminals. Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub conn ector (front view) NOTE ⢠An Apple î Macintosh î adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Item Description Dolby Digital (factory d efault) Dolby Digital: output s in the Dolby Dig ital format PCM: outputs in the PCM format PCM Always outputs in the PCM forma t regardl ess of the types of si gnals Plasma Display (r ear view) Personal Computer RGB cable (sold separately) AV cable with a mini p lug (sold separately) (for P C audio conn ection ) Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display Pin No. Signal name 1 R 2 G 3 B 4 Not connected 5 Not connected 6 GND (ground) 7 GND (ground) 8 GND (ground) 9 5V 10 GND (ground) 11 Not connected 12 SDA 13 HD 14 VD 15 SCL 15 14 13 12 9 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 72 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
73 En Using External Equipment 12 English Computer compatibility chart G-LINK⢠connection To record with a VCR through the TV Guide On Screen⢠system, connect the VCR to the panel using the G-LINK cable. NOTE ⢠In order to use a VCR with the TV Guide On Screen⢠system, confirm the factors listed belo w. Se e âÂÂTV Guide On Screen⢠System Setupâ on page 32. ⢠The G-LINK cableâÂÂs wand must be positioned so that its light emitting section faces the VC RâÂÂs remote control sensor. ⢠The VCR is in Standby when selecting TV programs to record using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. ⢠Avoid the cable loops whe n making the connection. Attaching the ferrite core To help prevent noise, attach the supplied ferrite core to the connector end of the G-LINK cable as shown. CAUTION ⢠Regarding the G-LINK cable, a ttach the supplied ferrite core. If you do not do this, this Plasma Display wil l not conform to mandatory FCC standards. When connecting the VCR Resolution Frequency 720 à400 70 Hz 640 à480 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 800 à600 56 Hz 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 1024 à768 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 1360 x 768 60 Hz G-LINK cable Ferrite core As close as pos sible Pull the cable slightly to take up any slack A . A Plasma Display (rea r view) AV cable (sold separately) G-LINK cable (supplied) Point to the rem ote control sensor VCR G-LINK cableâÂÂs wand Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Displa y Ferrite core PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 73 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
74 En Using External Equipment 12 Connecting control cables Connect control cables between the Plasma Display and other PIONEER equipment ha ving the logo. Th ese control cables carry command s from a Pioneer device through its remote control to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display. After the CONTROL IN terminal s have been connected, the remote control sensors on th e devi ce does not accept commands from the remote co nt rol. Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display to operate the dev ice. NOTE ⢠Make sure that the power is turned Off when connecting cables. ⢠Connect all components before plugging cables into the panel. About SR The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Plasma Display supports SR . This terminal supports linked operations with a PIONEER AV receiver. SR includes functions such as input switch linkage operation and DSP surround display. For more information, see the Pi oneer AV receiverâÂÂs operating instructions regarding SR support. NOTE ⢠When connecting control cables, use the SR cable. ⢠When connecting one or more Pioneer devices, directly connect the Plasma Display and an SR supported Pioneer amplifier. Do not daisychain other equipment between the Pioneer units. ⢠When operating devices using SR , volume on the P lasma Display is lowered temporarily. Plasma Display (re ar view) CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT When SR is not used: Use mono soun d control cables with mini plugs, no resistance (sold separately) When SR is used: Use the SR cable (sold as an option). PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 74 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
75 En Using External Equipment 12 English Enjoying the Home Media Gallery With Home Media Gall ery, you can enjoy di gital content such as movies, music and photo files. These files can be saved on one or more media servers co nnected by a home network (LAN) or from content stored on U SB devices. After connecting via an Ethernet hub to a media se rver with network software*, you can navigate through the serverâÂÂs digital content using the Plasma Display. For US B interface, the Plasma Display supports Mass Storage Class devices. * Referred to as a âÂÂmedia serve râ that contains digital content such as movies, music and p hoto files. PCs that have pre- installed media server software and re corders with a media server function are considered the media server. Us e PCs that have a Windows Medi a Connect (WMC) ser ver or DLNA compliant server for the Ho me Media Gallery functio n. Take a Windows Media Connect (WMC) server for exa mple: Microsoft Media Server is freeware and works with any music juke-box type software, although is optimized for Windows Media Player. Installing Windows M edia Connect Before installing Windows Me dia Connect, make sure that Windows XP SP2 and other requir ed software are installe d. See Microsoft Website for details re garding minimum system requirements and installation procedures. 1 Download the most recent version of Windows Media Player This can be downloaded either directly from the Microsoft Website, or using the Windows Update Installer. 2 Download the most recent Windows Media Connect software This can be downloaded either directly from the Microsoft Website, or using the Windows Update Installer. Supported file formats The table below shows supported file formats that can be played back or displayed on th e Plasma Display. These formats are applicable to both netw ork and USB sources. However, media server content protected by digital rig hts manage ment, such as WMDRM10 (Digital Ri ghts Management for Windows Media 10), may not play on the Plasma Display. ⢠Some formats may not be s upported depending on the server type or version used. ⢠Even with the format included in the above table, some functions may not operate pr operly depending on the content. ⢠Even with the format included in the above tab le, some files may not be played properly through a USB device. NOTE ⢠Content may not play or disp lay properly depending on the conditions of use. ⢠Sources for this panel includ e media servers that support DLNA (Digital Living Ne twork Alliance ) and Windows Media Connect (WMC) running on the LAN network, or SD Card, MS, MMC, xD Picture and CF th at comply with the Mass Storage File System through a USB interface. ⢠Supported formats and contents are subject to change. Visit the Pioneer website for updated information: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com ⢠The Home Media Gallery f unctions as a WMDRM10-ND (Microsoft Windows Media DR M for networke d device s). Content can only be navi gated from the media servers that support WMDRM10-ND. ⢠The system may not be able to display content from incompatible memory cards. ⢠You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until dimmed elements on the menu screen turn white. Digital Audi o Output termina l (Optical) NOTE ⢠When using the optical output te rminal for networked audio or video: If the Plasma Display and audio system are in the same room, you may experience an audi o delay between the plasma speakers and the audio sy stem. Try muti ng the speake rs on the Plasma Display to correct this delay. However, this action may cause delays between audio and video. Type of files Format Movie MPEG PS (mpg, mpeg, mpe, m2p), MPEG-2 TS/T TS, WMV (asf , wmv), MPEG4 (mp4) Music MP3 (mp3), LPCM, W A V (wav), WMA (asf , wma) Photo JPEG (jpg, jpeg), BMP (bmp), PNG (png), TI FF (tif , tiff), GIF (gif) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 75 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
76 En Using External Equipment 12 Making network connections To connect to a network, se t up the Home Media Gallery through the panelâÂÂs menu. Conne ct to a home network (LAN) via an Ethernet hub or cable directly to a media server. NOTE ⢠Although the Home Media Gallery supports 10BASE-T, it is better to use 100BASE-TX for improved display qualit y and speed. Connecting via an Ethernet hub If you already operate one or more media servers on a local area network (LAN), connect the Plasma Display to the Ethernet (LAN) hub using a st andard (âÂÂstraight-throughâÂÂ) Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diagram below. Connecting directly to a Media Server To run a PC as a media server , connect the Plasma Display directly to the PC using a twisted (âÂÂcross-overâÂÂ) Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diag ram below. Confirming the IP Address After making the network connection, follow the instructions below to confirm the panelâÂÂs IP Address before accessing the network. (The setup is effective for âÂÂAutoâ only. To perform the procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be valid.) 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then EN TER ). 3 S elect âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂNetwork Setupâ ( / then ENTE R ). 5 Select âÂÂAutomatically acquir e IPâ ( / / / then ENTER ). ⢠The screen turns from âÂÂSel ectâ mode to âÂÂInputâ mode. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The IP Address is autom atically assigned. ⢠The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If t he system failed to acquir e the IP Addre ss or if you want to obtain different addresses, select âÂÂN oâ then enter âÂÂIP Addressâ and âÂÂSubnet maskâÂÂ. Use the 0 to 9 a n d /// buttons to enter an address, then press ENTER . You do not need to enter âÂÂDefault Gatewayâ and âÂÂDNS ServerâÂÂ. 7 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The âÂÂResetâ dialog appears on screen. 8 Select âÂÂOKâ and press ENTER . ⢠The home network module restarts. ⢠A message âÂÂSe tting up Home Media Gallery. Please wait until initialized.â appears on screen. ⢠When the initialization is finished, setting values become effective and the to p menu of the Home Media Gallery returns. NOTE ⢠For information on DHCP, refer to network deviceâÂÂs operating instructions. ⢠You may need to contact your service provider or network administrator when manually entering an IP Address. ⢠Some medi a servers block or are program med to block access to client servers. When connecting the Plasma Display, check th e media server for client server access rights. Connecting a USB device You can also enjoy content store d on memory cards by connecting a USB device to the Plasma Display. When you insert a USB memory or multi-card reader into the USB port, the root directory or the Device Li st screen appears. In addition, you can connect your digital came ra directly to the Plas ma Display using a USB connector cable. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then EN TER ). 3 Select âÂÂUSBâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The Device List is displayed on screen with the selected device highlighted if you have not checke d in the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ box after select ing âÂÂSetupâ and then âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ. If you have checked in the box, the list is skipped. Media Server 2 Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display Media Server 1 Plasma Display (rear view ) Ethernet Hub (Router with hub function ) Straight-through Cable Plasma Display (rear view) Viewed fr om the bottom of the Plasma Display Cross-over Cable Media Server 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 76 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
77 En Using External Equipment 12 English 4 Select the desired device ( / then ENTER ). ⢠You can select a device only when the Device List is displayed. 5 Press ENTER to navigate to a folder or play a file/content. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠If the Home Media Gallery is launched and the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ b ox is checked aft e r selecting âÂÂSetupâ and then âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ, the system displays the root directory immediatel y after inserting a USB device. In thi s case, you can start from step 5. When a multi-card reader is inserted, the Device List appe ar s with the se lected devi ce highlighted. In this case, you can start from step 4. Readable memory cards This system reads FAT12, FAT16, F AT32, or VFAT Mem ory Cards. Readable data files Movie, music and photo files can also be played with the exception of Digital Rights Management for Windows Media 10 (DRM) protected files. NOTE ⢠A single USB device can be co nnected at a time and no USB hub connected. ⢠This system may not be able to display modified or edited content from a PC or other equipment. ⢠This system supports the USB Mass Storage Class. ⢠Some digital cameras may re quire a setup procedure for Mass Storage Class data transfer. The setup is done on the camera. See the operating instructions supplied with the digital camera. Removing a USB device T o r e m o ve a US B de v ic e , e x it t h e Home Media Gallery first and then disconnect the device. NOTE ⢠Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before removing the USB device. If you remove the USB device while the Home Media Gallery scre en is displayed, data inside the memory may be damaged. ⢠Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after the system is switched On or Off. This action may cause data inside the memory to be damaged. ⢠PIONEER is not liable for any loss or damage to the d ata inside the USB memory. Starting the Home Media Gallery function 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S elect âÂÂMedia Na vigatorâÂÂ, âÂÂUS B âÂÂ, âÂÂMy Playlistâ or âÂÂSetupâ (/ t h e n ENTER ). ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 4 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Navigating the files and folders By selecting Media Navigator, th e prev iously selected server menu is automa tically di splayed on the screen by d efault (page 90). When only one server is found, the system automatically connects the server. You can also use the Tool Menu to switch to another server or manually se lect a server from the Server List. The displ ay is automati cally changed to a server li st if there are no previously navigated servers. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S elect âÂÂMedia Na vigatorâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A server menu appears. Th e fi le/folder configuration may vary depending on the server selected. ⢠After selecting a category , folder or container and navigating on subsequent sc reens, you can find a file and start the appropriate Pl ayer depending on the selected file. 4 Select the desired f older to navi gate or file/content to play (/ o r / t h e n ENTER ). 5 Press ENTER to display a subsequent screen. ⢠Subsequent screen(s) appears. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Plasma Display USB flash memory Digital Camera with USB Mass Storage Class Flash media via USB adapte r (Mu lti-card Reader ) Media Navigator USB My Playlist Setup Server XXXXXX Home Media Gallery 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 77 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
78 En Using External Equipment 12 Selectable screen display Menu display options are: âÂÂLi stâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumb nail ListâÂÂ. Press D then select âÂÂChange viewâ from the Tool Menu to choose from the screen display options. Using th e Tool M enu Press D on the remote control to access the pop-up Tool Menu. Various play and display modes ca n be selected from the Tool Menu. The selectable menu items differ depending on the submenu (see the table below). * 1 When a file is selected * 2 While music is played Menu items Func tion Screen on which Tool Menu is available Update to Latest Informati on Updates the ser ver connection s tatus Server List (connected/ not connected) Delete Serv er Delete s the ser ver (s) that are dimme d on the list Server List (ser ver not connected) USB Devices List Moves to the USB Devices List screen F older Contents List (USB)/Contents List (USB) Consecutive Playback*1 Continuously plays video content starting from the selected item Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Detailed Display*1 Displays the deta iled information on the selected content Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Sort Sorts items in Folder or Contents List Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Search Searches the desire d items in F older or Contents List by word F older Contents List/ Contents List Til X All X Da 2 Se X XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX List Thumbnail Thunbnail List All Photos Add to My Playlist Change view Sort Search Slide Show Settings Detailed Display Select Searver Stop Music 1/27 1 Tool D XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX All Photos 1/27 1 Tool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/19 Server XXXXXX Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/19 Server XXXXXX All Photos 1/27 1 Tool D XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX All Photos 1/27 1 Tool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/19 Server XXXXXX List screen Thumbnail screen Thumbnail List screen Slide Show Setu p Used to set up a s lide- show on the Photo Player Server List/Media Navigator/ USB/My Playlist/Playlist List (Movie/Music/Photo)/ F older Contents List/ Contents List/Ph oto Player Add to My Playlist *1 Adds the selected files to My Playlist Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List/Movie Player/Music Player/Photo Player Select Serve r Moves to the Server List screen Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Stop Musi c*2 St ops playback of a music file Media Navigato r/ Playlist List (Movie/ Music/ Photo)/F older Co ntents List/Contents List/Music Player/Photo Player Change Name Used to change content names in My Playlist Playlist List (Movie/ Music/Photo) Change view Switches the screen display to List, Thumbnail, or Thumbnail List F older Contents List/ Contents List Time Search Starts pla yback at the preset time on the Movie or Music Player screen Movie Player/Music Player Slow Playback Pla ys back in the slow mode on the Movie o r Music s creen Movie Player/Music Player BGM Setup Used to set up th e slide- show BGM on the Ph oto Player Photo Player Move Moves the order of content in My Playlist Contents List (Playlist) Delete from My Playlist* 1 Deletes the selected content from My Playlist Contents List (Playlist) Menu items Func tion Screen on which Tool Menu is available PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 78 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
79 En Using External Equipment 12 English Media Navigator While navigating thro ugh the folders a medi a server provides, you can select the desired file to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER . Screen Components 1 Thumbnail of the file se lected (if obtained) 2 Name of the server c urrently selected 3 Current menu level 4 Item being selected (highl ighted in yellow) 5 File number/total number of files 6 Number of servers connected 7 Key gu ide NOTE ⢠The Media Navigator is no t launched depending on the option selected in âÂÂAuto Co nnection Setupâ (page 90) . The screen displays after selecting a server in the server list. USB Like navigating thro ugh the media servers, you can select the desired file co ntained in the device selected on the USB Devices List screen to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER . You can also select the menu displayed on either âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ scree n. Press D and select âÂÂChange viewâ from the Tool Menu. NOTE ⢠The USB Devices List scre en may not be displayed depending on the option selected in âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ. âÂÂSingle S erver/USBâ is select ed for âÂÂAuto Connection Setupâ by default. You don't need to select a device in the USB Devices Li st when you use a single directory d evice (USB memo ry). My Playlist Each category (Movie, Music an d Photo) has five different Playlists in which you can regi st er up to 100 files each. The My Playlist option can contain sound and image fil es selected in the âÂÂMedia NavigatorâÂÂ. To edit a Playlist, use the Tool Menu (page 78). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMy Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 S elect a Playlist list from âÂÂMovie PlaylistâÂÂ, âÂÂM usic Playlistâ or âÂÂPhoto Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 5 Select the desired content ( / or / then ENTER ). ⢠The menu can be displayed as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select âÂÂChange viewâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). 6 Press ENTER to play or display. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Enjoying movie files You can display the menu as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select an option under âÂÂChange viewâ on the Tool Me nu. You can also navigate through the subsequent or precedi ng menu levels in the server o r U S B d e v i c e b y p r e s s i n g//// ENTER . When you select movie content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen, the Movie Play er automatically launche s. Select a category, folder, or device to access the submenu containing the required file or content. The Movie Player screen appears when you select a movie file from My Playlist, just like se lecting a file in the server. Screen Components 1 Movie ic on 2 Title (Category or Folder name) 3 Da te 4 Album name 5 Play time 6 Play status 7 Key gu ide 8 Progress bar 9 Audio mode icon 10 A-B repeat mode icon 11 Repeat mode icon 12 Random mode icon (appears when the mode is valid) Movie Music Photos User Files Media Navigator 1/4 1 Tool D Title Movie Server XXXXXX 4 5 6 1 3 7 2 T ool D Random C Repeat B A-B A XXXX XXXX 2006/11/30 00:00:59 Playback 00 : 00 : 45 L R A -B RDM 5 10 12 13 4 8 9 11 7 6 2 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 79 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
80 En Using External Equipment 12 Movie Play er key guid e NOTE ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used. ⢠During playback, an error may arise in time-related information depending on the content or server software. ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the content. Time Sear ch 1 In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select âÂÂTime Searchâ from the Tool M enu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂTime Searchâ dialog screen appears. 2 Select âÂÂHourâ and/or âÂÂMinuteâ for âÂÂInput Timeâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Enter the desired ti me using buttons 0 to 9 . 3 Press ENTER after the entry is complete. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The movie begins playing from the time you set. ⢠To cancel the Time Search, select âÂÂCancelâ and press ENTER . ENTER: P a uses while playback or plays back while in P AUSE : F ast reverse during playback or whe n in P AUSE. Each press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100 or the slo w mode speed be tween x 1/2, x 1/4, x 1/8, and x 1/16. When the beginning of the content is re ached, it pa uses. : F ast forward while playbac k or P A USE. Each press toggles the for ward speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20 , x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed betw een x 1/16, x 1/8, x 1/4, and x 1/ 2. When the end of the co ntent is reached, it pauses. : Skips 15 seconds backward a nd plays back or pauses while in P A USE : Skips 15 seconds forward an d plays back or pauses while in P A USE ï¤ (PLA Y): Plays back th e content ïÂÂ¥ (P AU SE): P auses the playback ï§ (STOP): Stops the Player and returns t o the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List) ï® (FF): Same as (only fast forward function whil e in the slow mode) ï (RWD): Same as (only fast reverse fun ction while in the slow mode) A (BLUE): Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired po int A to start and B to end during playb ack. T o can cel the mode, press A (BLUE) on the remote cont rol. B (RED): Every press toggles the repeat mode between âÂÂN o Repeat â and âÂÂR epeat Onceâ or be tween âÂÂNo R epeatâÂÂ, âÂÂRepeat Onceâ and âÂÂR epea t Allâ while in Playlist C (GREEN): Available only in P laylist or âÂÂConsecutive Playbackâ mode. Ever y press to ggles the rand om mode between âÂÂRandom Off â and âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. D (YELLOW): Switches the T ool Menu displa y on and off . Even if the T ool Menu is dis played while content is played back, a movie is kept playing but th e time counter and progress bar do not funct ion. INFO: Displays the Player status at th e bottom of th e screen while a movie is played back . Another press of the key displays a key guide, as well. P ressing the key once more canc els all the informat ion display. MTS: Ever y press of the key toggles the audio mode between âÂÂL RâÂÂ, âÂÂL â and âÂÂRâ RETURN: Same function as STOP VOL , VOL-: Adjusts the sound volume MUTING: Mutes the sound HOME MENU: Quit th e Home Medi a Gallery and returns t o the last entr y screen. R esumes the con tent selected again on the Home Medi a Galler y. Play modes Time Se arch (T ool Menu) Plays back the selected content from the time preset on the Movie Player Slow Playback (T ool Menu) Plays back the content in slow mode on the Movie or Music Player Add to My Playlist (T ool Menu) Adds the selected content to My Playlist List (Not available while movie cont ent in the Play list is played back.) Stop Movie Player ï§ (STOP), RETURN Stops the Movie Player F ast F or ward/ F ast R everse /, ï / ï® See the key g uide table For w a r d / Rev er s e (15 sec.) / See the key g uide table Play ENTER, ï¤ (PLAY) See the key g uide table A-B Repeat Mode A (BLUE) See the ke y guide tabl e Rep ea t Mo de B (RED) See the key guide table Ran do m Mode C (GREEN) See the key g uide table (T ool Menu) D (YE LLOW) See the key g uide table Time Search OK Cancel Input Time HM i n 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 80 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
81 En Using External Equipment 12 English 5 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠This function may not be supported depending on the content or server software. ⢠An error may arise in time-related information depending on the content or server software. Slow Playback 1 In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select âÂÂSlow Playbackâ from the Tool Menu. 2 Press ENTER . ⢠Slow playback begins. ⢠You can change the playback speed by pressing / while in the slow mode. ⢠To discontinue slow playback, press ENTER or PLAY . The system returns to th e normal playback mode. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠This function may not be supported depending on the content. Add to My Playlist 1 While navigating or playing, se lect the file to be added to M y P l a y l i s t (/// t h e n ENTER ). 2 Press D then select âÂÂAdd to My Playli stâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂPlaylist Selectionâ dialog screen appears. 3 Select a Playli st ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A check mark is provid ed beside the selected Playlist. ⢠When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER , the mark jumps to the new Play list from the previously selected one. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The file is added to the selected Pl aylist. ⢠To cancel the operation, select âÂÂCancelâ then press ENTER . 5 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Fast Forwa rd/Fast Reverse 1 While playing content, press and hold for Fast Reverse or press and hold for Fast Forward. Forward/Reverse (15 sec.) 1 While playing content, press and hold or to jump backward or forward in 15-second increments. A-B Repeat Mode 1 While playing content, press A where you want repeat to start. 2 Press A again where you want repeat to end. ⢠The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B mode icon changes. ⢠The selected movie scenes ar e repeatedly played back. ⢠To return to normal mode, press A again while in the A-B repeat mode. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in normal mode. Repeat Mode 1 While playing content in the Media Navigator or USB device, press B to select âÂÂRepeat OnceâÂÂ. ⢠The title being pl ayed is repeated. 2 Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (âÂÂR epeat Offâ is selected). ⢠After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠When playing content in the Playlist, you can select from âÂÂRepeat OffâÂÂ, âÂÂRepeat Al lâ (plays all items i n the Playlist repeatedly) or âÂÂRepeat Onceâ (plays the content being watched repeatedly). Random Mode 1 While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. ⢠Random Repeat playback start s. 2 Press C again to cancel the rand om mode (âÂÂRandom Offâ is selected). 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠The Random Repeat mode is on ly avai lable for content in the Playlist, or in âÂÂConse cutive Playbackâ m ode. Playlist1 20 Playlist2 0 Playlist3 0 Playlist4 0 Playlist5 0 Playlist Selection OK Cancel Select a Playlist to register PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 81 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
82 En Using External Equipment 12 Enjoying music files You can display the menu as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select an option under âÂÂChange viewâ on the Tool Me nu. You can also navigate through the subsequent or precedi ng menu levels in the server o r U S B d e v i c e b y p r e s s i n g //// ENTER . When you select music content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen, the Music Player automatically launches. Select a category, folder, or device to acce ss the submenu containing the required file or content. The Music Player screen appears when you select a music file from My Playlist, just like selecting a fi le in the server. NOTE ⢠The Music Player only displays a âÂÂListâ screen. Screen Components 1 Title (Category or Folder name) 2 Jacket image (Music icon) 3 Mu sic status icon 4 Contents list 5 Number of items 6 Detailed display 7 Play status 8 Time counter 9 Key guide 10 Progress bar 11 A-B repeat mode ico n 12 Repeat mode icon 13 Random mode icon Music Player key guide NOTE â¢F i l e s m a y n o t b e played back properly depending on the content. RDM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX All Music 2/20 XXXX XXXX XXXX 00:01:00 Other T ool D Random C Repeat B A-B A Playback 00 : 00 : 14 A-B 5 13 13 4 10 8 11 12 9 7 2 6 : Moves up a curso r to a title above : Moves down a cursor to a title below ENTER: Plays back the selected mu sic content. P auses the music content being played if it is highlighted in th e Playlist screen or pla ys the selected music content if different c ontent is highlight ed by pressi ng / . : F ast reverse during playback or whe n in P AUSE. Each press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the be ginning of the content is reached, it pauses. : F ast forward duri ng playback or when in P AUSE. Each press toggles the forw ard speed betwee n x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100. When th e end of the content is reached, it pauses. RETURN: Returns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List). Conte nt being p layed does not stop. ï¤ (PLA Y): Plays back th e selected content. P ause s while in playback and plays while in P A USE. ïÂÂ¥ (P AU SE): P auses the playback ï§ (STOP): Stops the Player and does n ot return to the pr evious screen (Selec ting the âÂÂSto p Musicâ from the T ool Menu also stops the Playe r .) ï® (FF): Same as ï (RWD): Same as A (BLUE): Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired po int A to start and B to end during playb ack. T o can cel the mode, press A (BLUE) on the remote cont rol. B (RED): Every press toggles the repeat mode between âÂÂN o RepeatâÂÂ, âÂÂRepeat Onceâ and âÂÂR epeat Allâ C (GREEN): Every press toggles the random mode between âÂÂRandom Off â and âÂÂRandom Onâ D (YELLOW): Displays the T ool Menu. Even if the T ool Menu is displayed while conte nt is played back, music is kept playing but t he time counter and p rogress bar do not function . P AGE , P AGE-: Available only when th ere are one or more pages in the content. Change the pa ges back and fo rth. VOL , VOL-: Adjusts the sound volume MUTING: Mutes the sound HOME MENU: Quit th e Home Medi a Gallery and returns t o the last entr y screen PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 82 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
83 En Using External Equipment 12 English ⢠Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for the Movie Player. ⢠Refer to page 78 for the color button D (Tool Menu). NOTE ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used. A-B Repeat Mode 1 While playing content, press A where you want repeat to start. 2 Press A again where you want repeat to end. ⢠The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B repeat mode icon changes. ⢠The selected part of the titl e is repeatedly played back. ⢠To return to normal mode, press A again while in the A-B repeat mode. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in normal mode. Repeat Mode 1 While playing content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device or Playlist, press B to select âÂÂRepeat AllâÂÂ. ⢠All titles in the folder or Playlist are played repeatedly. 2 Press B again to cancel t he repeat mode (âÂÂRepeat Onceâ is selected). ⢠The title being pl ayed is repeated. 3 Press B once more to cancel th e repeat mode (âÂÂRepeat Offâ is selected). ⢠After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Random Mode 1 While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. ⢠Random Repeat playback start s. 2 Press C again to cancel the rand om mode (âÂÂRandom Offâ is selected). 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Enjoying photo files You can display the menu as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select an option under âÂÂChange viewâ on the Tool Me nu. You can also navigate through the subsequent or precedi ng menu levels in the server o r U S B d e v i c e b y p r e s s i n g //// ENTER . When you select photo content from the server menu on the Media Naviga tor screen, the Photo Play er automatically launches. The selected content is displayed in full screen by pressing ENTER . Select a category, folder or device to acce ss the submenu containing the required file or content. Pressing ENTER again allows a slides how to begin. After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles be tween âÂÂPLAYâ and âÂÂPAUSEâÂÂ. Inst ead of pressing ENTE R twice, you can press PLAY to start the slideshow immediately. The Photo Player screen appears when you select a photo file from My Playlist, just like se lecting a file in the server. Screen Components 1 Photo icon 2 Title (Category or Folder name) 3 Album name 4 Da te 5 Number of items 6 Play status 7 Key gu ide 8 Progress bar 9 Repeat mode icon 10 Random mo de icon Play modes Add to My Playlist (T ool Menu) Add s the selected content to My Playlist List (Not availa ble while music content is played back.) Time Search (T ool Menu) Plays back the selected content from the ti me preset on the Music Player Stop Music ( T ool Menu), ï§ (STOP) Stops the Music Player Fa s t F o r w a r d / F ast Reverse /, ï / ï® See the key guide ta ble Moves Up/Down a cursor / See the key guide ta ble Play ENTER, ï¤ (PLAY) See the key guide ta ble A-B Repeat Mode A (BLUE) Se e the key guide tabl e Rep ea t Mo de B (RED) Se e the key guide tabl e Ran do m Mode C (GREEN) See the key guide ta ble (T ool Menu) D (YELLOW) See the key guide ta ble T ool D Random C Repeat B XXXX XXXX 2006/11/30 Playback 6 / 27 RDM 4 10 9 13 8 7 5 6 2 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 83 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
84 En Using External Equipment 12 Photo Play er key guide ⢠Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for the Movie Player. ⢠Refer to page 78 for the color button D (Tool Menu). NOTE ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used. ⢠In rare cases, the image on the screen may appear jagged when photo content is selected directly from a USB device. If this is the case, the problem may be solved by viewing the photo content through the netw ork after having transferred it to the server PC. ⢠Even with the supported forma t, files may not be played properly depending on the content. Setting u p the slides how You can enjoy a slideshow with music in the background. To activate this feature, you must register music content in My Playlist List before hand (see âÂÂMy Playlistâ on page 79 and âÂÂSetting up BGMâ on page 85). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMedia Nav igatorâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Press D . ⢠A pop-up screen of the Tool Menu appears. 5 Select âÂÂSlide Show Setupâ ( / then ENTER ). 6 Select the desired setup item ( / then ENTER ). 7 Enter the setting in the âÂÂEffectâ or âÂÂIntervalâ box ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter another setup. ENTER: Starts disp laying a phot o or playing a slideshow . P auses while playba ck or pla ys back while in P AUSE. RETURN: Stops the Player and re turns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List) , : Displays the previous image content , : Display the next image content ï¤ (PLA Y): Plays a slidesh ow ïÂÂ¥ (P AU SE): P auses the slideshow ï§ (STOP): Stops the Player and returns t o the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List) ï® (FF): R otates the ima ge 90ú clockwise. Each press toggle s the rotation angle by 90ú between 90ú, 1 80ú, 270ú and 0ú. ï (RWD): Rota tes the image 9 0ú counter -clockwise. Each press toggles the rot ation angle by 90ú be tween 270ú, 180ú, 90ú, and 0ú. A (BLUE): Rotates the image 90ú clockwise. Each press toggle s the rotation angle by 90ú between 90ú, 1 80ú, 270ú and 0ú. B (RED): Every press toggles the repeat mode between âÂÂN o Repeatâ and âÂÂR epeat Allâ C (GREEN): Every press toggles the random mode between âÂÂRandom Off â and âÂÂRandom Onâ D (YELLOW): Displays the T ool Menu. If the T ool Menu is displayed while a slides how is played, th e slideshow and BGM are paused. INFO: Displays the Player status at th e bottom of th e screen while image content is play ed . Another press of the key displays a key guide, as well. No Player information is displayed when an image is sh own in full screen (no slideshow has been starte d). Other info rmation may display . P r essing the key once more cancel s all the information display . VOL , VOL-: Adjusts the sound volume MUTING: Mutes the sound HOME: Replaced by the Home Menu ke y . Quit the Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry screen. Play modes BGM Setup (T ool Menu) Sets up BGM Slide Show Setup (T ool Menu) Allows various slideshow setups on the Photo pla yer Add to My Playlist (T ool Menu) Adds the sele cted content to My Playlist List (Not availa ble while photo cont ent is disp layed.) Stop Photo Player ï§ (STOP), RETURN Stops the Photo Pl ayer Move File F orward/ Backward ( / //) See the key guide ta ble Slideshow ENTER, ï¤ (PLAY) See the key guide ta ble Rotate A (BLUE), ï / ï® See the key guide ta ble Rep ea t Mo de B (RED) See th e key guide tabl e Ran do m Mode C (GREEN) Se e the key guide tabl e (T ool Menu) D (YE LLOW) See the key guide tabl e Slide Show Setup Effect OK Cancel Interval 3 seconds Auto PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 84 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
85 En Using External Equipment 12 English 8 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The slideshow setup finishes. NOTE ⢠After setting the âÂÂIntervalâ time, it may take longer than the preset time until the next image is obtained. Starting the slideshow 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select photo content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device o r M y P l a y l i s t ( /// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The photo content is di splayed in full scre en. 4 Press ENTER or ï¤ (Play) to start a slideshow. ⢠The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically display one by one. See âÂÂSetting up the slideshowâ (page 84 ) for se tting up the interval time. ⢠To display a key guide, press INFO . 5 Press ENTER or ïÂÂ¥ (Pause) to stop the slideshow. ⢠The Photo Player goes i nto âÂÂPAUSEâ . 6 Press ENTER agai n to resume the slideshow. ⢠To cancel the slideshow and stop the P hoto Player, press RETURN or ï§ (Stop) during the playback. The previous screen returns. NOTE ⢠W h e n y o u p r e s s ///, ï /ï® while photo content is displayed, the Photo Player goes into âÂÂPAUSEâÂÂ. Setting up BGM 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select photo content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device o r M y P l a y l i s t ( /// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The Photo Player launches and photo content is displayed in full screen. 4 Press D th en se le ct âÂÂB GM Se t upâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂBGM Setupâ dialog screen appears. 5 Select a Playlist from the l ist as BGM ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A check mark is provid ed beside the selected Playlist. ⢠When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER , the mark jumps to the new Play list from the previously selected one. 6 Select âÂÂBGM ONâÂÂ, âÂÂBGM ON (R andom)â or âÂÂBGM OFFâ from the BGM status box ( / then ENTER ). 7 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). Rotating t he imag e 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select photo content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device o r M y P l a y l i s t ( /// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The photo content is di splayed in full scre en. ⢠To stop the slideshow, press ENTER again. 4 Press ENTER or ï¤ (Play) to start a slideshow. ⢠The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically display one by one. ⢠To display a key guide, press INFO . 5 While using Photo Player, press A to rotate a photo. ⢠The displayed image rotates by one quarte r clockwise. Each time A is pressed, the image rotates; 90ú, 180ú, 270ú and âÂÂR otate OffâÂÂ. ⢠The Photo Player goes into âÂÂPAUSEâ (the sl ideshow is in Stop mode). 6 Press ENTER agai n to resume the slideshow. ⢠The selected rotatio n mode is only eff ective fo r the image being displayed. The default setti ng (âÂÂRotate OffâÂÂ) returns when you move an d display content on a different screen. Repeating the slideshow 1 While playing a slideshow, press B to select âÂÂRepeat OnceâÂÂ. ⢠The slideshow being played is repeated. 2 Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (âÂÂRepe at Offâ is selected). ⢠After playing the currently selected slideshow, the Player stops. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Playing the slideshow at random 1 While playing a slideshow, press C to select âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. ⢠Random Repeat playback start s. 2 Press C again to cancel the rand om mode (âÂÂRandom Offâ is selected). 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Playlist1 20 Playlist2 0 Playlist3 0 Playlist4 0 Playlist5 0 BGM Setup BGM ON OK Cancel PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 85 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
86 En Using External Equipment 12 Other useful functions Search You can search the desired item s contained in the Folder or Contents List by word. Searched results are displayed on the screen. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select the de sired folder and/or content in the Media N a v i g a t o r ( /// t h e n ENTER ). 4 Press D then select âÂÂSearchâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂSearchâ dialog screen appears. 5 Select the âÂÂContains the followingâ box in âÂÂSe t the search condition:â ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The software keyboard appears on the screen. 6 Enter the word for search on the software keyboard ( / // t h e n ENTER ). 7 Select âÂÂOKâ on the soft ware keyboard ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The software ke yboard disappears. ⢠To cancel the search, select âÂÂCancelâ then press ENTER . 8 Select âÂÂOKâ o n the âÂÂSearchâ dialog screen ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The searching sta rts based on th e word entered a nd search result s are displayed . ⢠Even while searching, you can select content to play. To return to the search screen, press RETURN during playback. 9 Press RETURN to cancel the search mode. Sort You can sort the items contained in the Folder or Contents List. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select the de sired folder and/or content in the Media N a v i g a t o r ( /// t h e n ENTER ). 4 Press D then select âÂÂSortâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). â¢A â S o r t â d i a l o g screen appears. 5 Select âÂÂBottom-Upâ or âÂÂTop-Downâ in the âÂÂSort Orderâ box (/ t h e n E NTER ). 6 Select âÂÂOKâ on the âÂÂSortâ dialog screen ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The sorting starts based on your selection and sort results are displayed. ⢠Even while sorting, you can select content to play. To return to the sort screen, press RETURN during playback. 7 Press RETURN to cancel the sort m ode. NOTE ⢠The âÂÂSelect a sorting orde r.â screen can be displayed while navigating through the music categories. Adding files to My Playlist The Home Media Gallery function provides âÂÂMy Playlistâ - a self- contained play list that allows you to bookmark your favorite movie, music and photo files from the network. You can register, edit, and sort up to 100 fi les in each Playlist List. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMedia Nav igatorâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select the desired music cont ent to add to âÂÂMy Playli stâ (/ t h e n ENTER ). 5 Press D to open the Tool Me nu. ⢠A dialog screen appears. 6 Press ENTER . ⢠A check mark is provided in t he box at the selected Playlist List. 7 Press to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ. 8 Press ENTER . ⢠The selected conte nt is added to the Playli st. 9 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gall ery. XXXX 1/24 1 T ool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/30 Play Time 00:00:59 Server XXXXXX Search Contains the following: Title Set the search condition. OK Cancel XXXX 1/24 1 T ool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/30 Play Time 00:00:59 Server XXXXXX Sort Bottom-Up Sort Order Title Select a sorting order. OK Cancel Playlist1 20 Playlist2 0 Playlist3 0 Playlist4 0 Playlist5 0 Playlist Selection Select a Playlist to register OK Cancel PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 86 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
87 En Using External Equipment 12 English Setup The âÂÂSetupâ is used for âÂÂNet work SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂDefault Settingsâ , âÂÂSoftware Updateâ and âÂÂHome Media Gallery VersionâÂÂ. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂNetwork SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂDefault SettingsâÂÂ, âÂÂSoftware Updateâ and âÂÂHome Media G a l l e r y V e r s i o n â (/// t h e n ENTER ). âÂÂNetwork Setupâ When you selec t âÂÂNetwork Setupâ from the âÂÂSetupâ menu, a submenu is display ed to select âÂÂAutoâ or âÂÂManualâ for network connecti ons. To automatica lly set: The following setup is effectiv e for âÂÂAutoâ only. To perform the procedure, DHCP on your se rver or router must be valid. 1 Sele ct âÂÂAutomatical ly acquire IPâ then press ENTER . 2 Sele ct âÂÂYesâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S e l e c t â O K â . (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠A restart dialog screen appears. 4 Press ENTER again on the dialog screen. ⢠The setup finishes. ⢠The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns. To manually set: Before setting up, check your media server for IP Ad dress and Subnet mask. 1 Sele ct âÂÂAutomatical ly acquire IPâ then press ENTER . 2 Sele ct âÂÂNoâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S e l e c t t h e s e t u p i t e m â s b o x (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠T h e s c r e e n t u r n s t o e n t r y m o d e f o r â I P A d d r e s s â a n d âÂÂSubnet maskâÂÂ. ⢠No need to enter âÂÂDefault Gatewayâ and âÂÂDNS ServerâÂÂ. 4 Enter the figur es using buttons 0 to 9 . ⢠Subnet mask (such as 255.255. 255.0) Enter the same figures as you checked. ⢠IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***) Enter the same figures as used in the media server (PC, etc.) you use. For ***, enter 3-digit figures (0 â 254) that have not been used for network connections yet. 5 Press ENTER on the setup itemâÂÂs box after the entry is complete. ⢠The screen turns to setup selection mode. ⢠Repeat steps 2 to 4 to complete the necessary setup. 6 S e l e c t â O K â (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠A restart dialog screen appears. 7 Press ENTER again on the dialog screen. ⢠The setup finishes. ⢠The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns. âÂÂAuto Connection Setupâ When you enjoy content on the network, you can select from the following option s: âÂÂLast Connected Serverâ an d âÂÂSingle Server/USBâÂÂ. See âÂÂAuto Connectio n Setupâ on page 90. âÂÂWake on LAN (WOL)â functi ons to turn the last accessed serverâÂÂs power on if th e server is WOL- compliant and is in Standby or sleep mo de, then display th e Media Navigator screen. Duri ng the WOL is activate d, the âÂÂStart S erverâ dialog screen displays and a message âÂÂThe server is starting up.â appears. If th e server is n ot WOL-compliant or the WOL functi on fails, the âÂÂS tart Serverâ dialo g appears on the âÂÂServer Listâ screen and a message âÂÂFailed t o start server.â displays on the dialog screen. For USB co ntent, the D evice List is displayed on the screen if you have not check ed in the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ box after selecting âÂÂSet upâ and then âÂÂAut o Connection SetupâÂÂ. You can select the desired device and then content in it . If you have checked in the box, th e list is skipped (default setting) and you can see the fo lder(s) or file(s) in the USB devi ce that has a single direc tory. âÂÂDefault Set tingsâ Setups you have entered within the Home Media Gal lery function return to de fault. When you sel ect âÂÂResetâÂÂ, a confirmatio n screen âÂÂTo activat e the default sett ings, restart Hom e Media Gallery. â will appear. Pre ss ENTER to reset to defaul t. When you se lect âÂÂCancelâÂÂ, the previous screen displays ( / then ENTER ). âÂÂSoftware U pdateâ Select âÂÂNextâ to follow the procedu re on the subseq uent screens or âÂÂCancelâ to re turn to the pre vious scre en ( / then ENTER ). When update is co mpleted, a confirmation message âÂÂTo activate the updated software, restart Ho me Media Gallery.â appe ars. Seeâ Software Updateâ on page 89. âÂÂHome M edia Gallery Versionâ You can confi rm the versio n and copyright inf ormation on the Home Media Galler y software . Select âÂÂOKâ to return to the previous sc reen ( ENTER ). 8 Press HOME MEN U again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Network Setup Auto Connection Setup Default Settings Software Update Home Media Gallery Ver sion Setup 1/5 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 87 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
88 En Using External Equipment 12 Editing files in My Playlist 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMy Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂMovie Play listâÂÂ, âÂÂMusic Playlistâ or âÂÂP hoto Playlistâ from the Playlist category ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Five playli sts are displayed . ⢠Press D to open the Tool Menu and select an item on this screen or next contents list screen ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Check the appropriate box: âÂÂChange NameâÂÂ, âÂÂMoveâ or â D e l e t e f r o m M y P l a y l i s t â (/// t h e n ENTER ). âÂÂChange Nameâ 1 Select âÂÂChange Nameâ from the Tool Menu. ⢠A dialog screen appears. 2 Select âÂÂPlaylist Nameâ ( then ENTER ). ⢠The software ke yboard appears. 3 S e l e c t â O K â o n t h e s o f t w a r e k e y b o a r d (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The software keyboard di sappears and âÂÂP laylist Nameâ in the âÂÂChange Nameâ di alog screen returns. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ when the new name is entered ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The editing finishes and âÂÂChange Nameâ dialog screen disappears. ⢠The new Playlist displays. ⢠The on-screen keyboard (â Software KeyboardâÂÂ) is displayed only when you se lect âÂÂSearchâ or âÂÂChange NameâÂÂ. âÂÂMoveâ You can change the listing order of the content registered in My Playlist . 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Tool Me nu. ⢠The content selected is placed in a yellow box (âÂÂSource Selectionâ mode). 2 Select the de sired content ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The selected conte nt is highlighted in the yellow box. A specific icon a ppears on the left (âÂÂDestinatio n Selection modeâÂÂ). 3 Press / to move the content up or down, then ENTER . ⢠The highlight in the yellow box disappears and the specific icon returns to the original one. ⢠Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move another content. 4 Press RETURN . ⢠A âÂÂPlaylistâ dialog screen appears. 5 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The dialog screen disappears and moving content finishes. ⢠To cancel, select âÂÂCancelâ then ENTER . âÂÂDelete from My Playl istâ 1 Select âÂÂDelete from My Playlistâ from the Tool Menu. ⢠A dialog screen appears. 2 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The dialog screen disappear s and the selected content is deleted from My Playlist. ⢠To cancel, select âÂÂCancelâ then ENTER . Playing/disp laying files from My Playlist 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMy Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select the de sired Playlist from âÂÂMovie Play listâÂÂ, âÂÂMusic Playlistâ or âÂÂPhoto Pl aylistâÂÂ. 5 Select the de sired Playlist List ( / then ENTER ). 6 S e l e c t t h e d e s i r e d c o n t e n t (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The selected content is played or displ ayed. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gall ery. Switching the server When one or more servers are connected within the network, you can switch between servers. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMedia Nav igatorâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The previous server is selected. 4 Press D to ope n the Tool Menu. 5 Choose âÂÂSelect Serverâ ( / t hen ENTER ). ⢠The Server List is displayed. ⢠Pressing RETURN changes the screen to the Home Media Gallery. 6 Select the de sired server ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The screen changes from the selected server to the Home Media Gallery. 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gall ery. NOTE ⢠The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously connected servers. When the Media Navigator is launched, available servers are automati cally sea rched and connected. To switch between connecte d servers, choose server to another one, select âÂÂSelect Serverâ from the Tool Menu. 1/5 Title Playlist1 T ool D 20 0 0 0 0 1 Movie Playlist Soft Keyboard OK Cancel Playlist1 Playlist Name a bc d e f g h ij k l m n o p qr yz st u v w x 1,2,3... a,b,c... A,B,C... @,$,=... Delete Clear Space PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 88 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
89 En Using External Equipment 12 English ⢠If a previously connected server can not be found or if the server is in the sleep mode, t he server name is dimmed (grayed out). ⢠In some cases, you may be able to start a media server if it supports âÂÂWake On LANâÂÂ. Se lect the server and press ENTER to have it transmit a âÂÂWake On LANâ command to the Plasma Display. ⢠You cannot select a server unles s that media server has been set up. Resetting to default You can reset the setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery function to defaul t (See âÂÂDefault Settingsâ on page 87). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂDefault Settingsâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂResetâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A restart dialog screen appears. 5 Press ENTER on the di alog screen. ⢠The setup finishes. ⢠The system restarts then th e Home Media Gallery screen returns. Other convenient features Software update is available on the Pi oneer website ( http:// www.pioneerelectronics.com ). Make sure that you have a USB flash memory. Firs t download the software according to the guidelines on the we bsit e and perform the following procedure for update: 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂSoftware Upd ateâ ( / then ENTE R ). ⢠A âÂÂSoftware Updateâ submenu appears. 5 Select âÂÂNextâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The next screen appears. Complete the procedure following the guidelines on the screen. 6 Press ENTER after the foll owing steps are complete: âÂÂDownloadâÂÂ, âÂÂWriteâ and âÂÂVerify â â¢ A restart dialog screen appears. 7 Press ENTER after reading a notice on the screen. ⢠The system is restarted th en the Home Media Gallery screen returns. ⢠Software update finishes. NOTE ⢠On average, it may take 15 minutes or more to complete a software update. Screen saver During navigation, the screen saver launches automatically if no activity is sens ed within five minutes. ⢠No screen saver is availa ble while a movi e or slideshow is played. ⢠Pressing any key cancels screen saver. When canceled with a USB devi ce being co nnected, connecting operation resumes. NOTE â¢P r e s s i n g INFO to display the Player status or key guide before screen saver is activa ted may cause image retention to appear. Do not display the Player status and key guide for an extended period of time while playing a movie or slideshow. Software Update Setup 1 Software Update T o check whether the software needs to be updated or not. Home Media Gallery must be connected to a USB device. Connect the USB device and press the Next button. Current Ver sion: 1.x.xx Next Cancel PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 89 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
90 En Using External Equipment 12 Dialog Screen Message ⢠The message consists of âÂÂError âÂÂ, âÂÂW arn ingâ and âÂÂInforma tion â and is displayed for 5 seconds. âÂÂAuto Connection Setupâ For extra convenience, you can toggle between the following features: âÂÂLast Connec ted Serverâ When you check in the âÂÂLa st Connected Se r ver â box, the Plasma Display accesses the last server using WOL (âÂÂW ake On L ANâÂÂ) first as the Me dia Navigator is selected from the Home Medi a Gallery . The Media Navigator displays th e last serv er when WOL succeeds, while a se r ver list is displayed when WOL fails. WOL is activated to turn the last accessed ser ver On if the ser ver is WOL-compliant and is in Standby or sleep mode. âÂÂSingle Serv er/ USBâ This function is used only wh en a USB memory device or a single server is connected. Y ou do not need this function when a multi-card r eader , or two or more servers are connected. USB: ⢠When USB memory is connected, the Devices List is skipped as long as you have checked in the âÂÂSingle Ser ver/USBâ box. If not, the list ma y be displayed at any t ime. Media Naviga tor (Ser ver ): ⢠When a single server is connected, the Server List is skipped as long as you have checked in the âÂÂSingle Ser ver/USBâ box. If not, the list ma y be displayed at any time. Wh en the âÂÂLast Connected Ser ver â box is checked, the other ser ver setup opt ion â âÂÂSingle Ser ver/USBâ â becomes invalid. Setup 1 Auto Connection Setup OK Cancel Last Connected Server Single Server/USB No. Message Problem 001 Content playba ck failed (001). No details are availab le for the error 100 A communication error occurred (100). No further details are available for the error 101 No response from the server (101). Timeout period reaches due to delayed server response 102 Disconnected from the network (102 ). Cables ar e disconnected 103 Invalid response was received from the server (103). Invalid response from the ser ver 300 This format is no t supported (300). A file that is not supported is selected 500 Authorization failed (500). F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion 501 Authorization failed (501). F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion 503 Authorization failed (503). Please check for trouble in routers, hubs, and other network devi ces. F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion 504 Authorization failed (504). The maxim um allowed number of devices are con nected to the server . F ailed to obtain WMDRM 505 Authorization failed (505). The con tent license is off . Please turn on th e license from the ser ver . F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an extended period may cause an after- image. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 90 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
91 En Using External Equipment 12 English Glossary Default G ateway Default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another ne twork. A default gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within the local subnet. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addres ses to client hosts . In m os t c as e s, a b ro a db a n d r o ut e r se r ve s a s a D HC P s er v er i n a home network. DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to recognize products that meet the new standard for home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down in the DLNA Guidelines for interopera bility. This allows music, v ideo, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over a home network. This unit is compatible with mus ic, photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA Interoperabi lit y Guidelines v1.0. This unit can be used to playback music, photos and video stored on a DLNA-compatible server conne cted through a LAN cable. Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to the simplified sharing of digital co ntent, such as digital music, photos and video among networke d consumer electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of interoperability based on open industry standards, DL NA delivers technical design guidelines that companies can use to develop digital home products that share content through wired or wireless networks in the home. DNS (Dom ain Name S ervice) Server DNS Server is a server that de termines the name of network- computer within the Internet. The server functions to exchange IP address to the hostname, ho stname to the IP add ress. Ethernet A frame-based computer networki ng technology for local area networks (LANs). The Plasma Display supports 100BASE-TX. IP (Internet Protocol) Address A unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard, such as âÂÂ192.16 8.1.xxxâÂÂ. No duplicate numbers are allowed within the network. LAN Cable A cable that has an 8-pin modular plug on each end and is different from a telephone plug which has 4 pins. A straight cable is used when connecting the Plasma Display to a home network via a hub. A cross-over cable is used when connecting directly to a PC. Use category 5 (CAT-5) LAN cables. MAC (Media Access Control) A ddress An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as âÂÂ00:e0:36:01:23:xxâ and cannot be changed. Mass Storage Class de vices The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage devices, such as USB fla sh memory and digi tal cameras. PlaysFor Sure This unit incorporates PlaysFor Sure. âÂÂPlaysForSureâ is a new logo pro gram from Mic rosoft Corporation. You can check for the PlaysForSure logo at variou s online stores. Where you see the PlaysForSure logo, you can be sure that the digital media you are purchasing (mus ic, video, pictures) will play on this unit. Subnet mask Used when IP addresses are broken into several part s. It is expressed as âÂÂ255.255 .255.0âÂÂ. In most cases, the Subnet mask is automatically assigned by the DHCP server. USB (Universal Serial Bus) USB provides a serial bus stan dard for connecting device s, usually to computers such as PCs. The Plasma Di splay supports the Mass Storage Class. Windows Media Connect Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology to distribute music, photos and video stored on a PC with Windows XP installed to a ster eo system of TV. Using this technology you can pl ayback files sto red on the PC from various devices wherever you like in your home. Windows Media DRM Windows Media DRM is copyri ght protection technology developed by Microsoft Corpo ration. It enables content providers to distribute over th e Internet music, video and other digital media content in a protected, encrypted file format. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 91 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
92 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 Useful Remote Control Features Learning function of the rem ote control unit You can operate the connected AV products (AV Receiver, Cable Box, SAT tuner, VCR, DVD, DVD recorder, LD) using the remote controlâÂÂs learning func tion. The remote control can memorize other remote controlâÂÂs codes. Using the learning function 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the type of devi ce to be learned. 2 Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 Press a button to be learned. ⢠The LED lights up. ⢠For the functions that can be learned, see pages 99 to 102. ⢠When the deviceâÂÂs remote is memorized, the LED flashes. 4 Press EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. NOTE ⢠To exit the Learn mode before it is complete, press EDIT/ LEARN again. â¢I f t h e Mode switch selection is changed when EDIT/LEARN and 2 are pressed (the LED is flashing), the Learn session is canceled. â¢I f t h e Mode switch selection is changed when a button to be learned is pressed after EDIT/LEARN and 2 have been pressed (the LED lights up), the Learn session is not canceled and the selected mode and button remain effective. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute after having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is flashing), the Learn session is canceled. ⢠If a button to be learned is pressed after having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is lit), the Learn session is canceled in 30 seconds and the LED restarts blinking again. ⢠Code transmission finishes in approximately two seconds. Do not interrupt it halfway. Wa it until the LED flashes again. ⢠When using any of the receiver buttons ( a , INPUT , or VOL /â ), the learned manufacture r code remains the same regardless of the Mode switch position or even if the switch is shifted to a different position. Presetting manufacturer codes to control other devices Presetting manufacture r codes 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the type of devi ce to be preset. 2 Press EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 Press 0 â 9 to enter the manufacturer code. See page 94. ⢠Preset mode is finished when the LED blinks Off. Library Search In the event that the device code for a particular target unit is unknown, cycle through the availa ble codes for that type of device. Sample the functions from each code in order to find the code that properly operates the target device. 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the type of devi ce to be preset. 2 Press EDIT/LEARN and 3 at the same time. ⢠The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Library Search programming mode. 3 Press either SOURCE POWER , PLAY, 1 or CH to sample the selected code. 4 If the code is missing, press / to advance to the next code or return to the previous code and repeat step 3. 5 Press ENTER when the code that properly operates the target device is found. ⢠All the available buttons for the selected mode are programmed to the remote co ntrol. The re mot e control unit returns to normal oper ation (LED lights for one second to confirm addition). Delete Learning You can delete a learned code by either overwriting it wi th a new code on the same button or performing the procedure below. 1 Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. ⢠The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Learning mode. 2 Press and hold TV a for more than two seconds. ⢠The remote control unit starts deleting all learned codes in the selected mode (m arked by a lit LED). ⢠When complet ed, the LED blinks Off and the remote control unit returns to normal operation. 2 cm to 5 cm (0 .8 inches to 2. 0 inches) Remote control (Supplied accessory) Remote control of AV product PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 92 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
93 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English Manufacturing Reset All learned and preset codes can be returned to the factory defaults regardless of the mode. 1 Press EDIT/LE ARN and TV a at the sa me time. The Mod e switch setting is ignored. ⢠The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Manufacturing Reset mode. 2 Press D (yellow) to rese t the remote control. ⢠The manufacturing reset is complete. The LED flashes for one second then the remo te control unit returns to normal operation. NOTE ⢠To exit the Edit mode b efore it is complete, press ED IT/ LEARN again. â¢I f t h e Mode s witch select ion is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit session is canceled. ⢠If no operation is performed within one minute, the Edit session is canceled. ⢠When you enter an unliste d code, the LED flashes repeatedly. ⢠If the tables on pages 94 to 98 do not include your deviceâÂÂs manufacturer or the remote control does not work, use the Learn mode. ⢠The initial mode is âÂÂPIONEERâÂÂ. ⢠When using any of the receiver buttons ( a , INPUT , or VOL /â ) to cancel the Learn mo de, follow the procedure with the Mode switch set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ. You cannot cancel the mode otherwise. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 93 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
94 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 Programming codes CABLE SATELLITE Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes ABC 0003 0008 0014 0011 0017 General Instrument 0014 0011 P anasonic 0000 0008 0107 0021 Sony 1006 1506 1606 Global 1327 P anther 0637 Sprucer 0021 Americast 0899 GoldStar 0144 P aragon 0000 Starcom 0003 0014 Amino 1602 1822 Hamlin 0009 0273 Philips 1305 0317 Supercable 0276 Bell & Howell 0014 Hitachi 0014 0011 0154 Pioneer 1877 0877 0144 0533 0023 0260 1021 Supermax 0883 Bell South 0899 i3 Micro 1602 Thomson 1256 Birmingham Cable Communicat ions 0276 Jerrold 0476 0810 0276 0003 0012 0014 0011 P ulsar 0000 T ocom 0012 British T elecom 0003 PVP Stereo V isual Mat rix 0003 T or x 0003 Clearmaster 0883 KNC 0 008 Quasar 0000 T oshiba 0000 ClearMax 0883 LG 0144 Ra dioShack 0883 T rans PX 0276 Cleartron 1327 Memor ex 0000 RCA 1256 0021 T ristar 08 83 Coolmax 0883 Motorola 1376 0476 0810 0276 1187 1254 0014 1106 Regal 0279 0273 T S 0003 Daeryung 1877 0877 0477 00 08 Rembrandt 0011 United Cable 0003 Digeo 1187 Multitech 0883 R unco 0000 V2 0883 Digi 063 7 MultiVision 0 012 Samsung 0000 0144 Viewmast er 0883 Director 0476 Myrio 1602 1822 Scientific Atlanta 1877 0877 0477 0008 0017 ViewmaxP ro 1544 Dumont 0637 NTL 0003 V ision 0883 Gehua 0476 Optimus 0021 Sejin 1602 V or tex View 0883 General Instrument 0476 0810 0 276 0003 P ace 1877 0237 0008 Signature 0011 Zenith 00 00 0525 0899 Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes AlphaStar 0772 F ortec Star 1550 Legend 0269 Rea listic 0052 Amino 1615 Galaxis 0270 LG 1226 1414 1750 Samsung 1377 1142 1276 1108 1109 0270 1243 1442 1609 BeauSA T 1586 GE 0392 0566 Magnavox 0724 0722 Century 0856 General Instrument 0869 MegaSat 1551 Channel Master 0212 GOI 0775 1775 Memorex 0724 0269 Sanyo 1219 Chaparral 0053 0209 0216 Goodmans 1246 Mitsubishi 0749 SKY 0856 1856 0099 Coolsat 1806 Gradiente 0856 Motorola 0869 0856 Sony 06 39 1639 1640 Crossdigital 1109 Hisense 1535 NEC 0102 0178 1270 Star Choice 0869 Digiturk 1076 Hitachi 0819 1250 Netsat 0099 Star T rak 0180 DirecTV 1377 0392 0566 0639 1639 1142 0247 07 49 1749 0724 0819 1856 1076 1108 0099 11 09 1392 1414 1442 1443 1444 1538 1609 1640 1750 Homecable 0238 Next Level 0869 STS 02 10 HTS 0775 1775 OctalTV 1505 T ivo 1142 1442 1443 1444 1538 Hughes 0749 1749 1442 P anasonic 0247 0701 0152 Hughes Netwo rk Systems 1142 0749 1749 1442 1443 1444 1538 1750 P ansat 0647 1551 1807 T oshiba 0749 174 9 0790 0819 0082 1285 P aysat 0724 Humax 1790 Philips 1142 0749 1749 0724 0819 0856 1076 0722 0099 1442 UltimateTV 1392 1640 iLo 1535 Ultrasat 1806 Dish Network System 1505 1005 0775 1170 1775 Innova 0099 Uniden 0724 0722 0052 0074 0076 0238 IQ 0210 P ioneer 0329 1442 Dishpro 1505 1005 0775 1775 IQ P rism 0210 P roscan 0392 0566 US Digital 1535 Eastern 1612 Janeil 0152 P roton 1535 USD TV 1535 Echostar 1505 1005 0775 0159 0269 0280 1170 1775 Jerrold 0869 RadioShack 0869 V oom 0869 JVC 0775 1170 1775 RCA 0392 0566 0855 0143 1392 Zenith 08 56 1856 Expressvu 0775 1775 La va 1631 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 94 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
95 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English VCR Brand Codes Brand Cod es Bran d Codes B rand Codes ABS 19 72 Craig 0271 Go V ideo 0240 0432 0526 0649 0663 1137 1150 LG 0037 0045 0042 0209 0038 0040 1037 1137 Admiral 0048 0209 0479 Crown 0072 0278 0020 Adventura 0 000 Curtis Mathes 0060 0035 0162 0041 0760 1035 GoldHand 0072 Linksys 1 972 Aiko 0278 GoldStar 0037 0209 0038 0225 0226 1137 1237 LloydâÂÂs 0000 0208 Aiwa 0037 0000 0124 0307 0479 1137 Cybernex 0240 Loewe 0037 0081 CyberP ower 1972 Goodmans 0037 0000 0072 0278 0020 0062 Logik 0240 0072 Aka i 0041 0061 0106 0175 0242 Cyrus 0081 Lunatron 1137 Daewoo 0045 0104 0278 0020 0046 0210 0212 0561 1137 1278 Gradien te 0000 0008 Luxor 0048 0104 0043 0046 0062 0106 Akiba 0072 Graetz 0240 0104 0041 Akura 0271 Granada 0081 0104 0046 LXI 0037 Alba 0209 0072 0278 0020 Dansai 0072 Gr andin 0037 0000 0072 M Electronic 0000 0038 Alienware 1972 Daytron 0020 Grundig 0081 0072 0034 0207 0226 0378 Magnasonic 0593 1278 Allegro 1137 De Graaf 0042 0166 Magnavox 0035 0039 0081 0000 0149 0563 0593 1781 Ambassador 00 20 Decca 0081 0000 Hanseatic 0037 America Action 0278 Dell 1972 Haojie 0240 Magnin 0240 American High 0035 Denon 0042 Harley D avidson 0000 Manesth 0045 0072 Amoisonic 0479 DirecTV 0739 Harman/Kardon 0081 0038 0075 Marantz 0035 0081 0062 Amstrad 0000 Dual 0041 Harwood 0072 Marta 0037 Anam 0162 0037 0240 0278 0226 1037 Dumont 0081 0000 0104 0105 HCM 0072 Matsui 0209 0208 Durabrand 0039 0038 Headquarter 0046 Matsushita 0035 0162 0226 0227 1162 Anam National 0162 0226 Dynatech 0000 Hewlett P ackard 1972 Anitech 0072 Elbe 0038 HI-Q 0047 Media Center PC 1972 ASA 0037 0081 Elcatech 0072 Hinari 0240 0072 0208 MEI 0035 Asha 0240 Electrohome 0037 0043 Hita chi 0037 0240 0000 0042 0041 0065 0082 0089 0105 0166 0235 0292 1037 Memorex 0035 0162 0037 0048 0039 0047 0240 0000 0104 0209 0046 0307 0479 1037 1048 1162 1237 1262 Asuka 0037 Electrophonic 0037 Audiovox 0037 0278 Eme rex 0032 Awa 0043 Emerson 0035 0037 0184 0240 0045 0000 0121 0043 0209 0002 0278 0208 0061 0212 0479 0561 0593 1278 1479 1593 Baird 0000 0104 0041 Howard Computers 1972 Basic Line 0072 0278 0020 HP 1972 Memphis 0072 Beaumark 0240 H u g h e s N e t w o r k S ys t e m s 004 2 0739 Metronic 0081 Bell & Howell 0104 Humax 0739 Metz 0162 0037 0227 Blaupunkt 0162 0034 0226 0227 ESA 1137 Hush 1972 MGA 0240 0043 0061 BPL 0046 ESC 0240 0278 Hypson 0072 MGN T echnology 0240 Brandt Elect ronique 0041 EverFocus 1346 iBUYPOWER 1972 Microsoft 1972 Broksonic 0184 0121 0209 0002 0479 1479 1815 F erguson 0041 Imperial 0000 Mind 1972 Fidelity 0000 Inter funk 0081 Minolta 0042 0105 Bush 0209 0072 0278 Finlandia 0081 0104 IT T 0240 0104 0041 0046 0106 Mitsubishi 0081 0067 0043 0041 0061 0075 0173 0214 0242 0443 0807 Calix 0037 Finlux 0081 0000 0042 0104 0105 Canon 0035 1143 ITV 0037 0278 Capehart 0020 F irstline 0037 0045 0043 0209 0072 Jensen 0041 Motorola 0035 0048 Carver 0081 JVC 0045 0067 0041 0008 0206 0207 0366 1162 1707 MTC 0240 0000 Catron 0020 Fisher 0047 0104 0046 Multitech 0000 0072 CCE 0072 0278 Fronte ch 0020 Murphy 0000 CGE 0000 Fuji 0035 0033 Kaisui 0072 Myryad 0081 Changhong 0048 0081 F ujitsu 0045 0000 0366 KEC 0037 0278 NAD 0104 0058 Cimline 0072 F unai 0000 0593 1335 1593 Kendo 0209 0106 National 0226 Cineral 0278 Garrard 0000 Kenwood 0067 0041 0038 NEC 0 035 0037 004 8 0104 0067 0041 0038 0008 0040 0050 0082 0206 0457 CineVision 1137 Gateway 1195 1196 1972 KLH 0072 Citizen 0037 0278 1278 GE 0060 0035 0240 0065 0202 0226 0760 0761 0807 1035 1060 Koda k 0035 0037 Clatronic 0020 Kolin 004 3 0041 Colt 0072 Korpel 0072 Neckermann 0081 Condor 0020 GEC 0081 Lenco 0278 Nesco 0072 Craig 0037 0047 0240 0072 General 0045 0020 0366 Leyco 0072 Newave 0037 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 95 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
96 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 VCR Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Nikko 0037 Pye 0 081 SEG 0240 T ensai 0000 Nikon 0034 Qisheng 0060 SEI 0081 Thomas 0000 Niveus Media 1972 Quarter 0046 Seleco 0041 Thomson 0060 0067 0041 0202 Noblex 0240 Quartz 0046 Semp 0045 Thorn 0104 0041 Nokia 0240 0104 0041 0046 0106 Quasar 0035 0162 0077 1035 1162 Sensor y Science 0649 1155 Tivo 0618 0636 0739 1337 1996 Sentra 0020 Nordmende 0041 Quelle 0 081 Sharp 0048 0209 0062 0807 0848 1048 TMK 0240 0208 Northgate 1972 Radiola 0081 T oshiba 0081 0045 0042 0067 0043 0209 0041 1996 1972 1145 1008 0845 0377 0366 0212 0210 0057 0008 Oceanic 0000 0041 RadioShack 0000 1037 Shinco 0000 Olympus 0035 0226 Radix 0037 Shintom 0104 0072 Onkyo 0222 Randex 0037 Sho gun 0240 Optimus 1062 0162 0037 0048 0104 0058 0432 0593 1048 1162 1262 RCA 0060 0035 0240 0000 0042 0149 0077 0105 0106 0065 0202 0226 0058 0760 0761 0807 0880 1035 1060 Siemens 0037 0081 0104 Silva 0037 T otevision 0037 0240 Singer 0045 0072 T ouch 1972 Optonica 0062 Sinudyne 0081 T riumph 0208 Orion 0184 0121 0209 0002 0208 0479 1479 1815 Solavox 0020 Uher 02 40 Reali stic 0035 0037 0048 0047 0000 0104 0046 0062 Sonic Blue 0614 0616 1137 Unitech 0240 Osaki 0037 0000 0072 Sonolor 0046 0062 Universum 0037 0081 0240 0000 0106 Otto V ersand 0081 ReplayTV 0614 0616 Sontec 0037 P allad ium 0037 0041 0072 Re x 0041 Son y 0035 0032 0033 0000 0011 0022 0034 0275 0636 1032 1232 1546 1702 1703 1896 1972 V ector 0045 P anasonic 1062 0035 0162 0077 0225 0226 0227 0246 0378 0616 1035 1162 1262 Ricavision 1972 V ector Resear ch 0038 004 0 Ricoh 0034 Victor 0067 0041 0008 Rio 1137 Video Concepts 00 45 0040 0061 Roadstar 0037 0240 0072 0278 Stack 9 1972 Videomagic 0037 P athe Marconi 0041 Runco 0039 STS 0042 Videosonic 0240 P enney 0035 0037 0240 0042 0038 0040 1035 1237 Saba 0041 0206 0207 Sunstar 0000 Viewsonic 1972 Saisho 0209 0208 Suntronic 0000 Villain 0000 P entax 0042 0065 0105 Salora 0 043 0046 0075 0106 0443 Sylvania 0035 0081 0000 0043 0593 1593 1781 V oodoo 1972 P erdio 0000 W ard s 0060 0035 0048 0047 0081 0240 0000 0042 0072 0149 0062 0212 0760 Philco 003 5 0000 0209 00 38 0226 0479 0561 Sampo 0037 0048 Symphonic 0000 0593 1593 Samsung 0240 0045 0210 0212 0432 0649 0663 0739 0760 1014 Systemax 1972 Philips 0035 0081 0000 0062 0226 0563 0593 0618 0739 1081 1181 1266 T agar Systems 1972 T andy 0000 0104 W harfedale 0593 Sanky 0048 0039 T ashik o 0037 0000 White W estinghouse 0209 0072 Phonola 0081 Sansui 0000 0067 0209 0041 0082 0271 0479 1479 T atung 0081 0045 0000 0067 0041 0008 0366 XR- 1000 0035 0000 0072 P ilot 0037 Y amaha 0041 0038 P ioneer 008 1 0042 0067 0058 0168 0206 0235 1337 Sanyo 0047 0240 0104 0046 0159 0372 T eac 0000 0041 0278 0307 0526 0593 Ya m i s h i 0 0 7 2 Yo k a n 0 0 7 2 P olk Audio 0081 SBR 0 081 T ec 0020 Y ok o 0240 0020 P ortland 0020 Schaub Lorenz 0000 0104 0041 T echnics 0035 0162 0226 0246 Zenith 00 39 0033 0000 0209 0034 0479 1137 1139 1479 P rofitronic 0240 Schneider 0081 0000 0072 T eco 0035 0037 0048 0041 0038 0040 P roline 0000 Scott 0184 0045 0121 0043 0210 0212 P roscan 0060 0202 0760 0761 1060 T eknika 0035 0037 0000 ZT Group 1 972 Sears 0035 00 37 0047 0000 0042 0104 0046 0057 0105 1237 T eleavia 0041 P rotec 007 2 T elefunken 0041 P ulsar 0039 T enosal 0072 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 96 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
97 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English PVR DVD Brand Codes Brand Cod es Bran d Codes B rand Codes ABS 19 72 HP 1972 Niveus Media 1972 Systemax 1972 Alienware 1972 H u g h e s N e t w o r k S y st e m s 0739 Northgate 197 2 T agar Systems 1972 CyberP ower 1972 Humax 0739 P anasonic 0616 Tivo 0618 0636 0739 Dell 1972 Hush 1972 Philips 0618 0739 T oshiba 1008 1972 DirecTV 0739 iBUYPOWER 1972 RCA 0880 T ouch 1972 EverF ocus 1346 Linksys 1972 ReplayTV 0614 0616 Views onic 1972 Gateway 1195 1196 1972 Media Center PC 1972 Sonic Blue 0614 0616 Vood oo 1972 Hewlett P ackard 1972 Microsof t 1972 Sony 0636 1972 ZT Group 1972 Howard Computers 1972 Mind 1972 Stack 9 1972 Brand Codes Brand Cod es Bran d Codes B rand Codes Acoustic Solutions 0730 1242 Ci neVision 0876 0833 0869 Gate way 1073 1077 1158 1194 Lande l 0826 Adcom 1094 Citizen 1277 GE 0522 0815 0717 Lasonic 0798 1173 Advent 1016 Classic 1385 Go Video 0744 0715 0741 0783 0833 0869 1044 1075 1099 1144 1148 1158 1304 1443 1730 Lecson 1533 Afreey 0698 Clatronic 1165 Lenoxx 1127 Aiwa 0641 Coby 0778 0852 1086 1107 1165 1177 1351 LG 0591 0741 0801 0869 1526 Akai 0695 0770 0899 1089 Alba 0672 0539 0717 Crai g 0831 Go Vision 1071 1072 Lit eOn 1058 1158 1416 1440 Alco 0790 Curtis Mathes 1087 GoldSta r 0741 L oewe 0511 0741 Allegro 0869 C yberHome 0816 0874 1019 1023 1024 1117 1129 1502 1537 Goodmans 0790 1004 Logix 0783 Altacom 1224 GPX 0699 0769 Lunatron 0741 Am phi on Me dia W orks 0872 1176 1245 Gradiente 0490 0651 M agnavox 0503 0539 0646 0675 0821 1268 1506 AMW 0872 117 6 1245 Cydectin 1074 Greenhill 0717 Apex Digital 06 72 0717 0755 0794 0796 0797 0830 1004 1020 1056 1061 1100 Daewo o 0784 0705 0770 0833 0869 1169 1172 1234 1242 1441 1443 Grundig 0539 0695 0705 Malata 0782 1159 GVG 1169 Marantz 0539 H & B 1421 Matsui 0672 Arcam 0732 Dansai 0770 Harman/Kardon 0582 0702 McIntosh 1533 1273 1373 Aspire Digital 1168 1407 Dantax 1089 Hitachi 0573 0664 0695 1247 Memor ex 0690 0695 0831 1270 Audiologic 0736 Daytek 0872 Hiteker 0672 Metronic 0690 Audiovox 0790 1041 1071 1072 1121 1122 Decca 0770 iLo 1348 1472 Microsoft 0522 Denon 0490 0634 Initial 0717 1472 Minato 0752 Axion 1071 1072 1193 Denver 0778 1107 1316 Innovative T echnology 1542 M inowa 1165 B & K 0655 0662 Desay 1407 1455 Integra 0571 0627 Mint ek 0839 0717 1472 BBK 1224 Diamond Vision 1316 1609 1610 IRT 0783 Mirror 0752 Bel Canto Design 1571 Dick Smi th E lec tr on ics 0833 1730 Jaton 1078 Mitsubishi 1521 0521 Bellagio 1 245 Digitor 0690 JBL 0702 MixSonic 1130 1611 Blaupunkt 0717 Digitrex 0672 1056 Jens en 1016 Momitsu 1082 Blue P ar ade 0571 Digix 1272 JMB 0695 MTlogic 1265 Broksonic 0695 0868 1419 Disney 0675 1 270 JSI 1423 Mustek 0730 1730 Bush 0690 DiViDo 0705 JVC 0558 0623 0867 1164 1275 1602 Myr yad 0894 Byd:sign 0872 DSE 0833 1730 NAD 0591 0692 0741 California Audio Labs 04 90 Dual 1068 1085 jW in 1049 1051 Nakamichi 1222 C a m b r i d g e S o u n d w o r ks 0690 Durabrand 1127 Kawasaki 0790 NEC 0785 0869 Cary Audio Design 1477 DVD2000 0521 Kenwood 0490 0534 0682 0737 Nesa 0717 CA VS 1057 ECC 0730 KLH 0717 0790 1020 1149 1261 Next Base 0826 Celestial 1020 Emerson 0591 0675 0821 1268 NexxT ech 1402 Centrex 0672 1004 Enterprise 0591 Konka 071 1 0719 0720 0721 Nintaus 1051 Centrios 1577 ESA 1443 Koss 0651 0896 1423 Norcent 1003 0872 1107 1265 1457 Changhong 0627 1061 Fintec 1169 Kreisen 1421 Cinea 0831 Fisher 0670 Krell 1498 Olidata 0672 Cinego 1399 Funai 0675 1268 1334 Lafayette 1369 Onkyo 0503 0627 0792 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 97 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
98 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 DVD DVD-R LD Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Oppo 1224 Proscan 0522 Shinco 0717 T oshiba 0503 0695 1045 1154 Op toM ed ia E lec tr oni cs 0896 ProV ision 0778 Shinsonic 0533 0839 TRANS-continents 0831 1165 Orion 1419 Qwestar 0651 Sigma Designs 0674 T redex 0799 0800 0803 0804 Oritron 0651 RCA 0 522 0571 0717 0790 0822 1022 1132 1193 Slim Art 0784 TYT 0705 Otic 0826 SM Electronic 0690 0730 Umax 0690 P acific 0831 Recco 0 698 Sonic Blue 0869 1099 Universum 0591 P alsonic 0672 0852 Reoc 0752 Sony 0533 1533 0864 1033 1069 1070 1431 1432 1433 1548 Urban Concepts 0503 P anasonic 0503 0490 0632 0703 1010 1011 1362 1462 1490 1762 Revoy 0699 US Logic 0839 Rio 0869 V enturer 07 90 RJT ech 1360 Sova 1122 Vialta 1509 pe eKT on 1224 Roadstar 1051 Sungale 1074 1342 1532 Viewmaster 1224 Philco 069 0 0790 Rotel 0623 11 78 Superscan 0821 Vizio 1064 1226 Philips 0503 0539 0646 0675 0854 1158 1260 1267 1354 Rowa 0823 1004 SVA 0717 0860 1105 V ocopr o 1027 Sampo 0698 0752 1501 Sylvania 0675 0821 1268 W esder 0699 Samsung 0490 0573 0744 0820 0899 1044 1075 Symphonic 0675 1268 W intel 11 30 P ianoDisc 102 4 T AG McLaren 0894 Xbox 0522 P ioneer 052 5 0571 0631 0632 1475 1476 1571 Sansui 0695 T atung 0770 XMS 0770 Sanyo 0670 0695 0873 T eac 0571 0717 0692 0790 0809 0833 Xoro 1173 P olaroid 1020 1061 1086 1245 1316 1478 1480 1482 Schneider 0783 Xwave 1001 Schwaiger 0752 T echnics 0490 0703 Y amada 0872 1004 1056 1158 1416 P olk Audio 0539 Semp 0503 T echnosonic 0730 P ortland 0770 Sensor y Science 1158 T echwood 0692 Y a maha 0490 0539 0545 0817 P rima 1016 Sharp 0630 0675 0752 1256 1419 T edelex 0690 Y amakawa 0872 P rimare 0886 1467 1618 T erapin 1031 Zenith 05 03 0591 0741 0869 P rinceton 0674 Sharper Image 1117 Theta Digital 0571 Zeus 0784 P roceed 0672 Sherwood 0633 0770 1043 1077 Thomson 0522 Zoece 1265 Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Apex Digital 1056 Funai 0675 1334 Loewe 0741 Sensor y Science 1158 Aspire Digi tal 1168 Gateway 1073 1158 1194 Magnavox 0646 1506 Sharp 0630 0675 1419 Coby 1086 Go Video 0741 1158 130 4 1730 Mustek 1730 Sony 10 33 1069 1070 1431 1432 1433 CyberHome 1129 1502 H & B 1421 P anasonic 0490 1010 1011 Denon 0490 iLo 1348 Philips 0646 1158 Sylvania 0675 Di ck S mi th Ele ct ro nic s 1730 JVC 1164 1275 P ioneer 0631 1475 1476 Y amada 1056 1158 1416 Digitrex 1056 Kreisen 1421 P olaroid 1086 Zenith 0741 DSE 1730 LG 0741 RCA 0522 Emerson 0675 LiteOn 1158 1416 1440 Samsung 0490 Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Aiwa 020 3 Magnavox 0194 0217 0241 Philips 0064 0194 Sega 0023 Carver 006 4 0194 0323 M a r a n t z 0064 0194 P ioneer 0059 0023 Sharp 0001 Denon 0059 0172 0241 Mitsubishi 0059 0241 P olk Au dio 0194 Sony 0193 0201 0270 Disco V ision 0023 NAD 0059 Quasar 0204 T echnics 0204 F unai 0203 Nagsmi 0059 Realisti c 0203 T elefunken 0059 Gol dS ta r 0172 NEC 0286 Renaissance 0323 Theta Digital 0194 Harman/Kardon 0194 Optimus 0059 Salora 0064 Victor 0245 Hitachi 0023 0395 P anasonic 0204 Samsung 0323 Y amaha 0217 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 98 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
99 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English Using the remote control unit to control other devices Receiver control buttons When a Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, use buttons 1 to 3 to operate the receiver. When a non-Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, the signals for 1 to 3 must first be âÂÂlea rnedâÂÂ. See page 92. 1R E C E I V E R ïµ (STANDBY/ON) Turns the Pioneer receiver power On and Off. 2 RECEIVER INPUT Selects the input source connected to the Pioneer receiver. 3 RECEIVER VOL /â Adjusts the Pioneer receiver volume level Press VOL to increase the vo lume and VOL â to decrease it. NOTE ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can memorize the control signal fr om another devi ce âÂÂs remote control. 3 1 2 Mode switch (with âÂÂTVâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 99 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
100 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 CBL/SAT control buttons When the CBL/SAT function ha s been preset by the remote controlâÂÂs learning function, the remote control buttons function as shown below. ⢠When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SAT, the cable converter or satellite broadc ast tuner connected to the display, use the buttons shown below to operate th e device ( 3 , 4 , 5 , 8 and 9 for cable converters and 1 to 7 for satell ite tuners): ⢠Cable converters or satellit e broadcast tuners made by other manufacturers not listed in th e system can be controlled using the remote control if buttons 1 to 9 have already learned the functions. See page 92. 1S A T M E N U Displays the satellite broad casting menu screen 2E N T E R , / / / ENTER: Activates the selected function /// : Selects items on the SAT GUID E screen or SAT MENU screen 3 0 â 9 Press a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch 4C H / â Selects a higher or lower channel 5 SOURCE ïµ Turns the device sending the image On and Off 6 SAT GU IDE Displays the satellite br oadcasting guide screen ⢠Set up this button with the learning function if necessary 7R E T U R N When the CBL/SAT menu is displayed, restores the immediately previous screen 8C H E N T E R * Enters the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons 9 CH RETURN* Switches between the current channel and the previous channel you were watching * Some cable converter manuf acturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN . Set up these buttons with the learning function if necessa ry. NOTE ⢠CABLE and SAT cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. 4 8 7 6 3 5 2 1 9 Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SATâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 100 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
101 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English VCR control buttons When the VCR is preset by the remote controlâÂÂs learning function, the remote control buttons function as follows: ( Mode swit ch must be set to VCR). ⢠Press the input selector button (INPUT 1 â 6) that matches the input terminal connected to the VCR. The VCR can be operated using 1 to 8 . ⢠VCRs made by manufacturers not listed in the system c an be controlled using the remo te control if buttons 1 to 8 have learned the functi ons. See page 92. 1C H / â Selects the channel on the VCR 2 ï¤ (PLAY) Selects playback 3 ï (RWD) Rewinds the tape and allows picture search 4S O U R C E ïµ Turns the power of the VCR On and Off 5 ïÂÂ¥ (PAUSE/STILL) Pauses playback and displays still pictures 6 ï® (FF) Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search 7 ï« (REC) Starts recording 8 ï§ (STOP) Stops tape transport NOTE ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. 1 4 3 7 6 8 5 2 Mode switch (with âÂÂVCRâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 101 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
102 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 DVD/DVR control buttons When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode swit ch of the remote control unit is set to DVD/DVR. ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal co nnected to a DVD player or DVD recorder is pressed, these player s can be op erated using 1 to 12 . ⢠DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 12 have learned the func tions. See page 92 . 1 CH /â (DVD record er only) Changes the channel of the tuner built into the DVD recorder 2 ï¤ (PLAY) Selects playback 3 ï (SCAN)/ ï¯ (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing to go backward Pressing quickly o nce takes yo u to the start of the playing chapter. Each time it is pressed, playback jumps t o the start of previous chapter. 4 SOURCE ïµ Turns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder On and Off 5 ïÂÂ¥ (PAUSE/STILL) Pauses playback and di splays still pictures 6 DVD MENU (DVD, DVD reco rder) Displays the DVD menu 7 DVD TO P MENU (DVD , DVD recorder) Displays the DVD top menu 8 E N T E R , /// ( D V D , D V D r e c o r d e r ) ENTER: Activates the selected function /// : Selects items on the DVD MENU screen 9R E T U R N When the DVD menu is displayed, restores the immediately previous screen 10 ï® (SCAN )/ï° (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing for fast forward Pressing quickl y once takes yo u to the start of the nex t chapter. Each time it is pressed, playback jumps t o the start of the next chapter. 11 ï« (REC) (DVD recorder only) Starts recording 12 ï§ (STOP) Stops playback If pressing once fails to stop playback on the DVD player or DVD recorder, press twice to open the disc tray. 11, 12 STOP REC (DVD recorder only) Press and hold ï« then press ï§ to stop recording. This operation applies to Pion eer DVD recorders only. NOTE ⢠A DVD player and a D VD recorder cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. ⢠The remote control buttons can control some LD players. For the supported LD players, see the LD brands and codes on page 98. 1 4 3 9 11 10 7 12 5 2 6 8 Mode switch (with âÂÂDVD/ DVRâ sel ected ) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 102 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
103 En Appendix 14 English Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Solution GENERAL ⢠No power ⢠Is the po wer cord disconnected? (Se e page 25) â¢H a s POWER been turned on ? (See page 2 6) ⢠Check if you pressed TV ïµ on the remote control. (See page 26) If the indicator on the system lights up re d, press TV ïµ. ⢠Power is sudd enly turn ed off ⢠Is the sleep timer set? (See page 57) ⢠Check the power control setting. (See page 63) ⢠The syste mâÂÂs internal tempera ture has increa sed. Clear/clean the vents. (See pa ge 20) ⢠A malfunction may have oc curred in the ho me network module . ⢠The s ystem cannot be operated ⢠External influences such as lightn ing, static electr icity , etc., may cause failures. T r y turning off the Plasma Display or unpluggi ng th e power cord. Wait one to t wo minutes then restore power to the panel. ⢠Remote control unit doe s not operate ⢠Check if POWER is Off . Activate the button when the P OWER ON and STANDBY indicators are Off . ⢠Is the Mode switch set co rrectly? Slide it to the TV position. (See page 19) ⢠Are the batteries inserted with polarity aligned ( , âÂÂ)? (See page 24) ⢠Are the batteries low? (R eplace wi th new batter ies.) (See pa ge 24) ⢠P oint the remote control directly at the pa nelâÂÂs remote control se nsor . (See page 24) ⢠Is the panel under strong or fluorescent lighting? ⢠Is fluorescent light blinding the remo te control sensor? ⢠POWER ON indicator or ST ANDBY indicator is blinking ⢠The unitâÂÂs internal protective ci rcuits may hav e been activated. Unplug the panelâÂÂs power cord fro m th e power outlet. W ait one to two minu tes then plug in the panel again . If the problem is not so lved with this, contact t he ne arest P ioneer Auth orized Independen t Service Company , or the Customer Support Divi sion (see back cover). PICTURE/SOUND ⢠Image and sound are absen t ⢠V erify that the input so urce is a TV chan nel rather than from a PC or a DVD player . (See page 27) ⢠Check the P arenta l Control funct ion. ( See page 38) Enter a password to temporarily cancel the Pa rental Contro l function. (See page 42) ⢠Check the cable connection with the antenn a. (See page 23) ⢠Check the cable connection with the source device. (See pages 68 to 74) ⢠No picture ⢠Is the connection to othe r components cor rect? (See pages 68 to 73) ⢠Is a non-co mpatible PC signal being input? (See page 72) ⢠Is picture adjustment correct? (See page 58) ⢠Sound but no picture ⢠Check if energy-saving âÂÂPicture Off â option is selected. With this option selected, the screen is dea ctiv ated; only audio is output . T o restore the screen display , press any butto n other than VOL /â and MUTING . (See page 63) ⢠P ictu re but no sound ⢠Verify that the volume is se t high enough to hear . (See page 28) ⢠Check if the sound is muted. (See page 28) ⢠When usin g a video or PC input source, verify that the a udio terminals are also connected. (See pages 68 to 70 and 72) ⢠Sound is reversed between th e right and left speakers ⢠Sound but from only one speaker ⢠Check if the speaker cable conne ctions have been reversed between the right an d left or if the spea ker cable from either speaker has been disconnected. (See pa ge 21) ⢠Has the b alance been correc tly adjusted? (Se e page 62) ⢠P icture is cut off ⢠Is the image position correct? (See page 64) ⢠Has the correct scre en size been sele cted? (See pa ge 66) ⢠Colors are too dark/light or appe ar strange ⢠Adjust the picture tone. (See page 58) ⢠Is the room too bright? The picture may appear dim in a room that is too bright. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 103 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
104 En Appendix 14 OTHER ⢠TV - Guide data is u navailab le ⢠If TV -Guide data cannot be obtain ed with ANT .A selected for cabl e connection, se lect ANT .B for ov er the air . In additio n, perform the TV -Guide setup again (see page 33): - Select âÂÂNoâ for cable ser vice on Screen 3. - S elect âÂÂY esâ for an tenna service on Screen 5. - S elect â ANT B INâ on Screen 4. ⢠An exte rnal device connected to the USB terminal does not operate ⢠Con firm that th e device is connected t o the displ ay . (S ee page 76 ) ⢠Disconnect then re connect th e USB cable. (See pa ge 76) ⢠Check th at the USB cab le is shorter than 5 m. (See page 7 6) ⢠Check if the USB cable is prop erly connected. (See page 7 6) ⢠T urn Off then On the main power to co nfirm that the USB device is working. ⢠Check if the externa l device works corr ectly after the USB device was resta rted. ⢠V erify that the digi tal camera is set to take a pic ture. ⢠Confirm that the digi tal camera is place d in Mass Storage m ode. ⢠T o change the d igital cam eraâÂÂs config uration , refer to the came raâÂÂs instruc tion manual . ⢠Photo data stored in a digital still camera cannot be read through USB interf ace ⢠Con firm that th e device is connected t o the displ ay . (S ee page 76 ) ⢠V erify that the digi tal camera is turned On. ⢠P anel sounds/noises ⢠P anel generated sou nds, examples: F an mo tor noise, Electr ical Circuit Humming/Glass P anel buzzing are normal operation of a phosphor-based matrix display. Experiment with th e available Energy Save modes to find the best setting for your use. (See page 6 3) ⢠Screen shows uneven brightn ess on the sides ⢠Play content that completely fills the screen until une venness is mini mized. So me signals may require the A V mode sett ing to be changed. ( See page 65) Home Media Gallery/ NETWORK ⢠No ser ve rs are fo und ⢠Confirm that the PC is On an d not in Stan db y or Sleep. ( nothing is ch osen in âÂÂSele ct Ser versâ ). When th e PC has started with the âÂÂWake On LANâ (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has been prope rly done on the device manager for BIOS or W ind ows. ⢠Check the physical connections (hu b , 100BASE- TX/10BASE- T , or crossed cable and other cable qua lity when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommend ed to use 100BASE- TX for playback qualit y and display speed. ⢠Check th e logical connec tions (IP Ad dress se tup, DHCP , etc.). Confirm th e IP Address is co rrect if acquired by Auto IP and Firewall se tup. Also check if the IP Add ress is prope rly acquired with DHC P on the âÂÂNetwor k Setupâ screen t hat follows the âÂÂSetupâ menu. ⢠Check the PC if its media server (Windows Media Connect or DLNA compliant) is running. Restart if necessary. Check if one or more server s are On (this may cause malf unction). ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly . Reboot th e PC after confirming it s specifications and setup. ⢠Check th e media server setup. If a client is regist ered manua lly the setu p procedure may ha ve to be run again. An option âÂÂNot Allowedâ may have been selected for connections. ⢠W a it for a short period then select âÂÂUpdate to Latest Info rmationâ from the T ool Menu. (See page 78) ⢠No previously connected server(s) found (items i n âÂÂSelect S er versâ are dimmed ) ⢠Confirm that the PC is On an d not in Standb y or Sleep. ( nothing is ch osen in âÂÂSele ct Ser versâ ). When th e PC has started with the âÂÂWake On LANâ (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has been prope rly done on the device manager for BIOS or W ind ows. ⢠Check th e physical connections ( hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE- T or crossed ca ble and ot her cable qu ality when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommend ed to use 100BASE- TX for playback qualit y and display speed. ⢠Check th e logical connec tions (IP Address se tup, DHCP , etc.). Confirm the IP Address when acquired by Auto IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Ad dress is properly acquired with DHCP on the âÂÂNetwork Setupâ screen t hat follows the âÂÂSetupâ menu. ⢠Check the PC if its media server (Windows Media Co nnect or DLNA compliant) is running. Restart it if necessary. Check if one or more server s are On (this may cause malf unction). ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly . Reboot th e PC after confirming it s specifications and setup. ⢠Check th e media server setup. A setup procedure may be required for connections if a client is register ed manually . An option âÂÂNot Allowedâ may have been selected for connections. ⢠W ait for a while and select âÂÂUpdat e to Latest Info rmationâ from the T ool Menu. (See pa ge 78) ⢠An availab le server is selected but cannot be naviga ted ⢠Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing, if the targ et folder has be en deleted, or if one or more folders have been cor rupted on the ser ver . ⢠Check if the re are too many files in each folder . ⢠A server is arbitrarily selected ⢠This arbi tra ry selection happens when the server you use d before had been set to display the top menu screen (if you reset it, oth er servers connected are al so reset). Whe n the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ option is selected on the â Auto Connection Setu pâ screen that follows th e âÂÂSetupâ menu, the ser ver is automatically accessed if only one server is connected. Use the T ool Menu to select the proper server . (See page 78) ⢠File/folder config uration di ffers from one ser ver to an other (st range conf iguration ) ⢠The Media Navigator displays the se r ver contents as classifi ed by the server . ⢠If no informat ion (such as ID3 tag) i s contained i n the file, files cannot be classified on the server . Problem Possible Solution PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 104 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
105 En Appendix 14 English If one of the following erro r code s appear on screen, chec k the corresponding message. Home Medi a Galler y/PLAYB ACK ⢠Image or sound is interrupted or distorted (B lock noise appears) ⢠Check the physical conne ctions (hub , 100B ASE- TX/10BASE- T , or crossed ca ble and other c able quality when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommende d to use 100BASE- TX for playback quality and display speed. ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly. R eboot th e PC aft er confirming its specifications and setup. ⢠Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile . Also check if the file is damaged. ⢠When connected by a wireless LAN, ch eck if the bit rate is sufficient. ⢠Some files that com ply with the supported format may not be played back or displaye d. ⢠Cannot play or display ⢠C heck th e physical conne ctions (hub, 100B ASE- TX/10BASE- T , or crossed cab le and other cabl e quality when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommende d to use 100BASE- TX for playback quality and display speed. ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly. R eboot th e PC aft er confirming its specifications and setup. ⢠Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile . Also check if the file is damaged. ⢠Check if the leasing contract for the ser ver has expired. ⢠When connected by a wireless LAN, ch eck if the bit rate is sufficient. ⢠Some files that com ply with the supported format may not be played back or displaye d. ⢠It takes time to ca pture and display a large-sized image. If this is the c ase, no operat ion may be performed. ⢠See the Pioneer website (www .pioneerelectr onics.com) for the forma ts that are supp orted. Home Media Gallery/FIRMWARE ⢠No updates are possible on USB ⢠Check i f the device is Mass Stor age Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is da maged (power unit, mode su ch as Mass St orage mode an d media for mat, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poo r device spee d may result in interru pted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate proble m). When using a digit al camera that is not Mass Storage C lass compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader . ⢠Confirm that the device is correctly insert ed or remov ed. ⢠Check that the firmware file has been co rrectly downloaded. Also check the file size. ⢠See the Pioneer website (www .pio neerelectronics.com) for details. Home Media Gallery/USB ⢠USB devices are n ot properly re cognized ⢠Che ck if the device is Mass St orage Class com pliant, if it is connected properly , noth ing is damaged (po wer unit, mode su ch as Mass St orage mode an d media for mat, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poo r device spee d may result in interru pted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate proble m). When using a digit al camera that is not Mass Storage C lass compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader . ⢠Confirm that the device is correctly insert ed or remov ed. ⢠No USB hu b is supported. When y ou connect a ho me ne twork, connect directly to the deviceâÂÂs USB port. ⢠Image or sound is interrupted or distorted (B lock noise appears) ⢠V erify that the file compl ies with the supported for mat, bit rate or profi le. Also check the file for da mage. ⢠Some files that com ply with the supported format may not play back or display properly . ⢠Check if the de vice is Mass Storag e Class compliant, if it is connecte d proper ly , no thing is da maged (po wer unit, mode su ch as Mass St orage mode an d media for mat, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poo r device spee d may result in interru pted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate proble m). When using a digit al camera that is not Mass Storage C lass compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader . Code Message Check SD04 and SD11 P owering o ff . Internal temperatur e too high . Check temp erature around PD P . Check if the ambien t temperature of the Plasma D isplay is high. SD05 (PRO -1540HD/PRO-1140 HD) Internal protection circuit turns po wer off . Is there a shor t in speaker cable? (PRO-940HD) Internal protection circuit turns po wer off . Check the speaker cable connect ions betwee n the Plasma Displa y and the speakers. Contact the ne arest P ioneer Aut horized Independen t Service Company or the Customer Support Division. (See ba ck cover) Problem Possible Solution PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 105 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
106 En Appendix 14 This product in part uses âÂÂOpenSSLâ software. To the extent the Op enSSL software is bein g used, the following notification applies: Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and bina ry forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r. 2. Redistributions in binary form must re produce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaim e r in the documentation and/or other mate rials provided wi th the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentio ning featur es or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis produc t includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Op enSSL Toolkit. (http: //www.openssl.org/)â 4. The names âÂÂOpenSSL Toolkitâ and âÂÂOpenSSL Projectâ must not be used to endo rse or promote products derived from this software without prior wri tten permission. For written permission, pl ease contact opens s l-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called âÂÂOpenSSLâ nor may âÂÂOpenSSLâ appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form what soever must retain the following acknowledgme nt: âÂÂThis product includ es software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Op enSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)â THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJEC T âÂÂAS ISâ AND A NY EXPRESSE D OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI ES OF MERCHANTABILIT Y AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE Open SSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL , SPEC IAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES ( INCLUDING, BU T NOT LIMITE D TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA , OR PROFI TS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, ST RICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@ cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implem entation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are ahered to. The follo wing conditions apply to all code found in t h i s d i s t r ib u t i o n , be it t he R C 4 , R S A , l ha s h , D E S , e tc . , c o d e ; n ot ju s t t h e S SL co de . Th e SSL documentation included wit h this distribu tion is covered by the same copyright te rms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric YoungâÂÂs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a te xtual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and bina ry forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must reta in the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclai mer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must re produce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaim e r in the documentation and/or other mate rials provided wi th the distribution. 3. All advertising materials ment ioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: âÂÂT his product includes cryptographic so ftware written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com )â The word âÂÂcryptographicâ can be left out if the rouines from the lib rary being used are not cr yptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) fr om the apps directory (applic ation code) you must includ e an acknowledgement: âÂÂThis product includes soft ware written by Tim Hudso n (tjh@cryptsoft.com)â THIS SOFTWA RE IS PROVID ED BY ERIC YOU NG âÂÂAS ISâ A ND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRA NTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARR ANTIES OF MERCHANTAB ILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTO RS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMEN T OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS I NTERRUPTION) HO WEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CO NTRACT, STRICT LI ABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBI LITY OF SUCH DAM AGE. The licence and distribution te rms for any publically avail able ve rsion or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put und er another dist ribution licence [including th e GNU Public Licence.] PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 106 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
107 En Appendix 14 English Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED â AS ISâÂÂ, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANT IES OF MERCHA NTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRI GHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CL AIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWIS E, ARISI NG ROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEAL INGS IN THE SOFTWARE. âÂÂPortions of this software are copyright (c) <year> The FreeType Project (www. freetype.org). All rights rese rved.â [please rep lace <year> with the value from the Fr eeType version you actually use] If only executable code is distrib uted, then the accompanying do cumentation must state that âÂÂthis software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Groupâ COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify libpng yo u may insert additional notices i mmediately following this sentence. libpng version 1.2.6, Septemb er 12, 2004, is Copyright (c) 2004 Glenn Rand ers-Pehrson, and is distribute d according to the same disclaimer and li cense as libpng-1.2.5 with the following indi vidual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1 .0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2 002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and ar e distributed according to the same disclaime r and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the foll owing individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following a dditions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or agai nst infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This li brary is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performa nce, a ccuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0 .97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 2 0, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaime r and license as libpng-0.96, with the foll owing individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Tom Lane Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0 .89, June 1996, through 0.9 6, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1 996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed acc ording to the same disc laimer and lic ense as lib png-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 107 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
108 En Appendix 14 libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1 996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, I nc. For the purposes of this copyright and license, âÂÂContributing Authorsâ is define d as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilg er Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is s upplied âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, th e warranties of merchantability and of fitn ess for any purpose. The Contributing Aut hor s and Group 42, Inc. assume no liabil ity for direct, indirect, inci dental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which ma y result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, co py, modify, and distribute th is source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, withou t fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source co de must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any so urce or altered source distribution. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and en courage th e use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknow ledgment is not required but would be appreciated. A âÂÂpng_get_copyrightâ function is available, for convenient use in âÂÂaboutâ bo xes and the like: printf (âÂÂ%sâÂÂ,png_get_copyright (NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course ) is supplied in the file s âÂÂpngbar.pngâ and âÂÂpngbar.jpg (88x3 1) and âÂÂpngnow.pngâ (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software . OSI Certi fied Open Source is a certification mark of t he Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp@users.sourceforge.net September 12, 2004 Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are pe rmitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following di sclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materi als provided wi th the distribution. - Neit her the name of the Xiph.org Foundatio n nor the names of its cont ributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BU T NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN N O EVENT SHA LL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL , SPECIAL, EXEMPLA RY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING , BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SE RVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, O R PR OFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRI CT LI ABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THI S SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The GIFLIB distributi on is Copy right (c) 1997 Eric S. Raym ond THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EX P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICUL A R PURPOSE AND NO NINFRINGEMEN T. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FO R ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TO RT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWAR E. Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Le ffler PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 108 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
109 En Appendix 14 English Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS-ISâ AND WITHOUT WAR R ANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRES S, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMI TATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERC HANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOS E. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SI LICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIR ECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULT ING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING O UT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Copyright (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler âÂÂCopyright (c) 1998-2003 The OpenSSL P roject. All rights reserved. â This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Proj ect for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)â Linux Source Notice The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system. The machine readable copy of the correspondin g source code is available for the cost of di stribution. To obtain a copy, please visit http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information. GNU General Public License Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 F ree Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license do cument, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble T h e l i c e n s e s f o r m o s t s o f t w a r e a r e d e s i g n e d t o t a k e a w a y y o u r freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Publ ic License is intended to guarante e your freedom to share and change free software-t o make sure the software is free for a ll its u sers. This General Public License appl ies to most of the Free Software FoundationâÂÂs software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is cove red by the GNU Library Gene ral Public License instead. ) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are refe rring to freedom, not price. Our General Pu blic Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copi es of free softwa re (and charge f or this service if you wish), that you receive sou rce code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the righ ts th at you have. You must make sure th at they, too, receive or can get the source cod e . And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permiss ion to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each authorâÂÂs protection and ours, we want to make ce rtain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for th is free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its re cipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authorsâ reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened consta ntly by software patents. We wish to av oid the danger th at redistributors of a fr ee program will indi vidually obtain patent licenses, in effect maki ng the program proprietary. To pre vent this, we have made it cl ea r that any patent must be licensed for ever yoneâÂÂs free use or no t l icensed at al l. The precise terms and conditio ns for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODI FICATION 0. This License applies to any program or ot her work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public Lic ense. The âÂÂProgram âÂÂ, below, re fers to any such program or work, and a âÂÂwork based on the Programâ means either the Program or any de rivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translat ion is included withou t limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) Each l icensee is address ed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. Activities other than copying, di stribution and modificati on are not covered by this License; th ey are outside its scope. The a ct of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from th e Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of havi ng been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 109 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
110 En Appendix 14 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim co pies of the ProgramâÂÂs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of w arranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a c opy of this License alon g with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee . 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modif ied files to carry prominent notices stating that you ch anged the files and the date of any chang e. b) You must cause any work that you distribut e or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally re ads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordina ry way, to print or display an announc ement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions , and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is int e ractive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themse lves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you di stribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the sa me sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Pr ogram, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees ex tend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of th is sectio n to claim rights or co ntest your rights to work writte n entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distributi on of derivative or coll ective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with th e Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or di stribution medium does not bring the ot he r work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distri bute the Program (or a work based on it, under Sectio n 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 ab ove provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machi ne-read able source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium cust omarily used fo r softwa re interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any thir d party, for a charge no more than your c ost of physically performing source distribution, a complete mach ine-readable copy of the co rresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offe r to distribute corresponding source co de. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b abov e.) The source code for a work means the prefe rred form of the work for making modifi cations to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any as sociated interf ace definition file s, plu s the scripts used to control compilation an d installation of the execut able. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on whic h the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object co de is made by offering ac cess to copy from a designated place, then offering equivale nt access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third part ies are not compelled to copy the sourc e along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Prog ram except as expressly provided und er this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublic ense or distribute the P rogram is void, and wi l l automatically terminate your rights under thi s License. However, parties who have receiv ed copies, or rights, from you under this Lice nse will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this Lice nse, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mo dify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohi b ited by law if you do not accept this License. There fore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any wor k based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, dis t ributing or modifying the Pr ogram or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automaticall y receives a license fr om the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these te rms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipientsâ ex ercise of the rights granted her ein. You ar e not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 110 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
111 En Appendix 14 English 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whe ther by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously y our obligations under this License an d any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Pr ogram at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalt y-free redistribution of the Pr ogram by all tho se who receiv e c opies directly or indirectly through you, then th e only way you could satisfy both it and th is License would be to refrain entirely f rom distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held in valid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to in duce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribu tion system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contri butions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the P r ogram is restricted in certai n countries either by patent s or by copyrighted interfa ces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an expl icit geographical dist ribution limitat ion excluding those countries, so that distributi on is permitted only in or among countri es not thus excluded. In such ca se, this License incorporates th e limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new ve rsions of the General Public Li cense from time to time. Such new versions will be si milar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing ve rsion number. If the Program specifies a ve rsion number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, yo u have the option of following the terms and cond itions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Found ation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For softwa re which is copyrighted by the Free Softwa re Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our deci sion will be guided by the two goals of preserving th e free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoti ng the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCE PT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WR ITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIE D, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI E S OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PE RFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIV E, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESS ARY SERVICING, REPA IR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE TH E PROGRAM AS PERMI TTED ABOV E, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA GES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BE EN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDI TIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the pub lic, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to th e program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most eff ectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where the full notic e is found. <one line to give the programâÂÂs na me a nd an idea of w hat it does.> Copyright (C) yyyy name of author This program is free software; you can re distribute it and/or modify it under th e terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundatio n; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope th at it wi ll be useful, but WIT HOUT ANY WA RRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR P URPOSE. See the GNU General Publ ic License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Lice nse along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Pl ace - Suite 330, Boston, MA 0211 1-1307, USA. Also add information on how to contac t you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short no tice like this when i t starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 111 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
112 En Appendix 14 Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WA RRANTY; for details type âÂÂs how wâÂÂ. This is free software, a nd you are welco me to redistribute it under cert ain co nditions; type âÂÂshow câ for details. The hypothetical commands âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than âÂÂsho w wâ and âÂÂshow câÂÂ; they could ev en be mouse-clic ks or menu items-whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you wo rk as a programmer) or your s chool, if any, to sig n a âÂÂcopyright disclaimerâ f or th e program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program âÂÂGnomovisi onâ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subrouti ne library, you may consider it m ore useful to permit linking propri etary applications with the libra ry. If t his is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distri bute verbatim copies of this license do cument, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released vers ion of the Lesser GPL. It al so counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, vers ion 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and ch ange it. By contrast, the GNU General Publ ic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and chan ge free software-to make sure th e software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Publ ic License, applies to some specially desi gnated software pack ages-typically librar ie s- of the Free Software Foundation and other auth ors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think care ful ly about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is th e better strategy to use in any particular case, based o n the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receiv e source code or can get it if you want it; that yo u can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make re strictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrend er the se rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if yo u distribute copies of the library or if you modi fy it. For example, if you distribute co pies of the library, whether gratis or for a f ee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, t oo, receive or can get the source code. If yo u link other code with the library, you m ust provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they ca n relink them with the library after making changes to the libr ary a nd recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-s tep method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and /or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to ma ke it very clear that there is no warranty for the free li brary. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original authorâÂÂs reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free progr am. We wish to make sure that a company cann ot effectively restrict the us ers of a free program by obtaining a re strictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent lice nse obtained for a version of the library mu st be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some librari es, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public Lice nse. This license, the GNU Lesse r General Public License, ap plies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public Licens e. We use this license for certain libraries in order to pe rmit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is li nked with a library, whe ther statically or using a share d library, the combina tion of the two is leg ally sp eaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordi nary General Public License ther efore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License perm its more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the âÂÂLesserâ General Public License because it does Less to protect the userâÂÂs freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It al so provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain li brary, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To ac hieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 112 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
113 En Appendix 14 English A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only , so we use t he Lesser Ge neral Public License. In other cases, permission to use a partic ular library in non-free progr ams enables a greater number of people to use a large b ody of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free progr ams enables many m ore people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as it s variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser Genera l Publ ic License is Le ss protective of the usersâ freedom, it does ensure t hat the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modi fied version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pa y close attention to the diffe rence betwe en a âÂÂwork based on the libraryâ and a âÂÂwork that uses the libraryâÂÂ. The former contai ns code derived from the library, whereas th e latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU Lesser G eneral Public Lice nse TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODI FICATION 0. This License Agreement applie s to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright hold er or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public Licens e (also called âÂÂthis LicenseâÂÂ). Each licensee is addressed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. A âÂÂlibraryâ means a co llection of software functions and/or data prepare d so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to fo rm executables. The âÂÂLibraryâÂÂ, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been di stributed under the se terms. A âÂÂwork based on the Libraryâ means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Libr ary or a portion of it, either verbatim or wi th modifications and/or translated straight forwardly into anothe r language. (Hereinaft er, translation is included without limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) âÂÂSource codeâ for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modification s to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all module s it conta ins, plus any associated interf ace definition files, plus the scripts us ed to control compilation and installation of the library . Activities other than copying, di stribution and modificati on are not covered by this License; th ey are outside its scope. The a ct of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (ind ependent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim co pies of the LibraryâÂÂs complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately pub lish on each copy an appropriate copy right notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any w arranty; and distribute a copy of t his Licens e along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical ac t of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or co pies of the Library or any portion of it, thus fo rming a work based on the Library, and copy a nd distribute such modifications or work und er the terms of Sect ion 1 above, provided th at you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modi fied to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the dat e of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library re fers to a function or a tabl e of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument pa ssed when the facility is invoked, then yo u must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does no t supply such function or table, the faci lity still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely we ll-defined inde pendent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requ ires that any application-s upplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not suppl y it, the square root funct ion must stil l compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modi fied work as a who le. If identi fiable sectio ns of that work are not derive d from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independen t and separate works in themselv es, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as sepa rate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the dist ribution of the whole must be o n th e te r m s o f t hi s L i c e nse, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest yo ur rights to work written en tirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of de ri vative or coll ective works based on the Libr ary. In addition, mere aggregation of another wo rk not based on the Library with the Libr ary (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does no t bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the or dinary GNU General Publ ic Lice nse instead of this Lice nse to a given copy of the Lib rary. To do this, you must alter all the notices th at refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public Li cense, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that vers ion instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this chang e is made in a given copy, it is irreversib le for that copy, so the ordinary GN U General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and deri vative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 113 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
114 En Appendix 14 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or deri vative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable for m under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provide d that you accompany it with the comp le te corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distribute d under th e terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of ob ject code is made by offering access to copy from a designa t ed place, then off ering equivalent acce ss to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirem ent to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the so urce along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work wi th the Library by being compi led o r l i n k ed w i t h i t, i s c a ll e d a â w or k t h a t us e s t h e Li b r a ry â . S u ch a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library , and therefore falls outside the scope of this Li cense. However, linking a âÂÂwork that uses the Libraryâ with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contai ns portions of the Library), rather than a âÂÂwork that uses the libraryâÂÂ. The executable is the refore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a âÂÂwork that uses the Libraryâ uses ma terial from a header file th at is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even th ough the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the w ork can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defin ed by law. I f s u c h a n o b j e c t f i l e u s e s o n l y n u m e r i c al paramet ers, data structure layouts and a ccessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestri cted, regardless of whet her it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this ob ject code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Sec tion 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the o bject code for the work under the terms of Secti on 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or no t they are linked directly with the Lib rary its elf. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or li nk a âÂÂwork that uses the Libraryâ wi th the Library to produ ce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under te rms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customerâÂÂs own use and reverse engineering for debuggi ng such modifications. You must give prominent notice wi th each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must d o one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding mach ine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Secti ons 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable âÂÂwork that uses the LibraryâÂÂ, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then reli nk to produce a modified exec utable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions fi les in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the appl ication to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with th e Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the userâÂÂs computer system, rath er than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified versio n of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is inte rface-compatible with t he version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer , valid for at least three years, to g ive the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, fo r a charge no more th an the cost of performing this distribution. d) If di str ib ut ion of the wo rk is m ad e b y of fe rin g a cc ess to copy from a designated place, off er equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already re ceived a copy of these materials or that you have al ready sent this user a copy. For an executable, the requi red form of the âÂÂwork that uses th e Libraryâ must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special except ion, the materials to be distri buted need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either so urce or binary form) with the major componen ts (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contra dicts the lice nse restrictio ns of other proprietary libr aries that do not normally accompany the opera ting system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facil ities that are a w ork based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other l ibrary facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other l ibrary facilities is othe rwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, unc ombined with any other library facilities. Thi s must be distributed under the terms of the Sections a bove. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, li nk with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, l ink with, or distri bute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate y our rights under this License. However, partie s who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have thei r licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full complianc e. 9. You are not required to accept this Lice nse, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mo dify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. There fore, by modifying or distributing the Library (o r any work based on the Library), you indi cate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all i ts terms and co nditions for copying, distri buting or modifying the Library or works based on it. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 114 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
115 En Appendix 14 English 10. Each time you redistribute th e Library (or any work based on the Library), th e recipient automatically receives a license fr om the original lice nsor to copy, distri bute, link with or mo dify the Library subject t o these te rms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the re cipientsâ e xercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whe ther by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously y our obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-fr ee redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies di rec tly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisf y both it and th is License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held in valid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to in duce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which i s implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contri butions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the dist ribution and/or use of the Libr ary is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfa ces, the original copyright holder who pl aces the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limita tion excluding those countries, so that distributi on is permitted only in or among countri es not thus excluded. In such ca se, this License incorporates th e limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation ma y publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Pu blic License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spir it to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concern s. Each version is given a di stinguishing version number. If the Library specif ies a version number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, yo u have the option of following the terms and cond itions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Li brary does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorpora te parts of the Library into othe r free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the aut hor to ask for pe rmission. For software which is copyrighte d by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundat ion; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our de cision will be guided b y the two goals of preserving the free status of all de rivatives of our free s oftware and of promo tin g the sharing and reuse of software generally . NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, TH ERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRA RY, TO THE EXTE NT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCE PT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WR ITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY â AS ISâ WITHOUT WA RRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI E S OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PE RF ORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFE CTIVE, YOU ASSUME TH E COST OF ALL NECES SARY SERVICIN G, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MO DIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LI BRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA GES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NO T LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE O R LOSSES SUST AINED BY YOU O R THIRD PARTIE S OR A FAILUR E OF THE LIBR ARY TO OPERAT E WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PA RTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDI TIONS PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 115 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
116 En Appendix 14 How to Ap ply The se Term s to Your New Lib raries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free sof tware that everyone can redistribute and change . You can do so by permitting redistribution under th ese terms (or, alternatively, und er the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the e xclusion of warranty; and each file should have at leas t the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where th e full notice is found. <one line to give the libraryâÂÂs name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) year name of author This library is free software; you can redist ribute it and/or modify it under the te rms of the GNU Lesser General Public Licens e as published by the Free Software Foundatio n; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be usef ul, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; with out even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser Gene ral Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with th is library; if not, write to the Free Sof tware Foundation, Inc., 59 T emple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Also add information on how to contac t you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you wo rk as a programmer) or your s chool, if any, to sig n a âÂÂcopyright disclaimerâ f or th e library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the li brary âÂÂFrobâ (a library for twea king knobs) written by James R andom Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice ThatâÂÂs all there is to it! PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 116 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
117 En Appendix 14 English Specifications * This conforms to HDMI1.1 and HDCP1.1. HDMI (High Definition Multi media Interface) is a dig ital interf ace that sends both video and audio signals through a single cable. HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protec tion) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital content that use Digital Visual Interface (DVI). ** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0 specifications. ⢠Design and specifications are su bject to change without notice. Item 60" Plasma Display Model: PRO-1540HD 50" Plasma Display Model: PRO-1140HD 42" Plasma Display Model: PRO-940HD Number of pixels 1365 à768 pixels 1365 à768 pixels 1024 à76 8 pixels Aud io A mpl ifi er 13 W 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 â¦) 13 W 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 ⦠) 13 W 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 ⦠) Speakers â â W oofer: 4.8 cm à13 cm cone t ype T weeter: 2.5 cm semidome type Surround Syste m SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass P ower R equire ment 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 46 0 W (30 W Standby) 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 355 W (26 W Standby) 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 3 12 W (26 W Standby) W eight Main unit: 51.5 kg (113.6 lbs.) Main unit: 34.3 kg (75.7 lbs.) Main unit: 29.2 kg (64.4 lbs.) Stand: 2.5 kg ( 5.5 lbs.) (including bolts) T otal: 31.7 kg (69.9 lbs.) Recept ion System (Digit al) A TSC D igital TV syste m Circuit type 8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation T uner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch . 14 to 69 CA TV Ch. 2 to 13 5 Audio format Dolby Digit al Reception System (Analog) Americ an TV standard NTSC syste m Circuit type Video signal dete ction PLL full syn chronous detecti on, PLL digital Synthesizer system T uner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch . 14 to 69 CA TV ANT/CAB LE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125 Audio multiplex BTSC system T erminals Rear ANT/CABLE A IN 75 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for DTV /VHF/UHF/CATV in ANT B IN 75 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out INPUT 1 S - VIDEO in, VIDEO in , A UDIO in INPUT 2 C OMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in , VIDEO in, A UDIO in INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO i n, AUDIO in PC Analog RGB in, AUDIO in INPUT 5 H DMI in*, AUDIO in INPUT 6 H DMI in*, AUDIO in MONITOR OUT VID EO out, AUDIO out Digital Audio Output Optical G-L IN K 1 ETHERNET 1 CONTROL IN 1 CONTROL OUT 1 SPEAKER 8 ⦠to 16 ⦠8 ⦠to 16 ⦠â SUB WOOFER OUTPUT V ariable CableCARD Point o f Deployment Side INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO i n, VIDEO in, A UDIO in USB USB in** On-screen display languages English/F renc h/Spanish PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 117 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
118 En Appendix 14 Dimensions PRO-1540HD Unit: mm (inch) PRO-1140HD Unit: mm (inch) PRO-940HD Unit: mm (inch) 1470 (57-7/8 ) 880 (34-21/32) 118 (4-21/32) 1224 (48-3/ 16) 717 (28-1/4) 115 (4-1/2) 559 (22) 679 (26-3/4) 115 (4-1/2) 273 (10-3/4) 719 (28-5/16) 1040 (40-15/16) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 118 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
119 En Appendix 14 English Trademarks ⢠In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are regi stered tr ademarks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/ or one of its a ffiliates. In C ana da, TV GUIDE is a registered m ark of Transconti nental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemst ar- TV Guide International, Inc. ⢠FOCUS, WOW, SRS a nd h î symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS and WOW technologies are incorpora ted under license fr om SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and t he double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ⢠HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-D efinition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trad emarks of HDMI L icensing LLC . ⢠This product includes FontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAv enue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. ⢠DDC is a registered trademark of Vi deo Electronics Standards Asso ciation. ⢠CableCARD i s a trademark o f Cable Tele vision Lab oratories, Inc. ⢠This software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group. ⢠The names of the compa nies or institution s are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions . ⢠The PlaysForSure logo , Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Microsoft Corpora tion in the United States and/or other countries. ⢠DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED⢠are trad emarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Ne twork Alliance. License ⢠The TV Guide On Screen system is manuf actured under license from Gemstar-TV Gu ide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. ⢠Content owners use Windows Me dia digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WM DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to re voke the softwareâÂÂs ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not a ffect unprotected content. When you downlo ad licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may inc lude a revocati on list with the licenses. Content owne rs may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content th at requires the upgrade. ⢠This product is protected by certain intell ectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distributio n of such technology outside of this product is prohibited with out a license from Microsoft. ⢠The DLNA logo is permitted to the pro duct that has obtained a DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) certificat e. Patent ⢠The TV Guide On Screen system is prot ected by one or more of the following United State s patents 4,908,713 ; 6,498,895; 6,850,693; 6,396,546 ; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 to Gemstar- TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries. Disclaimer Notice ⢠Gemstar-TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates a re not in any way li able fo r the accuracy or availability o f the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarante e service availability in your area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide In ternational, Inc. and/or its re lated affili at es be liable for any damages in connect ion with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other da ta in the T V Guide On Screen system. Copyright protection ⢠This product incorporates copyright protectio n technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other inte llectual property ri ghts. Use of this copyright protection te chnology must be authorized by Macrovision Co rporat ion, and is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only unl ess otherwis e authorized by Macrovision. Reve rse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Important Notice about so ftware upgrade from Pioneer Attention Pioneer PDP Owners: Thank you for purchasing a Pioneer Digital Cable Ready (DCR) comp atible Plasma TV. You have purchased the most advanced product of its kind available today. However, as technology advances, DCR systems may continue to evolve. To maintain compatibil ity with DCR systems and f eatures, your Plasma TV may benefit from, or require software upgrades. As part of our commitment to our customer s, Pioneer will send you upgrade software and instructions as needed to keep your DCR compatible Plasma TV up to date with this technology . Please take the time to register your DCR compatib le Plasma TV at www.pioneerelectronics.com This registration enables us to keep yo u up to date on changes t hat may occur. Thank you very much. Note: DCR function works only in the USA. DCR is unavailable in Ca nada. Software update for th e Home Media Gallery You can also update the software for the Home Media Galler y at the Pioneer website above. For det ails, see page 89. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2006 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 119 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
Printed in China <ARB1573-A> Published by Pione er Corporation. Copyrigh t é 2006 Pioneer Co rporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 120 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
Read these instructions. K eep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not bloc k any v entilation openings . Install in accordance with the manuf acturerâ s instr uctions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers , stov es , or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not def eat the saf ety pur pose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A g rounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide b lade or the third prong are provided f or y our saf ety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician f or replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being w alk ed on or pinched par ticularly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where the y e xit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manuf acturer . Use only with the car t, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified b y the manuf acturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . Unplug this apparatus during lightning stor ms or when unused f or long periods of time. Ref er all ser vicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any w a y , such as po wer-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e f allen into the apparatus , the apparatus has been e xposed to rain or moisture, does not oper ate normally , or has been dropped. 11) 12) 13) 14) WARNING: This produc t equipped with a three- wire grounding (earthed) plug - a plug that has a thi rd (grounding) pi n. This pl ug only fits a g rounding-type power outlet. If you are unable to insert the plug into an outlet, cont act a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly gro und ed o ne. D o not def eat th e safety purpose of the grounding plug D3-4-2-1-6_A_En WARNING: To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame source s (such as a lighted ca ndle) on the equipment. D3-4-2 -1-7a _A_En NOTE TO CA TV SYSTEM INST ALLER THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CA TV SYSTEM INST ALLERâÂÂS A T TENTION TO ARTICLE 820-40 OF THE NEC THA T PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR PROPER GROUNDING AND, IN P ARTICULAR, SPECIFIES THA T THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF THE BUILDING, AS CL OSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE ENTRY AS PRACTICAL. D1-4-2-8_En This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digi tal premium cab le television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such pr ogramming. A security card provided by your cable operator is required to view encrypted digital programming. C ertain advanced and interactive digital cable s ervices such as video-on- demand, a cable ope ratorâÂÂs enhanc ed program guide and data-enha nced televis ion services may require the use of a se t-top box. Fo r more inform ation call your local cable operator. VENTILATION CAUTION: When installing this unit, m a k e s u r e t o l e a v e s p a c e around the unit f or ventilation t o improve heat radiation. For the minimum space re quired, see page 20. WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided fo r ventilati on to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect i t from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or c overed with items (suc h as newspapers , table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick c arpet or a bed. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 2 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
English WARNING: THE APPARATUS IS NOT WATERPROOFS, TO PREV ENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE AND D O NOT PUT AN Y WATER SOURCE NEAR THIS APPARATUS, SU CH AS VASE, FLOWER POT, COSMET ICS CONTAINER AN D MEDICINE BOTTLE ETC. WARNING: Handling the co rd on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause canc er and birth defe cts or other repro ductive harm. Wash hands after handling . Information to User Alteration or modificati ons carried out without appropriate authoriz ation may invalidate the userâÂÂs right to operate the equipme nt. [For Canadian mode l] This Class B digital apparatus complies wi th Canadian ICES-003. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference th at may ca use undesired operation. Product Name: Plasma Display System Model Number: PRO-1540HD/PRO-1140HD/P RO-940HD Product Category: Cl ass B Personal Comput ers & Peripherals Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC. Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Phone: 800-421-1625 For Business Customer URL http://www.PioneerUSA .com STANDBY: When placed into the standby mode, the main power flow is cut and the unit is no longer fully operational. STANDBY/ON Indicator: The indicator is lit red when the unit is in th e standby mode and lit bl ue when it is in the power-on mode. No operation can be performe d when the indica tor is off. However, th e Plasma Display System will still consume s o m e p o w e r a s l o n g as the power cord is inserted into th e power outlet. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE â THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS L OCA TED IN THE REAR . PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCL OSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY . D1-4-2-6-1_En CAUTION: The power switch does not completely separate the unit from the mains in off position. Therefore install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the mains plug in case of the accident. The mains plug of unit should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time. CAUTION: Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 0 ÃÂC to 40 ÃÂC ( 32 ÃÂF to 104 ÃÂF), less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 3 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
4 En Contents Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instruc tions so you will know how to operate yo ur model properly. Afte r you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shap e of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanatory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. Illustrations shown in this manual are fo r the PRO-1140HD unless otherwise specified. 01 Important User Guidance Information 02 Safety Precautions 03 Supplie d Accessor ies 04 Part Names Plasma Display ........................................... 13 Remote control unit ................................... 19 05 Preparation Installing the Plasma Display ................... 20 Moving the Plasma Display ....................... 20 Preventing the Plasma Display from Falling Over ................................................. 21 Attaching/detaching the PIONEER stand (for PRO-940HD only) ................................ 22 Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels ............. 23 Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable ....................................................... 23 Inserting the CableCARD⢠....................... 23 Switching between antenna A and B ....... 23 Preparing the remote control unit ............ 24 Inserting batteries ................................. 24 Cautions regarding batteries ................ 24 Allowed operation range of the remote control unit ............................................. 24 Cautions regarding the remote control unit .......................................................... 24 Connecting the po wer cord ....................... 25 Routing cables ........................................... 25 06 Basic Operations Turning on the power ................................. 26 Turning off the power ................................. 26 Watching TV channels ............................... 27 Selecting the antenna ........................... 27 Changing channels ............................... 27 Changing the volume and sound ......... 28 Changing the language ........................ 28 Setting MTS/SAP mode ........................ 29 Viewing a channel banner .................... 30 Using the POD service ......................... 30 Using the multiscreen functions ............. 30 Splitting the screen .............................. 30 Freezing images .................................... 31 07 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup About the TV Guide On Screen⢠system ........................................................ 32 Setting up the TV Guide On Screen⢠system ........................................................ 32 08 Menu Setup Menu Configuration .................................. 36 AV mode menus ................................... 36 PC mode menus ................................... 36 Menu operations ................................... 36 09 Tuner Setup Setting up TV channels ............................. 37 Using Auto Channel Preset ................. 37 Setting for skip ping unwanted channels ................................................ 37 Setting up TV channels manually ....... 37 Checking signal strength ..................... 37 Checking the CableCARD ID ............... 38 Parental Control ........................................ 38 Changing the password ....................... 38 Clearing the password ......................... 39 Activating the Parental Control ........... 39 Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MPAA) ..................................... 39 Setting the TV ratings ........................... 39 Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) ...................................... 40 Blocking Not Rated TV programs ........ 40 Canadian rating systems ..................... 40 Setting Canadian En glish ratings ....... 41 Setting Canadian French ratings ........ 41 Setting new ratings .............................. 41 Deleting new ratings ............................ 42 Temporarily deactivating the Parental Control ................................................... 42 Setting your favorite channels ................. 43 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 4 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
5 En Contents English Setting up closed captions ....................... 43 Activating the closed caption .............. 43 Selecting the type of conventional closed captions ..................................... 43 Selecting digital closed captions ........ 44 Selecting digital closed caption parameters ............................................ 44 Clock Setting ............................................. 44 10 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation Using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system ........................................................ 46 Screen components .................................. 46 TV Guide On Screen⢠icons ................ 46 TV Guide On Screen⢠navigation ....... 47 The Listings screen ................................... 47 Recording programs ................................. 48 Setting program reminders ...................... 49 Searching for programs ........................... 51 Searching by category .......................... 51 Searching by keyword .......................... 52 Alphabetical search ............................. 53 The search Episode Options menu ..... 53 Scheduling recordings and reminders ... 54 The Schedule Options menu ............... 54 Changing setup options ........................... 55 Changing the System Settings ............ 55 Changing the Channel Display settings .................................................. 55 Changing the Default Options ............. 56 11 Adjustments and Settings Sleep Timer ................................................ 57 AV Selection .............................................. 57 Basic picture adjustments ....................... 58 Advanced picture adjustments ................ 59 Using PureCinema ............................... 59 Using Color Temp ................................. 59 Using CTI ............................................... 60 Using Color Man agement .................... 60 Using Color Space ................................ 60 Using Intelligent Color ......................... 60 Eliminating noise from images ........... 61 Using the Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) functions .................................... 61 Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode ............. 62 Sound adjustments ................................... 62 FOCUS ................................................... 63 Front Surround ..................................... 63 Power Control ............................................ 63 Energy Save ........................................... 63 No Signal off (AV mode only) ............... 63 No Operation off (AV mode only) ......... 64 Power Management (PC mode only) ...................................... 64 Image position adjustment (AV mode only) .......................................... 64 Automatic image position and clock (Hertz) adjustments (PC mode only) ....... 64 Manual image posi tion and cloc k adjustments (PC mode only) .................... 65 Selecting a screen size manually ............. 65 Selecting a screen size automatically ..... 66 Selecting a screen size for 4:3 aspect ratio signals ........................................... 66 Changing the brightness on both sides of the screen (Side Mask) ............................. 67 Language setting ....................................... 67 12 Using External Equipment About External Equipment ....................... 68 Watching a DVD image ............................ 68 Connecting a DVD player ..................... 68 Displaying a DVD image ...................... 68 Watching a VCR image ............................. 68 Connecting a VCR ................................. 68 Displaying a VCR image ....................... 68 Using HDMI Input ..................................... 69 Connecting HDMI equipment ............. 69 Using a game console or watching camcorder images .................................... 70 Connecting a game console or camcorder ............................................. 70 Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder .......................... 70 Recording digital TV programs using a VCR .......................................................... 70 Avoiding unwanted feedback .............. 70 Connecting a recorder ......................... 71 Connecting other au dio equipment ......... 71 Connecting an AV receiver .................. 71 Watching an image from a computer ..... 72 Connecting a person al computer ........ 72 Displaying an image from a PC ........... 72 Computer compatibility chart .................. 73 G-LINK⢠connection ................................. 73 Connecting control cables ....................... 74 About SR ............................................ 74 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 5 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
6 En Contents Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ............ 75 Making network connections ............... 76 Connecting a USB device ..................... 76 Starting the Home Media Gallery function .................................................. 77 Enjoying movie files .............................. 79 Enjoying music files .............................. 82 Enjoying photo files ............................... 83 Other useful fu nctions .......................... 86 Glossary .................................................. 91 13 Useful Remote Control Features Learning function of the remote control unit ................................................. 92 Using the learning function ................. 92 Presetting manufacturer codes to control other devices ................................. 92 Presetting manufac turer codes ........... 92 Library Search ........................................ 92 Delete Learning ..................................... 92 Manufacturing Reset ............................ 93 Programming codes ............................ 94 CABLE .................................................... 94 SATELLITE .............................................. 94 VCR ......................................................... 95 PVR ......................................................... 97 DVD ......................................................... 97 DVD-R ..................................................... 98 LD ............................................................ 98 Using the remote cont rol unit to control other devices .............................................. 99 Receiver control buttons ....................... 99 CBL/SAT control buttons .................... 100 VCR control buttons ............................ 101 DVD/DVR control buttons ................... 102 14 Append ix Troubleshooting ....................................... 103 Specifications ........................................... 117 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 6 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
7 En Important User Guidance Information 01 English Important User Guidance Information In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pioneer PureVision PRO-1540HD/PRO - 1140HD/PRO-940HD Plasma Display Panel, please first read this information carefully. With the Pioneer PureVision PRO-154 0HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD, you can be assured of a high qual ity Plasma Display Panel with long-life and high re liability. To achieve images of exceptional quality , this Pioneer Plasma Display P anel incorporates state-of-the-art desi gn and construction as well as precise and highly advanced technology. The Pioneer PureVision PRO-1 540HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD incorporates the latest in co lor filter technology â Direct Color Filter. This filter techno logy improves color reproduction over previous models. It al so eliminates the need for a glass panel to be layered in front of the plasma panel. This feature which furthers PioneerâÂÂs goal of reducing environmental waste in consumer electronics, d uring the manufac turing process and in the future during the recycling process. Over the course of its life time, the luminosity of the Pione er PRO-1540HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO -940HD Plasma Display System will diminish very slowly, which happens to all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). To enjoy b eautiful and bright imag es on your Pioneer Plasma Display Panel for many years to come, pl ease carefully read and follow th e usage guidelines below. Usage guidelines All phosphor-based screens (inclu ding conventional tube-type televisions) c an be affected by static im ages appearing f or a prolonged period. Plasma displa ys are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effe cts on the screen can be avoided by taking so me basic precautions. ⢠Whenever possible, av oid showing the same i mage or low- motion pictures (e.g. closed-capt ioned images or video game images which have static portions). ⢠Avoid viewing the On Screen Display (OSD) for extended periods (from a DVD player, VCR, and al l other components ). ⢠Do not leave the same picture , freeze-framed or paused continuously, shown over a long period of time when using the still picture mode from a TV, VCR, DVD playe r or any other component. ⢠Images which have both very bright areas and very dark areas side by side should no t be displayed for a prolonged period of time. ⢠When playing a video game, the âÂÂGAMEâ mode setting within âÂÂAV Selectionâ is strongly re commended. However, please do not use this mode fo r long periods of time. ⢠After playing a game, displayi ng a PC image, or any stil l image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂFULLâ screen setting for over 3 times longe r than the previous still/moving image was shown. ⢠After using the Plasma D isplay System, always switch the display to Standby. ⢠Extensive viewing of content with top, bottom, or side masks may cause uneven wear. After vi ewing masked content, view full screen motion video for an equal or greater amoun t of time. Installation guidelines The Pioneer PureVision PRO-1 540HD/PRO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD Plasma Display Panel incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety, please take the proper measures when mounting or installing the Plasma Display. Prevent the unit from tipping over during vibr ation or accidental movement. This product should be installed by using only parts and accessor ies designed by PIONEER. Us e of instal lation or mounting accessories other th an PIONEER-approved stands or brackets may result in instab ility and could cause injury. For custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. To ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER is not responsible for accident or dama ge caused by the use of parts and/or accessories manufa ct ured by other unauthorized companies. To avoid malfu nction and overheat ing when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. To ensure proper venting: ⢠Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. For the minimum space required around the unit, see page 20. ⢠Do not place the unit inside a narrow place where ventilation is poor. ⢠Do not cover with a cloth, etc. ⢠Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up. Use a vacuum clea ner set to its lowest suction setting to clear dust. ⢠Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket. ⢠Do not leave the product tilted at an angle without proper anchoring. ⢠Do not invert the product. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction. When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain de gree, the display automatically powers OFF in order to cool the internal electronics. Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper as sembly/installatio n/mounting, improper operation of or modifica tions made to this pr oduct, etc. PIONEER is not responsible for accidents or malf unction caused by the above situati ons. NOTE The following points are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display an d as such, are not covered by the manufacturerâÂÂs limited warrantie s: ⢠Permanent residual images upon the panelâÂÂs phosphors. ⢠Existence of a small number of inactive light cells. ⢠Panel generated sounds (Fan moto r noise, electrical circuit humming, glass panel buzzing, etc.) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 7 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
8 En Important User Guidance Information 01 CAUTION PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damage arising from incorrect use of the product ma lfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable. Plasma Display protection function When still images (such as pho tos and computer imag es) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen slightly dims. This f unction automatically a djusts the brightness to protect the screen when a still image is detected. The screen is dimmed for a pproximately three minutes. Information of pixel defect Plasma screens dis play information using pix els. Pioneer plasma display panels contain a very large number of pixels. (A 42" panel has over 2. 3 million pixels, a 50 " panel has over 3.1 million pixels and a 60" panel over 3.1 million pixels ). All Pioneer plasma panels are ma nufactured using a very high level of ultra-precision techno logy and undergo individual quality control. In rare cases, one or more pixels may remain switched Off or On. A pixel that remains Off appears as a tiny black dot on the screen while an active pixel appears as a dot o f a particul ar color. This effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a consequence of the technology. If the defective pixels are visible at a normal viewing distance of between 2.5 and 3.5 meters (8.2 and 11.5 feet) while viewing a normal broadcast (i.e. not a test card, still image, or sing le color display) please contact Pioneer Customer Support Div. (USA) or Customer Satisfaction Dept. (CANADA). See back cover for contact information. If, however, the fixed pixel(s) ca n only be seen from a dist ance of less than 8 feet or during single color displays then the appearance is considered normal for plasma technology. Infrared rays The Plasma Display rele ases infrared rays because of the panel characteristics. Surrounding eq uipment with remote controls and wireless headphones us ing infrared signals can experience interference. Move any affected equipment to a location away from the plasma panel. Radio interference While this product meets required specifications, the panel emits a small amount of ele ctronic noise. This noise can affect radio, computer, and VCR reception. Move devices away from the panel to reduce or elim inate interference. Plasma Display driv ing sound The screen of the Plasma Di spla y is composed of extremely fine pixels and these pixels em it light according to received video signals. This principle ma y cause you to hear a buzz or electrical hum coming from the Plasma Display. Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the product. ⢠Labels and tape can mar or discolor the cabinet. When n ot using the prod uct for a long time ⢠If you do not use the product for a long time, the functions of the product may be adversely affected. Switch ON and run the product occasion ally to maintain qualit y. Condensation ⢠Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the panel when the unit is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or when a heater is turned On in the room. When condensation occurs, do not switch On the panel until condensation disappears. Operating the panel when there is condensation can damage the unit. Cleaning the surface of the scree n and the glossy surface of the fron t cabinet ⢠When cleaning the surface of the screen or the glossy surface of the front cabinet, gently wipe with the supplied cleaning cloth or a si milar cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.). Using a dirty or course mate rial cloth can scratch and damage the panelâÂÂs surfaces. ⢠If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets may enter into the product, resulting in a malfunction. Cleaning the cabinet ⢠When cleaning other panel s urfaces, gently wipe with a clean soft cloth (e.g., cotton, fl annel, etc.). Using a dirty or course material cloth can scra tch and damage the panelâÂÂs surfaces. ⢠The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benz ene or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals can strip the surface coating or cause cabinet deterioration. ⢠Do not expose the product to a volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not apply rubber or vinyl products to the cabinet for long periods of time . The effect of plasticizer on the cabinet can strip the surface coating or cause deterioration. ⢠If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets may enter into the product, resulting in a malfunction. Handles at the rear o f the Pla sma Displa y ⢠Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma Display. ⢠When moving the Plasma Displa y, ask another person for help and use the handles attach ed to the rear of the Plasma Display. Do no t move the Plasma Di splay by hold ing only a single handle. Use the hand les as shown on page 20. ⢠Do not use the handles to hang, suspend, or anchor the panel. Fan motor noise The rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases when the ambient temperature of the Plasma Display becomes high. You may hear the sound of the fan motor at that time. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 8 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
9 En Important User Guidance Information 01 English About the menu window size following video format switch The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD). This Plasma Display is designed to scale to either HD or SD signals. If the video programâÂÂs definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on the screen (fo r example: HD â SD or SD â HD), the menu size may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is com plete. For example, switching between a TV program and an external digital video recorder (D-VHS) while viewing a menu can cause the menu window size to fluctuate. If this happens, the menu will ret urn to its normal size after two to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate a problem with your Pl asma Display Panel. Image Retention When a static image is shown on a display for several hours, a faint imprint of the image, kn own as image retention, can remain. This imag e retention may be te mporary or permane nt. Although caused by different things, image retention can occur on all display technologi es, including plasma and LCD. On todayâÂÂs plasma disp lays, pe rmanent image retention is less of a worry. Most image retentio n can be improved simply by watching a motion video sequence. Image retention, also known as burn-in, can occur in all phosphor-based display systems (including CRT television systemsâÂÂboth direct view and projectionâÂÂas well as plasma display systems). To avoid imag e retention or burn-in, do not show a still image for an ex tended period. Recommended guidelines are as follows: ⢠Do not display static im ages such as still images, fixed i m a g e s f r o m P C o r T V g a m e e q u i p m e n t , a n d / o r f i x e d i m a g e s s u c h a s t i m e o f d a y i n d i c a t o r o r channe l logo display for long periods. ⢠Do not display content in the 4:3 aspect ratio (black or gray bars on left and right side of content) or letter-box content (black bars above and below co ntent) for extended periods of time, or use either of these viewing modes repeate dly within a short period of time. This plasma display system is equipped with multiple wi de-screen viewing modes; use one of these screen modes to fill the entire screen with content. ⢠Displaying dark images afte r showing a still image for an extended time may cause i mage retention. In most cases, the image retention can be corr ected by displaying bri ght images for a similar period of time. Warning: Displaying a st ill imag e on the pane l for a long period of time can cause the image to be burned in to the screen permanently. CAUTION Panel sticking and after-image lag ⢠Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-im age lagging. This may occur in t he following two cases. 1 After-image lagging du e to remaining electric load When image patterns with ve ry high peak luminance are displayed for more than one(1) mi nute, after-image l agging may occur due to the remaining electrical load. The after- images remaining on the screen d isappears when moving images are shown. The time for the after-image s to disappear depends on the luminance of the still image and the length of time displayed. 2 After-image (lag image) due to burning Avoid displa ying the same ima ge on the Plasma Display continuously over a lo ng period of time . If the same image is displayed continuo usly for several hours, or for shorter periods but over several days, a perman ent after-image m ay remain on the screen due to burning of th e fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if movi ng images are later displayed but they do no t di sappear completely. NOTE ⢠When a program menu, TV Guide screen or frozen image is displayed for 5 to 10 minutes, the system automatically turns the screen off to prevent da mage from screen burning. ⢠To prevent screen burning, the display position is automatically cha nged slightly when the powe r is switched on or the input changed. Depending on the broadcast content, some parts of the picture may not be visible. Preventing damage from scree n burning ⢠Please show imag es in full screen unless doing so causes copyright infringement. See page 65. ⢠The Energy save function can be set to help prevent screen burn-in. See page 63. CAUTION DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNSTABLE CART, STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY FALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT. USE ON LY WITH A CART, STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACT URER, OR SOLD WITH THE PRODU CT. FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURERâÂÂS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INSTALLING THE PRODUCT. ONLY USE MOUNTI NG ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. A PRODUCT AND CART COMBIN ATION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURFACES MAY CAUSE THE COMBINED UNIT TO OVERTURN. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 9 Wednesday, August 2, 2 006 6:01 PM
10 En Safety Precautions 02 Safety Precautions This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety. However, improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. To pre vent injury, please observe the following instructions when inst alling, operating and cleaning the product. To ensure your safety and prolong the service life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. ⢠Read all operating instructions before operating the panel. ⢠Keep this manual safe for future reference. ⢠Observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructi ons. ⢠Follow all operating i nstructions. ⢠CleaningâÂÂUnplug the power co rd from the wall outlet before cleaning the product. To clean the product, use the supplied cleaning cloth or ot her soft cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel, etc.). Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. ⢠Do not use attachments unless recommended by the manufacturer. Use of unauthori zed attachments can result in accidents. ⢠Do not use the product near water (bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink, laundry area, swi mming pool, in a wet or damp basement, etc.). ⢠Do not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the panel. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommende d by the manufacturer or sold with the unit. When mounting the product on a wall, follow the manufacturerâÂÂs instructi ons precisely. Use only mounting hardware recommend ed by the manufacturer. ⢠Sudden st ops, excess ive pus hing and uneven floors can cause a unit mounted on a cart to fall. Move the cart with caution. ⢠Openings in the cabi net are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheatin g and/or shorten the life o f the panel. Do not place the pro duct on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface since materi al can block the vents. This product is not designed for built-in installations. Do not place the product in an encl osed place such as a bookcase or rack unless properly vented. ⢠This product must operate on a power source as stated on the specification label. If you ar e not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company. ⢠Power cord protectionâÂÂThe power cords must be routed properly to prevent being stepped on or being pinched between objects. Check entire length of all cab les to guard against pinching. ⢠This panel contains glass el eme nts. Sudden impacts from dropping or hitting the panel ca n break the glass. If the panel is broken, avoid contact with the glass shards. ⢠Do not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock. ⢠Never insert objects through ve nts or openings. High voltage flows in the product, inserting an object can cause electrical shock and/or short internal part s. For the same reason, do not spill water or liquids into the products. ⢠Do not attempt to service th e product yourself. Removing covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. Re quest service from qualifie d and author ized service personnel. ⢠If any of the following condit ions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and a rrange for repairs with qualified service personnel. ⢠power cord or plug is damaged ⢠liquid spilled or objects fallen in to unit ⢠exposed to rain or water ⢠product fails to perform as described in the operating instructions Do not touch the controls ot her than those described in the operating instructions. Improper adjustments can cause damage, which often requires correction by a qualified technician ⢠unit dropped or damaged ⢠abnormal appearance of picture ⢠Replacement parts must meet or exceed specifications set by the manufacturer. Use of una uthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger. ⢠Upon compl etion of service or repair work, request that the service technician pe rform periodic safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition. ⢠When mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, inst all the panel according to the method recommended by the manufacturer. ⢠Keep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat -generating de vices (including amplifiers). ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before installing the speak ers. ⢠Never expose the screen of t he Plasma Display Panel to a strong impact. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury. ⢠Do not expose the Plasma Disp lay Panel to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warping. ⢠The approximate weight of each Plasma Display Panel is as follows: - PRO-1540HD - 51. 5 kg (113.6 lbs.) - PRO-114 0HD - 34.3 kg (75.7 lbs. ) - PRO-940 HD - 31.7 kg (69.9 lbs. ) (with stand) Unpacking, carrying, and insta lling requires two or more people. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 10 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
11 En Safety Precautions 02 English Installation Precautions Observe the following precautions when installing the panel using option al mounting methods such as the bracket. When using the optional brackets or equiv alent items ⢠Ask your dealer to perform the installation. ⢠Use only the supplied bolts. ⢠For details, see the instruction manual that comes wi th the optional bracket (or equival ent mounting item). When using other items ⢠Consult your dealer. ⢠The following four to six mounting hole s can be used for the installat ion: CAUTION ⢠Use at least four mounting holes symmetrical to the vert ical and horizontal median lines. ⢠Use M8 screws, which go 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inch es) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display. See the side view above. ⢠Be careful not to block rear vents on the Plasma Display. ⢠Install the Plasma Display on a flat surface to avoid warping the glass. ⢠The diagrams above show the location of standard mounting screw holes. Holes othe r than those shown above are for specific mounting methods and should not be used unless a mounting optionâÂÂs instructions require their use. NOTE ⢠Use the optional PIONEER mount ing products whenever possible. ⢠PIONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or property damage that results from using mountin g items other than the optional PIONEER products. Side view Moun ti ng s urf ace Plas ma Display Mounting bracket (or equivalent item) M8 screw 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) Mounting hole Mountin g hole Median line Median line Rear view (PRO-940HD) Mounting hole Median line Median line Mountin g hole Rear view (PRO-1540 HD) Rear view (PRO-1140 HD) Mountin g hole Median line Mountin g hole Median line PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 11 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
12 En Supplied Accessories 03 Supplied Accessories Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet ) Bead band ÃÂ 3 Cleaning cloth AA size battery x 2 (Alkaline battery for remote control unit) Remote control unit Operating instructions G-LINK cable (3 m /9.8 feet) Hexagonal w rench x 1 (Diagonal size: 6 mm) (for PRO-940HD only) Speed cl amp ÃÂ 3 Ferrite core Warranty card Terminal position sheet (for use when mounting the Plasma Display on the wall) (for PRO-1540HD only) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 12 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
13 En Part Names 04 English Part Names Plasma Display 1 a POWER button (See page 26) 2 POWER ON indicator (See page 26) 3 STANDBY indica tor (See page 26) 4 REC TIMER indica tor 5 Remote control sensor (Side view) 6 STANDBY/ON button 7I N P U T button ( ENTER button*) 8 VOLUME UP/DO WN buttons ( UP/DOWN buttons*) 9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons ( LEFT/ RIGHT buttons*) 10 TV GUIDE button* 11 USB port 12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) * ability to operate the TV Guide On Scree n⢠system. 5 6 8 9 10 7 11 13 12 14 1 3 2 4 Front/side view (PRO-1540HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 13 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
14 En Part Names 04 1 a POWER button (See page 26) 2 POWER ON indicator (See page 26) 3 STANDBY indicator (See page 26) 4 REC TIMER indicator 5 Remote control sensor (Side view) 6 STANDBY/ON button 7I N P U T button ( ENTER button*) 8 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons ( UP/DOWN buttons*) 9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons ( LEFT/ RIGHT buttons*) 10 TV GUIDE button* 11 USB port 12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) * ability to operate the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. 5 4 6 8 9 10 7 11 13 12 14 1 3 2 Front/side view (PRO-1140HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 14 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
15 En Part Names 04 English 1 a POWER button (See page 26) 2 POWER ON indicator (See page 26) 3 STANDBY indica tor (See page 26) 4 REC TIMER indica tor 5 Remote control sensor (Side view) 6 STANDBY/ON button 7I N P U T button ( ENTER button*) 8 VOLUME UP/DO WN buttons ( UP/DOWN buttons*) 9 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons ( LEFT/ RIGHT buttons*) 10 TV GUIDE button* 11 USB port 12 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 13 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 14 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) * ability to operate the TV Guide On Scree n⢠system. 6 8 9 10 7 11 13 12 14 5 1 4 3 2 Front/side view Viewed from below of the display (PRO-940HD) Viewed from the front side of the display PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 15 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
16 En Part Names 04 1 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 2 CableCARD⢠slot 3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 4 ANT B IN terminal 5 AC IN terminal 6 Ethernet cable port 7 HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/I NPUT 6) 8 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 9 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 10 G-LINK terminal 11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO) 13 SUB WOOFER terminal 14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO) 19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) 25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 26 CONTROL OUT termina l 27 CONTROL IN terminal 28 SPEAKER (R/L) te rminals 1 2 3 8 7 9 10 6 26 27 28 25 16 13 14 11 12 15 17 21 18 22 23 19 20 24 4 5 Rear view (Terminals located on the upper edge of the compartment) (PRO-1540HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 16 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
17 En Part Names 04 English 1 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 2 CableCARD⢠slot 3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 4 ANT B IN termi nal 5 AC IN termina l 6 Ethernet cable port 7 HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/INPUT 6) 8 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 9 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 10 G-LINK terminal 11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO) 13 SUB WOOFER terminal 14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO) 19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) 25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 26 CONTROL OUT terminal 27 CONTROL IN terminal 28 SPEAKER (R/L) terminals 1 2 3 8 7 6 9 10 26 27 28 25 16 13 14 11 12 15 17 21 18 22 23 19 20 24 4 5 Rear view (Terminals located on the upper edge of the compartment) (PRO-1140HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 17 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
18 En Part Names 04 1 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 2 CableCARD⢠slot 3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 4 ANT B IN terminal 5 AC IN terminal 6 Ethernet cable port 7 HDMI terminals (INPUT 5/I NPUT 6) 8 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 9 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 10 G-LINK terminal 11 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 12 INPUT 6 terminals (AUDIO) 13 SUB WOOFER terminal 14 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 15 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 16 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VID EO: Y, C B /P B , C R /P R ) 17 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 18 INPUT 2 terminal (S-VIDEO) 19 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 22 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 23 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 24 MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) 25 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 26 CONTROL OUT termina l 27 CONTROL IN terminal 1 2 3 8 6 7 9 10 26 27 25 16 13 14 11 12 15 17 21 18 22 23 19 20 24 4 5 Rear view (Terminals located on the upper edge of the compartment) (PRO-940HD) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 18 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
19 En Part Names 04 English Remote control unit This section describes the butto n functions when the mode is set to TV. To use the remot e fo r controlling other equipment, see âÂÂUsing the remote control unit to control other devicesâ starting on page 99. 1T V a : Turns ON the Plasma Display Pa nel or places it in Standby. 2 Transmission co nfirmation LED 3I N P U T : Selects an input source for the Plasma Display Panel. (INP UT 1, IN PUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4 , INPUT 5, INPUT 6 and PC) 4 SCREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size. 5S L E E P : Sets the sleep timer. 6I N F O : Displays a channel banner when a TV program is being wat ched. (When the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is in operation, in formation about the current ly highlighted channel appe ars on screen (when available).) 7H O M E M E N U : Displays the Home Menu screen 8 DAY /â : Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings in the TV Guide On S creen⢠Listing service. 9 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen 10 REC : When using the TV Guide On Screen⢠System, triggers recording to a con nected VCR 11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D) : Selects any of the four preset channels (see page 43 for details to set the FAVORITE CH) While watching, togg le the set channe ls by pressing A , B, C and D . 12 0 â 9 : Selects the channel 13 â¢(dot) : Enters a dot When entering the number of a sub-channel. 14 CH /â : Selects the channel. 15 SPLIT : Switches the scre en mode: 2-screen, picture- in-picture, single-screen 16 FREEZE : Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function. 17 MTS : Selects MTS/SAP or langu age depending on the program being watched 18 D : Lights up all buttons Lights turn off if no operatio ns are performed withi n 5 seconds. This is used for remote control use in dark locations. 19 ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B) (see page 23 for details) 20 AV SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (AV mode: STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, PURE, USER. PC mode: STANDARD, USER) 21 DISPLAY : Displays the chan nel information 22 TV GUIDE : Displays the TV Guide On Screen⢠system 23 ENTER : Executes a command 24 PAGE /â (for the TV Guide On Screen⢠system): Scrolls the program listing screen vertically. 25 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen 26 MENU : Displays a panel men u in the TV Guide On Screen⢠system 27 CH ENTER : Executes a channel number 28 CH RETURN : Returns to the previous chan nel This button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is displayed. 29 VOL /â : Sets the volume 30 M MUTING : Mutes the sound 31 SHIFT : Moves the small screen to a different location when in the picture-in-picture mode 32 SWAP : Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode NOTE ⢠When using the remote control, aim it at the Plasma Display. ⢠See pages 92 to 102 for butto ns not listed on this page. 1 10 11 13 12 14 23 24 25 5 3 4 19 18 20 21 22 7 8 9 26 15 17 16 28 27 30 29 32 31 2 6 Mode switch (with âÂÂTVâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 19 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
20 En Preparation 05 Preparation Installing the Plasma Display Location ⢠Avoid direct sunlight. ⢠Maintain adequa te ventilat ion. ⢠Because the Plasm a Display is heavy, have someone help you when moving or installing the panel. NOTE ⢠Allow enough space around the installed Plasma Display Panel to ensure proper ventilation. Using the optiona l PIONEER stand (for PRO-1540HD and PRO-1140HD ) ⢠For details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the stand. Using the opt ional PIONEE R speakers (for PRO-1540HD and PRO-1140HD ) ⢠For details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the speaker. Moving the Plasma Display (PRO-1540HD) (PRO-1140HD) (PRO-940HD) CAUTION ⢠These Plasma Display Panels are thin and can be unstable when held upright. Therefore, at least two people must move and install thes e panels. ⢠Do not hold by the speaker. ⢠Install the panel on a flat, stab le location to avoid warping the glass components. ⢠When installing on a rack, et c., someone must steady the panel at all times. Over 50 cm (19 11/16 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15/16 inches) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 20 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
21 En Preparation 05 English Preventing the Plasma Displa y from Falling Over During installation, someone mu st steady the panel at all times. Stabilizing on a table or floor Stabilize the Plasma Displ ay as shown in the diagram using screws that are 6 mm (1/4 inch) and at least 20 mm (13/16 inch) long (available from your dealer or other hardware sources). CAUTION The installation site should have adequate strength to support the Plasma Display. A weak inst allation site could result in personal injury and propert y damage. Please take the necessary safety measures to prevent it from falling during emergencies, such as earthquake s or construction accidents. If you do not take these precaut ions, the Plasma Display coul d fall, causing injury or property damage. Screws, hooks, chains, and othe r fittings used to secure the Plasma Display vary according to the compositi on and thickness of the surface to whic h the panel is attached. Inspect the mounting surface carefully to determine its thickness and composition; consult a profess ional installe r if necessary. Using a wall for stabilization 1. Attach fall-prevention bolts (hooks) to the Plasma Display. 2. Use strong cords to fi rmly attach the panel to a wall, pillar, or other sturdy construction. 3. Repeat attachment for the other side of the panel. NOTE Use hooks, cords, and fittings that are available from your dealer or other hardware sources. Recommended hook: Nomi nal diameter 8 mm (3/8 inch) Length 12 mm to 15 m m (1/2 inch to 5/8 inch) 20 mm min. (13/16 inch min.) 9 mm to 15 mm (3/8 inch to 5/ 8 inch) 6 mm (1/4 inch) 12 mm to 15 mm (1/2 inch to 5/ 8 inch) M8 â Hook â Cord Fitting PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 21 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
22 En Preparation 05 Attaching/detaching the PIONEER sta nd (for PRO-940HD only) The PRO-940HD comes with th e PIONEER table top stand attached. You can mount the display in a rack by detaching the stand. The method for attaching/detaching the stand vari es depending on the particular panel. CAUTION ⢠If mounting the panel on a stand, use only the attached stand for this model. Other stand models are not authorized for this panel. ⢠Two or more people are required to assemble and install this unit. Detaching the stand 1 Loosen the two installation bolts â using the enclosed hexagonal wrench. 2 Remove the two installation bolts â using the same hexagonal wrench. 3 Lift the Plasma Display from the stand. ⢠Keep the installation b olts â and â for reattaching the stand to the Plasma Display at a later date. NOTE ⢠Install the panel on a flat, stab le location to avoid warping the glass components. Reattaching the stand 1 Fit the standâÂÂs support column s under the Plasma Display shown below. Slowly ease the panel down on the supports. ⢠Be extremely careful not to insert the stand supports into any part of the Plasma Display other than the stand insertion slots. If the pane l is mounted improperly, the communication ports could be damaged or the stand could be warped. 2 Bolt the Plasma Display to the stand at the points indicated by the arrows. 3 Tighten the installation bolts â firmly using the enclosed hexagonal wrench. NOTE ⢠Install the panel on a flat, stab le location to avoid warping the glass components. ⢠Insert the screws in the holes vertical ly. ⢠Do not tighten them with more force than necessary. Installation bolts â (M8 x 30 mm: silve r) Installation bolts â (M8 x 60 mm: sil ver) Line up t he column supports with the bottom of the Plasm a Display . Installation bolts â (M8 x 60 mm: silver) Installation bolts â (M8 x 30 mm: sil ver) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 22 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
23 En Preparation 05 English Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels This system is equipped with two termi nals fo r inputting TV broadcasting signals, ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN. The ANT/CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and conventional TV broadcasting signals while the ANT B IN terminal accepts only convention al TV broadcasting signals. When using cable TV to wa tch digital and/or conventional TV channels, connect to the ANT/CA BLE A IN terminal as shown. To add an outdoor antenna for clearer pictures, connect an antenna to the ANT B IN terminal. If your outdoor antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial ca ble with an F-type connector, plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Plasma Display. Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable NOTE ⢠Connect coa xial cables as sh own above. Signal reception may fail if cables ar e connected improperly. ⢠In order to watch cable TV channels, be sure to connect the cable to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal. ⢠The ANT/CABL E A IN and AN T B IN termin als must not receive the same signals. For example, do not connect the cable TV line to both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals. Similarly, do not connect an antenna cable to both the ANT/C ABLE A IN and ANT B IN t erminals. ⢠The TV Guide On Screen⢠system may not be available in all areas and is not available with satellite sys tems. In addition, as content providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide data ma y be unavail able or become unavailable. Inserting the CableCARD⢠The Plasma Display prov ide s a slot for inserting a CableCARDâ¢. When you are watc hing digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use the cable companyâÂÂs Point of Deployment (PO D) service. This service presents various types of useful information in Internet- styled text. 1 C onfirm that the AN T/CABLE A IN terminal is connected to the Cable Converter box using a coaxial cable. 2 Slide the slot cover tab on th e rear of the Plasma Display to the left then remove the cover while pulling the tabâÂÂs latch down. 3 I nsert the specif ied Cable CARD⢠completely into the slot. NOTE ⢠Be sure to insert only the specif ied CableCARDâ¢. ⢠Do not insert a PC card. ⢠The CableCARD⢠automaticall y generates a cable channel list. It is unnecessary to acti vate the âÂÂAuto Channel Presetâ option. Switching between antenna A and B To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, press ANT on the remote control. ⢠While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the feed from the other antenna. ⢠While watching in the 2-screen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected, press ANT to view the feed from the other antenna. â¢P r e s s i n g ANT while w atching in the 2-screen mode with two TV images displayed has no effect. ANT/ CABLE A IN VHF antenna Coaxial Cable TV Plasma Display (rea r) U/Vmixer UHF antenna Coaxial Ta b 1 2 (Viewed from below of the Plasma Display) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 23 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
24 En Preparation 05 Preparing the remote control unit Inserting batteries 1 Open the battery cover. 2 Load the supplied two AA batteries. Insert the negative polarity (âÂÂ) ends first. ⢠The battery polarities must correspond with the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators in the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery cover. Cautions regarding batteries ⢠The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the batteries in the unit are weak . When this happens, replace the batteries with new ones. ⢠Use alkaline batteries rath er than mangane se batteries. ⢠Do not mix battery brands. Diffe rent brands have different characteristics. ⢠Do not mix old and new batte ries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new b atteries or ca use chemical leaka ge in old batteries . ⢠Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control. Dead batteries leak chemicals. If you find any chem ical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a clean cloth. ⢠The batteries supplied with th is product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. ⢠If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, re move the batteries. Allowed operation range of the remote control unit To use the remote control, point it at the sensor located at the bottom right corner of the Plasma Display. The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (23 fee t) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees left or right. NOTE ⢠Although the SR logo also appears in the lower right corner on the PRO-940HD, the sensor is in the same location for all three panels. Cautions regarding the remote control unit ⢠Do not expose the remote control to shock, liquid, or high humidity. ⢠Do not place the remote contro l unit under direct sunlight, the unit may deform. ⢠The remote control may not work properly if the panelâÂÂs remote sensor window is under direct sunlight or strong room lighting. If the remote co ntrol fails to function in a bright environment, try changing the signal angle or move closer to the panel. ⢠Objects placed between the remote control and the panel sensor may block the signal. ⢠As the batteries become weak, the remote control may need to be used closer to the pane l. Replace the batteries with new ones if necessary. ⢠The Plasm a Display emits ve ry weak infrared rays from its screen. Other nearby equipment using an infrared remote control such as a VCR may receiv e scrambled or incomplete commands from its remote contro l. In this situation, move the equipment away from the Pl asma Display. ⢠Depending on the environment, infrared rays from the Plasma Display may corrupt si gnals sent by the remote control. These IR waves could also require that the remote control be used closer to the pa nel. The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on the image bei ng displa yed. Battery disposal When disposing of us ed batt eries, please comply with governmen tal regulati ons or enviro nmental public institutionâÂÂs rules that a pply in your country/area. 30ú 30ú 7 m Remote control sensor (23 feet) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 24 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
25 En Preparation 05 English Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord last, after all other componen ts are connected. Plasma Displ ay (rear vi ew) NOTE ⢠Always turn the panelâÂÂs power OFF when connecting or disconnecting power cords. ⢠Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet when the Plasma Display Panel is not go ing to be used for a long period of time. Routing cables Attaching speed clamps to the ma in unit Attach the speed clam ps using an y of the 4 holes yo u prefer (50 inches, 3 holes: 42 in ches, 2 holes) marke d with an arrow ( ) below, depending on your r outing sy stem. for PRO-1540HD for PRO-1140HD for PRO-940HD Attaching and removing speed clamps Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma Display then snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to release once in place. Please attach them carefully. Use pliers to twist the clamp 90ú, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and becom e damaged if removed. NOTE ⢠Use the supplied speed clamps as necessary. ⢠Bundle speaker cables so that none are pinched. Power cord Noise fi lter Partially eliminates noise caused by the power source. AC IN terminal is located on the upper edge of the compartme nt. Rear view When the speakers are installed on the sides Speaker cable Speed clamp Speaker cable Speed clamp 1 2 CAUTION ⢠Use only the supplied power cord. ⢠Use only the specified power supply voltage; neglecting this can result in fire or elec tric shock. ⢠For the Plasma Display System, a three-core pow er cord with a ground terminal is used for safety reasons. Always connect the pow er cord to a three-pronged outlet and make sure that the cord is properly grounded. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 25 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
26 En Basic Operations 06 Basic Operat ions Turning on the power (from Standby) 1 Press a POWER on the Plasma Display if the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off . ⢠The STANDBY indicator on th e Plasma Display lig hts up red. 2 Press TV a on the remote control unit or STAND BY/ON on the Plasma Display to turn the system on. ⢠The POWER ON indicator on t he Plasma Display lig hts up blue. Turning off the power (to Standby) 1 Press TV a on the remote control unit or STAND BY/ON on the Plasma Display. ⢠The system enters the standby mode and the im age on the screen disappears. â¢T h e S T A N D B Y i n d i c a tor lights up red. ⢠This allow s the system to au tomatically receive digital TV program information while in St andby. NOTE ⢠If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Plasma Display status indicators The table below shows the operational status of the Plasma Display Panel. Panel indicators re flect the current status of the Plasma Display. For other than the above, see âÂÂTroubleshooting âÂÂon page 103. CAUTION ⢠If the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are of f, the system cannot be powered ON. Pressing the TV a or STANDBY/ON button has no effect. Press POWER then wait for the Standby indicator to light (red). ⢠The Plasma Display Syste m co nsumes some power as long as the plug is inserted into an outlet. Plasma Display (PRO-1540HD) (PRO-1140HD) (PRO-940HD) Viewed from below of the displ ay (left). Indicator Status System Status POWER ON ST ANDBY The Plasma Display has be en unplugged or the Plasma Display is off . P ower to the system is o n. The system is in Standby . STANDBY indicator POWER ON indicator POWER button STANDBY indicator POWER ON indicator POWER button STANDBY indicator POWER ON indicator POWER button STANDBY/ON button (Right side view) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 26 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
27 En Basic Operations 06 English Watching TV channels TV channels must be programmed into your panel. Refer to âÂÂSetting up TV channelsâ on page 37. NOTE ⢠When watching a digital TV program, you may see emergency alert me ssages scroll ing at the top of the screen. Those messages are broadcas ted by TV stations as necessary when in emergency situations. Selecting the antenna After confirming that the Mode switch on the remot e control has been set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ, press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B. ⢠This selection depends on the connections to the panelâÂÂs antenna input terminals (page 23). Changing channels To increase the channel number, press CH on the remote control. To decrease the channel number, press CH â . ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â on the remote control. â¢P r e s s CH RET URN to switch back to the previous channel. Press CH RETURN again to return to the current channel. Using 0 â 9 and ⢠(dot) on the remote control unit Press any combi nation of buttons 0 to 9 to select a specific channel. To select subchanne ls, use the ⢠(dot) button. EXAMPLE ⢠To select channel 5 (1- digit channel), press 5 . ⢠To select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 then 5 . ⢠To select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , 2 , then 5 . ⢠To select subchannel 10.01, press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), 0 , then 1 . ⢠To select subchannel 10.001 (for cable TV), press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), 0 , 0 , then 1 . NOTE ⢠After entering a channel or subchannel number, press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly. ⢠Each time you change a channel, a channel banner appears that shows information about the currently selected channel. To clear the channel banner, press IN FO . ⢠If you do not activate the T V Guide On Screen⢠system, the channel banner may not displa y certain types of program information. DTV 2 ⢠1002.102 A 12:30pm â 2:00pm XXXXXXXXXX 12:33pm XXX Plasma Display (right side view) CHANNEL /â Channel banner PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 27 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
28 En Basic Operations 06 Changing the volume and sound To increase the volume, press VOL on the remote control. To decrease the volume, press VOL â . ⢠VOLUME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /â on the remote control. ⢠To mute the sound output, press MUTING . The symbol â â appears on the screen. To return to the previous volume, press MUTING again. Pressing VOL also quits muting. Plasma Display (right side v iew) Changing the language If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi- language services, switch am ong the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control. Each time you press MTS , the language switches. NOTE ⢠Switchable languages differ depending on the broadcast. ⢠If the language selected t hrough language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you hear that language. ⢠If you are watching a digital TV program without sound or without language information, âÂÂN/Aâ appears on the screen. If a language other than English, French, or Spanish is selected, âÂÂOthersâ appears on the screen. Volume adjust ment display Muting disp lay VOLUME /â PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 28 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
29 En Basic Operations 06 English Setting MTS/SAP mod e When watching conventional TV programs, use the Multi- channel Television Sound (MTS) function to enjoy stereo sound and/or Secondary Audio Programs (SAP). ⢠Stereo broadcasts Sports, shows, and concerts can be shown with dynamic stereo sound. ⢠SAP broadcasts MAIN sound: The normal progr am soundtrack (either in mono or stereo). SAP sound: Listen to a seco nd language, supplementary commentary and other informat ion. (SAP is mono sound.) NOTE ⢠Conventional TV channels: TV channels received through the conventional VHF/UHF frequencie s or conventional cable TV channels ⢠When stereo sound is difficul t to hear, manually switch to MONO for clearer sound. ⢠Once MONO is selected, the Plasma Display sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. You must reselect STEREO to hear stereo sound again. ⢠Selecting MTS while the source is from an INPUT (1 to 6) or a PC does not change the type of sound. The video source determines the type of sound. Press MTS to cycle through the types of sound. NOTE â¢T h e MTS button is disab led while the TV Guide O n Screen⢠system is displayed. ⢠In each of the sound types, the display changes according to the broadcast signals. When receiving STEREO sound signals When receiving MONO SAP sound signals When receiving STERE O SAP sound signals When receiving MONO sound signals STEREO STEREO mode SAP SAP mode MONO MONO mode A 125 STEREO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO A 125 MONO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO (SAP) A 125 SAP (MAIN) A 125 MONO (SAP) In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO (SAP) A 125 SAP (STEREO) A 125 MONO (SAP) In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO A 125 MAIN A 125 MONO PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 29 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
30 En Basic Operations 06 Viewing a channel banner While watching a TV program, pressing INFO causes a banner to appear. Pressing INFO again causes the banner to disappear. 1 Station name 2 Current time 3 Channel number 4 Input (Ant. A or Ant. B) 5 Program title 6 Program time schedule 7 Channel logo 8 TV rating name or icon NOTE ⢠The above information is not displayed unl ess included in broadcast signals. ⢠If you do not activate the TV Gui de On Screen⢠system, the channel banner may not displa y certain types of program information. Using the POD se rvice If you watch digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, you can use the POD serv ice provi ded by the cable TV company. This service prese nts various types of useful information, using Internet-style text. Press HOME MENU , 9, 9 , then 9 to view the POD display. Using the multiscre en functions Splitting the screen Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture- in-picture mode. 1 Press SPLIT to select the display mode. ⢠Press SPLIT to cycle through the display options: 2- screen, picture-in-pict ure, and single-screen. DTV 2 ⢠1002.102 A 12:30pm â 2:00pm XXXXXXXXXX 12:33pm XXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-screen Picture-in-picture PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 30 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
31 En Basic Operations 06 English ⢠In 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SWAP to switch the position of the 2 screens. The active screen (left side) is indicated by a â â symbol. The a ctive screenâ s picture and sound can be adjusted. ⢠In 2-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the left screen. ⢠In picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the position of the small sc reen counter-clockwise. 2 To select an input source, press the appropriate input source button. ⢠If watching conventional TV, press CH /â to change the channel. NOTE â¢T h e SPLIT button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is displayed. ⢠The multiscreen function ca nnot display images from the same input source or two exte rnal input sources at the same time. Attempting to do so causes a warning message to appear. â¢P r e s s HOME MENU to return to single-screen viewing. The corresponding menu appears. ⢠When the two screens show the same analog bro adcasting coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may differ between the two screens. ⢠If you select 1920 ïµ 1080 p@24 Hz for the main scree n in the SPLIT mode, video images may not display properly. ⢠Displaying pictures in multi- sc reen mode for an extended period may cause an after-image. Freezing images Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame. 1 Press FREEZE . A still image appear s on the right s creen while acti on continues on the left sc reen. 2 Press FREEZE again to cancel the function. NOTE ⢠Freeze is not available when watching in Split Screen. ⢠If this function is not av aila ble, a warning message appears. ⢠Unless another action is ta ken, FREEZE automatically cancels after five minutes. ⢠Displaying pictures in FREEZE mode for an extended period may cause an after-image. Moving image Still image PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 31 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
32 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup About the TV Guide On Screen⢠system The TV Guide On Screen⢠system is a free, interactiv e on- screen television program guide. The system offers program listings, searching by keyword, timer recording, reminders and more. The TV Guide On Screen⢠system is a convenient way to find out whatâÂÂs on right now or during the coming week. Listings can be arranged by cha nnel or by genre. It also allo ws you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily . Before you can use the TV Guide On Screen⢠syste m, youâÂÂll need to set it up. Legal Notices In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are regi stered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide Internat ional, Inc. and/or one of its affi liates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transc ontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide Internati onal, Inc. NOTE ⢠The TV Guide On Screen⢠interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready a nd digital cable se rvices as well as conventional broadcasts . It does not provide listings for satellite servi ces. ⢠Depending on the current settings and selected items, the setup screen order may differ from the one give n in this manual. Follow the instructions shown on your panelâÂÂs screen. ⢠TV Guide may not be availa ble in all area s. As content providers move to digital pro grammin g and broadc asting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or be come unavailable. Setting up the TV Guide On Screen⢠system When the Plasma Displa y is powe red On for the first time, you are automatically taken throug h the setup process. Once the panelâÂÂs setup is complete, the TV Guide On Screen⢠setup Welcome Screen appears. Access the TV Guide On Screen⢠setup menu from the initial Setup reminder screens, or by pressing TV GUIDE for the first time. NOTE ⢠Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen⢠system it may take up to 24 hours for TV program listings to appear. Initially, all eight days of listings may ta ke up to one week to load (see Screen 7). Welcome Scr een Panel setup includes the TV Guide On Screen⢠Welcome screen. Or press TV GUIDE to begin setup. ⢠The Welcome Screen lists features in the Guide. â¢P r e s s ENTER to display Screen 1. Reminder Screen If you previously ski pped TV Guide setup, the Reminder Screen appears when you power On the panel. To make a selection, press / to highlight an option then press ENTER . ⢠âÂÂSet up TV Guide On Screen nowâ displays the first setup screen. ⢠âÂÂRemind me to set it up laterâ returns you to watching TV. ⢠âÂÂDonâÂÂt remind me againâ returns you to watching TV and stops the reminder screen from appearing upon power On. NOTE ⢠If you decide not to set up the Guide immediately, this reminder screen appears each time you power On the panel unless âÂÂDonâÂÂt remind me againâ is selected. System Setup Screens NOTE ⢠Once you star t the setup procedure, you cannot return to the previous screens. If you real ize you entered incorrect information, continue with setup. The last screen of the procedure gives you the opportuni ty to correct any mistakes before you exit TV Guide On Screen⢠setup. Screen 1: Country ⢠This screen asks for the location of your panel. ⢠Press / to highlight a country. â¢P r e s s ENTER to display Screen 2. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 32 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
33 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 English Screen 2: Enter ZIP or Postal Code ⢠If you selected USA in Screen 1 , you see the ZIP Code screen. ⢠Input ZIP Code. Press the number keys or use / to display a number then / to move to anot her field. â¢P r e s s ENTER to di splay Screen 3. ⢠If you selected Canada in Sc re en 1, yo u see the Post al Code screen. ⢠Input Postal Code by pressing / to display a character or number then / to move to another field. â¢P r e s s ENTER to di splay Screen 3. Screen 3: Do you have Cable? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 4. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 5. Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? ⢠Select âÂÂANT/C ABLE A INâ or âÂÂANT B INâ (automatically advances to Screen 5 after the selection) Screen 5: Do you have an antenna connec ted? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 6. (Depending on your setup configuration, you may see an additional screen. After that screen, you see Screen 6.) ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 6. NOTE ⢠If you selected âÂÂNoâ in Screen 3 then you must se lect âÂÂYesâ in this screen to receive a channel lineup and listings. Screen 6: Are the settings correct? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 7. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 1. Screen 7: Co ngratulations â¢P r e s s ENTER to di splay Screen 8. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 33 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
34 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 Screen 8: Is a V CR Connec ted? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 9. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, you see Screen 14. Screen 9: VCR Configuration Diagram ⢠This screen shows the correct way to install the G-LINK cable from the back of the device to the recording device. Make sure the G-LINK cable is properly installed. â¢P r e s s ENTER to advance to Screen 10. Screen 10: VCR Brand Name ⢠Press / to select the brand of the recording device. â¢P r e s s ENTER to advance to Screen 11. Screen 11: VCR Preparation ⢠Follow the on-screen instructions then press ENTER to display Screen 12. Screen 12: VC R Code Testin g ⢠When testing is done, Screen 13 displays automatically. Screen 13: Did yo ur VCR stop playi ng? ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, you see Screen 14. ⢠If you select âÂÂNoâÂÂ, a di fferent code is tested from Screen 12. NOTE ⢠Many VCRs require testing of more than one code to ensure proper operation with the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. If you select âÂÂTest this code againâÂÂ, the same code from Screen 12 is sent again. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 34 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
35 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Setup 07 English Screen 14: Confir ming Your Settings Verify that the Setup information is correct. ⢠If it is, select âÂÂYes, end setupâ t o advance to Screen 15. ⢠If it is not, select âÂÂNo, repeat setup processâÂÂ, to return to Screen 1. Screen 15: Congratulat ions ⢠You have succ essful ly com pleted Setup! â¢P r e s s ENTER to advance to Screen 1 6. Screen 16: Helpful Information ⢠This screen provides valuable information on using the TV Guide. â¢P r e s s ENTER to wat ch TV. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 35 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
36 En Menu Setup 08 Menu Setup Menu Configuration AV mode menus PC mode menus Menu operations The following describes the typi cal procedure for setting up the menus. For the actual procedure s, see the appropriate pages that describe individual functions. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Press / (scr oll) to se lect a menu item then press ENTER . 3 Scroll down to the desired submenu item. ⢠The number of menu layers differs depending on the menu items. ⢠If you select âÂÂTuner Setupâ , a menu bar appears at the bottom of the screen. To select a sub menu item on the bar, press / instead of / . 4 Press / to se lect an option (or parameter) then press ENTER . ⢠For some menu items, press / instead of / . 5 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. NOTE ⢠To return to the upper menu levels, press RETURN . Home Menu Item Page Picture AV Selection 57 Contrast 58 Brightness 58 Color 58 Tint 58 Sharpness 58 P ro Adjust 58 Rese t 58 Sound T reble 62 Bass 62 Balance 62 Rese t 62 FOCUS 63 F ront Surround 63 Power Control Energy Save 63 No Signal off 63 No Operatio n off 64 Sleep Timer 57 Option Po s i ti o n 6 4 Auto Size 66 4:3 Mode 66 Side Mask 67 HDMI Input 69 Monitor Out 70, 71 Digital Audio Out 72 Language 67 T uner Setup Pare ntal Control 38 â 42 F avorites 43 Channel Setup 37 Closed Captions 43 â 44 Clock 44 Home Media Gallery 75 â 91 Home Menu Item Page Picture AV Selection 57 Contrast 58 Brightness 58 Red 58 Green 58 Blue 58 Rese t 58 Sound T reble 62 Bass 62 Balance 62 Rese t 62 FOCUS 63 F ront Surround 63 Power Control Energy Save 63 P ower Manageme nt 64 Sleep Timer 57 Option Auto Setup 64 Manual Setup 65 Home Media Gallery 75 â 91 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 36 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
37 En Tuner Setup 09 English Tuner Setup Setting up TV channels This section describes how to search and set up TV channels. Unless you set up TV channels using Auto Channel Preset, you may not be able to t une in all available channe ls. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel Preset auto matically se arches and sets up TV channels. Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. Aâ or âÂÂAnt. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂAuto Channel PresetâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 6 S elect âÂÂAirâ or âÂÂC ableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Channel search automaticall y starts. ⢠To quit Auto Channel Preset, press D . 7 After Auto Chan nel Pr eset finishes, press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠When using the Cable Converte r, you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. ⢠When a CableCARD is functioning, select âÂÂA nt.Bâ in step 4 to run Auto Channel Preset. Setting for skipping unwanted channels From among TV c hannels adde d using Auto Channel Preset, you can select channels to be skipped using CH /- . Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. Aâ or âÂÂAnt. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂC hannel Keep/SkipâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a cha nnel to be skipped. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The check mark next to the channel disappears. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore skipped channels, use the above procedure but select (add a check mark) a channel in step 6. ⢠When using the Cable Converte r, you may need to manually add Cable Converter ou tput channels. Press ENTER after each selection. Setting up TV channels manually This section describes how to ma nually set up TV channels that have not been set up by Auto Channel Preset. Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. Aâ or âÂÂAnt. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂAdd Channelâ . ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a channel number to be added. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠You can also use buttons 0 â 9 to enter a channel number. ⢠A confirmation screen appears after ENTER is pressed. 7 Press A to complete the setup process. 8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To include analog channels, manually add these channels. Digital channels canno t be added manual ly. Checking signal strength When you have selected an tenna A, check the current channelâÂÂs signal strength. Al so, use this function when receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna. Press ENTER after each selection. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂC hannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂAnt. AâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂSignal Streng thâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Adjust the antenna directio n to maximize the signal strength. 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Channel Setup Begin Preset Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Air Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Enter Home Menu D Channel Setup Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset ⢠Cable One Moment Please ⦠xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu D Channel Setup Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu Channel Setup Ant. A Add Channel 000 Ant. A Add Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 Exit Home Menu Channel Setup Exit Ant. A Signal Strength Ant. A Current: 100 Maximum: 100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu Signal Strength PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 37 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
38 En Tuner Setup 09 NOTE ⢠This function is available only when receiving digital broadcasting signals. ⢠When you use the TV Guide On Screen⢠system with a cable service, select âÂÂCab leâ for âÂÂAuto Channel PresetâÂÂ. ⢠Executing more than one scan for cables can cause broadcast reception to fail. Checking the CableCARD ID The Plasma Display has a slot for a CableCARD that is used for managing your information by the cable T V company. The CableCARD slot is located on th e rear of the Plasma Display. To check your CableC ARD ID and the Host ID, follow t hese steps. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂPOD IDâÂÂ. ( / ) ⢠The Host ID and CableCARD ID appe ar. 5 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Parental Control With the Parental Control, adults can prevent younger audiences from watching in appropriate TV programs, VCR tapes or DVD contents. When an attempt is made to watch a blocked program (or content), the Plasma Display shows a message over a black screen. Th e Parental Control applies to both conventional and digital TV channels. There are three rati ng systems in the United States: the TV ratings, TV Parental Guidelin es, and movie ratings. Movie ratings are provided by the Mo tion Picture Association of America (MPAA) and are used for original movies not ed ited for television. For the rating system in Canada, see page 40. NOTE ⢠In the U.S. TV Parental Guid eli ne Rating System, programs with a rating of âÂÂNoneâ may be blocked on this product. Examples of programs with a âÂÂNoneâ rating include: ⢠Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS messages, weather warning and others) ⢠Locally originated programming â¢N e w s â¢P o l i t i c a l ⢠Public Service Announcements â¢R e l i g i o u s ⢠Sports ⢠Weather ⢠No Parental Control settings can be ente red for INPUT 5 and INPUT 6. Voluntary movie ra ting system (MPAA ) NOTE ⢠The voluntary movie rating syst em uses an age-based rating. TV ratings NOTE ⢠The system also allows you to select âÂÂNoneâÂÂ, which blocks programs with a rating of âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. Changing the password Using a password prevents others from changing Parental Control settings. The 4-digit password i s 1234. Use the following procedure to change the password. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂChange PasswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using the numb er buttons . 7 Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using the number buttons. 8 When prompted, enter the same password again. ⢠A confirmation screen appears. 9 Press A . Rating Description Age-Base N/A Not applicable for MP AA ratings G General audi ences. All ages admitted. PG P arental guidance suggested. So me material may not be suitable for children. PG-13 P arents strongly cautioned. Some material ma y be inappropriate for childr en under 13. R Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian (age varies in some jurisdictions). NC-17 No one 17 and under adm itted. NR Not rated. Rating Description Age-Base TV -Y All children TV -Y7 Children 7 and above TV -G General au di ences TV -PG P arental guidance sugges ted TV -14 P arents strongly cautioned TV -MA Mature au diences onl y Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 38 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
39 En Tuner Setup 09 English 10 Press HO ME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Write down the password and keep i t somewhere safe. Clearing the password Use the following procedure to clear the password. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂPasswordâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂClear Password âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using the number buttons. ⢠A confirmation screen appears. 7 Press A . 8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠The above procedure resets the password to the factor y default (1234). Activating the Parental Control 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / the n ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂOnâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting the voluntary movi e rating system (MPAA) 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂMPAA Ratings âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ra tings to be automatically b locked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocke d. Setting the TV ratings 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂTV RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu We suggest you write down your pass word and keep in a safe place. If you forge t the password When the message âÂÂEnter your Passwordâ is displayed in step 6 under âÂÂClearing the passwordâÂÂ, press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer. The password reverts to âÂÂ1234âÂÂ. PRO-1540HD/P RO-1140HD/PRO- 940HD Your password No.: Parental Control MPAA Ratings N/A MPAA Ratings Blocked MPAA Ratings N/A, G, PG,PG-13, R, NC-17 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx G PG Exit Home Menu TV Ratings TV-Y TV-Y TV-Y7 TV Ratings Blocked TV Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TV-G TV-PG Exit Home Menu Parental Control TV-None PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 39 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
40 En Tuner Setup 09 NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ratings to be automatically blocked. Likewise , unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Setting the TV Parental Guide lines (TV Guidelines) 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂTV Parental GuidelinesâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears beside the blocke d rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships wi th all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Blocking Not Rated TV programs Use the following procedure to block TV prog rams whose rating information is unavailable. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂUnavailable R atingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂBlockâ or âÂÂD onâÂÂt BlockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠The Plasma Display ships wi th all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Canadian rating systems Choose either the Canadian Engl ish ratings or the Canadian French ratings. These ratings are based on the Canadian Radio-Televisi on and Telecommunicati ons Commission (CRTC) policy . Canadian English ratings Parental Control TV Parental Guidelines Fantasy Violence TV Parental Guidelines Blocked TV Parental Guidelines xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Violence Sexual Situations Exit Home Menu Unavailable Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Unavailable Ratings Block DonâÂÂt Block Parental Control Exit Home Menu Rating Description Age-Base E Exempt: Includes news, sports, documentaries and other information pr ogr amming; talk sh ows, music videos, and variety programming. C Children: Intended for yo unger chil dren under the age of 8 years. P ays careful atten tion to theme s that could threaten their sense of security and well-being. C8 Children over 8 years ol d: Contains no portrayal of violence as the preferred, acceptable, or only way to resolve conflict; nor encourages children to imitate dang erous acts whi ch they may se e on the screen . G Ge neral: Cons idered a ccept able for all age groups. Appropriate viewing for the entire family, contains very little violence, physical, verbal or emotional. PG P arental Guidance: In tended fo r a general audience, but may not be suitable for younger children (under th e age of 8) because it could contain controversial themes or issues. 14 Over 14 Y ears: Could contain themes where violence is one of the dominant eleme nts of the stor yline, but it mu st be integral to th e development of plot or cha racter . Language usag e could be pr ofane and nudity pres ent within t he context of the the me. 18 Adults: Intende d for viewers 18 yea rs and older and might contai n depictions of violence, which while relat ed to the de velopment o f plot, ch aracter or themes, are intended for adult viewi ng. Could contain graphic langua ge and portrayals of sex and nudity . PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 40 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
41 En Tuner Setup 09 English Canadian French ratings Setting Canadian English ratings 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂC anadian English RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select then change to the desired rating. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ra tings to be automatically blocked. Likewise, unblock ing a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblo cked. Setting Canadian French ratings 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂCanadi an French Ratingsâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 6 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears be side the blocked rating. ⢠The Plasma Display ships with all ratings unblocked. 7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ra tings to be automatically blocked. Likewise, unblock ing a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblo cked. Setting new ratings Digital broadcasts now carry new ratings that are not compatible with the Plasma Display PanelâÂÂs original Parental Control settings. When you fi rst tune in one of these broadcasts, a New Parental Cont rol menu appears on the screen. This tells you that you must now change your Parental Control settings to handle th ese new ratings. Otherwise, previously blocked rating s may become unblo cked. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The new menu is displayed when Status is selected. The message âÂÂRegional ra tings have changed. Set Parental Control ratings again.â appe ars on the right of the screen. Rating Descriptio n Age-Base E Exempt programming. G G eneral: All ages and children, contains minimal direct violence, bu t may be integrated into the plot in a humorous o r unrealistic mann er . 8ans General but inadvisable for young children: May be viewed by a wide public audience , but could contain scenes disturbing to childre n under eight who cannot disting uish between imag inary and real situations. R ecommended for v iewing with parent. 13ans Over 13 years: Could co ntain scenes of frequent violent scenes and therefore recomme nded for viewing with parent. 16ans Over 16 years: Could co ntain frequent violent scenes and intense violence. 18ans Over 18 years: Only fo r ad ult viewing. Co uld contain frequent violent scenes and extreme violence. Parental Control Canadian English Ratings E Canadian English Ratings Blocked Canadian English Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx C C8 Exit Home Menu Parental Control Canadian French Ratings E Canadian French Ratings Blocked Canadian French Ratings E, G, 8 ans , 13 ans , 16 ans , 18 ans xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx G 8 ans Exit Home Menu Parental Control Status Status MPAA Ratings TV Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx New XXXXXXXXXXXXX Exit Home Menu PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 41 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
42 En Tuner Setup 09 4 Select and change the desired rating. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The menu appears between âÂÂU navailable Rati ngsâ and âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. ⢠The password entry screen appears. 5 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. ⢠A lock icon appears beside the blocke d rating. ⢠When you are finished, the word âÂÂNewâ disappears from the Parental Control menu. 6 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. Deleti ng new ratin gs You can delete a New Parental Control menu. When the menu is deleted, all blocks are removed. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâ and then âÂÂOffâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The password entry screen appears. 5 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons. 6 Select A for âÂÂAcceptâ or D for âÂÂCancelâÂÂ. ⢠The New Parental Control me nu remains. However, if no settings are entere d within 60 seconds, the selection screen for deleting new ratings disappears. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. NOTE ⢠Broadcasts with new (arriving) ratings are not reflected while the Parental Control menu is open. ⢠Blocking a rating causes mo re severe ratings to be automatically blocked. Likewise , unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Temporarily deac tivating the P arental Control When the activated Parental Control senses a blocked TV program (or content), the Plasma Display shows a message over a blank screen. The method for temporarily deactivating the Parental Control differs, depending on the selected input source. Antenna A or antenna B: The following screen appears. Press ENTER . Enter your 4-digit password. ⢠The password entry screen appears for approximately 60 seconds. If the screen disappears prematurely, press ENTER to reveal the screen again. Input 1 â 4: Enter your 4-digit pa ssword. Pressing ENTER again causes the password entry screen to disappear. ⢠The above password entry scr een also appears during 2- screen mode, picture-in-picture , and while freezing an image. ⢠The password entry screen appears for approximately 60 seconds. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again. Parental Control New (xxx) New (xxx) New (xxx) Password New (xxx) Unavailable Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx XX XX Exit Home Menu Parental Control Status Change Password Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A Cancel Clear Entry D Enter your Password A Off Parental Control Status Change Password Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A Cancel Accept D Reset Digital regional ratings? A Off _ _ _ _ WWWWWWW 1000.0000 (Ant. B) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Parental Control Disable Parental Control Enter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Cancel Clear Entry D A Enter your Password Parental Control Please Input Y our Passw ord. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 42 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
43 En Tuner Setup 09 English Setting your favorite channels Set up to 10 TV channels for each of the four color buttons on the remote control (40 channels in total). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂFavorites âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select a color button (A, B, C, D). ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select a TV channel to be registered. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠A star appears beside the favorite channels currently selected. ⢠To register another TV channel under the same color button, repeat step 5. To register another TV channel under a different color button, repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting up closed captions Your Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder. Closed caption allows you to view conversations, narration, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitl es on your Plasma Display screen. Many digital TV programs also off er closed captioning. Digital closed captions support changi ng parameters such as fonts and colors. ⢠Not all programs and v ideos offer closed caption. Please look for the â â symbol to check for closed captioning on a program or video. Activating the closed caption 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂClosed Ca ptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / the n ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Selecting the type of conventional closed captions Select a conventiona l TV channe l before deciding on a type of closed captioning. Some digi tal TV programs provide only conventional closed captions. ⢠âÂÂCC1âÂÂ, âÂÂCC2âÂÂ, âÂÂCC3âÂÂ, or âÂÂCC4â displays subtit les of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture. ⢠âÂÂText1âÂÂ, âÂÂText2âÂÂ, âÂÂT ext3âÂÂ, or âÂÂText4â superimposes i nformation over the picture (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is independent from the TV program in progress. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂClosed Ca ptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂAnalog Setting sâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired clos ed caption. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The fact ory default is âÂÂCC1âÂÂ. 6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. Favorites Favorites Current Favorites A Line Up B0008.000 A0009.000 Favorites B 9.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A 11.0 B 11.0 A Exit Home Menu A A0011.000 B 8.0 A 9.0 Item Description Off (factory d efault) Does not show closed captions On Always shows closed captions On If Mute Shows closed ca ptions only when sound is bein g muted Closed Captions Status Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx On On If Mute Off Exit Home Menu Analog Settings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Analog Settings CC3 CC2 CC1 T ext 1 CC4 Exit Home Menu PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 43 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
44 En Tuner Setup 09 Selecting digital closed captions Use the following procedure to se lect digital closed capt ions: Service 1 to 6. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂDigital ServiceâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 6 Select the desired clos ed caption. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The fact ory default is âÂÂService 1âÂÂ. 7 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. NOTE ⢠When available, the Primary Caption Service is usually offered for Service 1, and the Secondary Language Service is usually offered for Service 2. Selecting digital closed caption parameters Use the following procedure to ch ange digital closed captions parameters such as font si ze, font type, foreground and background colors. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂFont SizeâÂÂ, âÂÂFontâÂÂ, or any other item. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary. ( , / ) 8 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. The following table shows the av ailable parameters for each item. 1 Font 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 3 (monospaced without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionally spaced without ser- ifs)/ Font 5 (casual font)/ Font 6 (cursi ve font)/ Font 7 (small capitals font) With âÂÂAutoâ selected, parameters specifie d by the provid er are used. If not specified by the provider, the bolded default parameters are used. Selected parameters override any other parameters, including th ose from the provider . Clock Setting With âÂÂAuto Setâ selected for Cl ock Setting, the system acquires and sets the time automatically. You can also manually set the time. If power is lost (unplugged or power outage), the set time is cleared. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂTuner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂTime ZoneâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select a time zone for your area. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select âÂÂD.S.T.âÂÂ. ( , / , then ENTER ) 7 Select âÂÂAppliesâ or âÂÂDoes Not ApplyâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) ⢠Set this option if your area uses Daylight Savings Time. 8 Select âÂÂAuto/Manual SetâÂÂ. ( , / , then EN TER ) 9 Select âÂÂAuto Setâ or âÂÂManual SetâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) Digital Settings Digital Settings Digital Ser vice xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Digital Service Service 3 Service 4 Service 5 Service 2 Service 1 Exit Home Menu Digital Settings Digital Settings Font Size xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Font Size Small Standard Large Exit Home Menu Item Selection Font Size Auto / Large/ Standard/ S mall Font 1 Auto / Fo n t 1 / Fo n t 2 / Fo n t 3 / Fo n t 4 / Fo n t 5 / Fo n t 6 / Fon t 7 Font Color Auto / B lack/ White/ R ed/ Green/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magenta/ Cyan Font Opacity Auto / Solid/ T ra nsparent/ T ranslucent/Flashing Background Color Auto / Black/ White/ R ed/ Green/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magenta/ Cyan Background Opacity Auto / Solid/ T ransparent/ T ranslucent Clock Time Zone Atlantic Eastern Time Zone xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Central Mountain Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:55 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 Clock Daylight Savings Time Applies D.S.T . xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Does Not Apply Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:56 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 44 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
45 En Tuner Setup 09 English 10 If you chose âÂÂAuto SetâÂÂ, select an antenna (A or B) and a channel number using / and ENTER . ⢠The date and time is corrected automat ically using data from the selected channel. If you select âÂÂManual S etâÂÂ, ma nually set the date and time u s i n g /, / a n d ENTER . 11 Press HO ME MENU to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠If the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is active, the Plasma Display accesses time through the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. When the TV Guide is provid ing the time data, you cannot set up the clock using the menu. If you select a parameter for the Clock menu then press ENTER , the menu screen disappears and a dialog box appears. Press A to clear the dialog box. Auto/Manual Set Clock Set Channel Ant. A Auto/Manual Set â¢Auto Set 2.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 Auto/Manual Set Date and Time 3 /17/04 Auto/Manual Set â¢Manual Set 11:58pm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock 5 4 3 6 Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 45 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
46 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation Using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system Before you can use the TV Guide On Screen⢠syste m, youâÂÂll need to set it up. If you havenâÂÂt already done this, please turn to âÂÂTV Guide On Screen⢠System SetupâÂÂon page 32 before proceeding. In order to record TV programs with a VCR, you need to correctly connect the equipment to the Plasma Display. For VCR connection information, see page 71. NOTE ⢠The TV Guide On Screen⢠interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready a nd digital cable se rvices as well as conventional broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite servi ces. ⢠Once the TV Guide On Screen⢠system is acti vated it may take up to 24 hours to begin re ceiv ing TV program listings. Initially, of al l eight days of li stings may take up to on e week to load. ⢠TV Guide may not be availa ble in all area s. As content providers move to digital pro grammin g and broadc asting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or be come unavailable. Screen components Many of the screens have common elements to make using the system easier. 1 TV GUIDE logo 2C l o c k â Shows the current time 3T i m e s l o t â Half-hour time slots are displayed horizontally 4T i m e t a b â Indicates the currently selected time slot 5 C urrent service label â Indicates the currently selected service 6 Service bar â Gives access to the various TV Guide services. 7 Title â Shows the title of the TV program 8 Info Bar â Shows various icons to convey information or show the status of an item 9 Vi deo window â Allows you to co ntinue watching the current program while using the Guide 10 Panel ads and panel m enu entry â Space for show or product advertising (and the panel menu) 11 Channel logo 12 Info Box â Shows information about the highlighted item 13 Channel ads â Space to advertise upcoming programs and specia ls TV Guide On Screen⢠icons Various icons are used to convey information or show the status of an item. These icons can be o n the Info Bar, inside the Info Box, or beside program titles. ⢠Info icon â Alerts that additional information is available (press INFO to di splay) ⢠Progress Bar â Shows the elapsed time of the current program ⢠HDTV â Indicates that a program is a high-definition broadcast ⢠New â The program is new (not a repeat) ⢠Stereo â The program is broadcast in stereo ⢠CC â The program is broadcas t with closed captioning ⢠TV Rating â Indicates t he age rating for the program ⢠Record On ce â One-time only recording ⢠Record Daily â Records the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual recording only) ⢠Record Regu larly â Records the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time ⢠Record Weekly â R ecords a program every week at the same time/day ⢠Record Suspend â The program is set to record, but is suspended because of a conflict with another recording or auto tune reminder. The recording resumes when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Record Off â The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but is not recorded until the frequency is changed to one of the above ⢠Remind Once â One-time only reminder ⢠Remind Dai ly â Reminds for the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only) ⢠Remind Regularly â Reminds the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time ⢠Remind Weekly â Remi nds every week at the same time/day ⢠Remind Suspend â A reminder is set for the program, but is suspended because of a conflict with another auto tune reminder or recording. The reminder resumes when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Remind Off â The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but the reminder is held unt il the frequency is changed to one of the above. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 46 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
47 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English TV Guide On Screen⢠naviga tion The table below summari zes the TV Guide On Sc reen⢠syst em navigation buttons for the remote control. You can also use the panelâÂÂs buttons, TV GUIDE , ENTER, UP / DOWN , and LEFT/RIGHT to make selections. The UP /DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT buttons o perate the same as t he / and / buttons on the remote control. The Listings screen The Listings screen is the m ain menu for the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. This is the screen you see when you press TV GUIDE . Options on the Listings screen include: ⢠View eight days of program list ings. ⢠Display information about individual programs. ⢠Select a program to start watching. ⢠Set a reminder about a program. ⢠Set a program to record. ⢠See a thumbnail of any channel in the video window. ⢠Access panel and channel ads. 1 Press TV GUIDE to display the Listings screen. ⢠With âÂÂLISTINGS â highlighted in the Service bar (top of the screen), press INFO to display (then close) Help information. ⢠Press TV GUIDE anytime to exit. 2 P r e s s /// t o n a v i g a t e t h e L i s t i n g s s c r e e n . ⢠With a program highlighted, press ENTER to start watching that program. ⢠Move right for programs showing at later times. ⢠Press PAGE /â to scroll one menu page at a time. ⢠Press INFO to display additional information (if available) about the currently selected show. ⢠Press DAY /â to jump to the next/previous day in the listings grid. 3 To set the highlighted pro gram to record, press ï« REC . Pressing ï« REC just once sets the program to record. Press ï« REC repeatedly to change th e frequency of the recording: ⢠Once â Just records the highlighted program ⢠Regularl y â Records the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time 1 Key What it does TV GUIDE P ress to display the TV Guide On Screen⢠system (also use to exit ). /// Use to navigate screens (highlight an item) ENTER P ress to confirm a select ion or execute an action Can also be used to display the panel m enu when a future program is highlighted MENU P ress to display a panel menu INFO P ress to cycle through th e av ailable information for the current program or screen ï« REC P ress to set the highligh ted program to record Number buttons Use f or numeric entr y PAGE /â Press to select the previous/next page of information (whe re appli cable) DAY /â P ress to jump to the next /previous day of program listings (if applicable) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 47 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
48 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 ⢠Weekly â Records t he same program at t he same time 1 / day every week ⢠No record icon â Does not record. 1 The program is recorded if it starts any time up to the midway point of the originall y schedule d program. For e xample, up to 9:15 for a 9: 00 to 9:30 progra m. These recording options use the default settings. To record using settings other th an the defaults, use the panel menu recording option described b elow. NOTE ⢠When TV Guide On Screen⢠is not being displayed, you can record a program simply by pressing the REC button on the remote control. Press the REC button to record the current program episode. Recording b egins immediately. I f the program is listed in the TV Guide On Screenâ¢, recording stops at the end of the program. If the program is not listed in the TV Guide On Screen⢠system, reco rding continues for 30 minutes. ⢠When TV Guide On Screen⢠is not displayed, pressing the REC button more than once has no effect. Recording programs The simplest way to record a pro gram is to highlight it then press ï« REC (as described above) . Howe ver, if you want to set the recording options to anything other than the default, use the Recording Options panel menu. Here you can adjust the start and end times, the desti nation of the recording, etc. 1 From LISTINGS, SCH EDULE, or SEARCH, highlight the program you want to record. 2 Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. 3 Highlight âÂÂset recordingâ then press ENTER . 4 Set the recording options: Press / to highlight a field then press / to change the setting. ⢠frequency â select whether the program will be recorded Once , Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or Weekly (every week at the same time/day). The Off option adds the prog ram to the recording schedule but doesnâÂÂt record it (you can set it to record later). ⢠start â set the start time of the recording to On time , or up to 120 minutes before or after the scheduled time. ⢠end â set the end time of the re cording to On time , or up to 120 minutes before or after the scheduled time. ⢠recorder â select a recorder to be used for recording. ⢠If you want to cancel the recording, highlight cancel then press ENTER . 5 Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to highlight âÂÂschedule recordingâ then press ENTER again. ⢠The recording is now set (l isted in SCHEDULE) and the appropriate icon appears on the show title. If there is a time c onflict with a previously sc heduled recording or auto-tune reminder, you wi ll be alerted by one of the messages below. You can select to record the conflicting program, or cancel the recording. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 48 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
49 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English When the recording is about to start The TV Guide On Screen⢠syst em alerts you when a scheduled recording is about to start and gives you the chance to cancel the recording. When you see the on-screen alert, select the next action; ⢠âÂÂchange channel, start recordingâ â¢ âÂÂdonâÂÂt change channel; cancel recordingâ Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear. Press A to start recording as scheduled or D to cancel recording. While recording is in progress If you attempt to change the channel during recording, the following screen appears. Select the next action: ⢠âÂÂdonâÂÂt change; keep recordingâ â¢ âÂÂchange; stop recordingâ Depending on the situation, th e following screens may appear. This reminder remains on-screen for 15 seconds. Press A to change the channel and quit recording; or press D not to change the channel and to continue recording. Setting program reminders By setting a program reminder you can have the TV alert you when a program is about to start on another channel. You can set reminders for individual episodes, or for every time a program airs. 1 From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE, or SEAR CH, highli ght the program. 2 Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. 3 Highligh t âÂÂset reminderâ then press ENTER . 4 Set the reminder options. Press / to highlight a field; press / to change the setting. ⢠freque ncy â select whether to be reminded just On ce , Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or Weekly (every week at the same time/day). T he Off option adds the program to the reminder schedule but no reminder is given (to be set later). ⢠auto tune â choose whether the TV should automatically change channels when a remi nder is due. ⢠when â set when the reminder appears (before, on time, or after a program has started). The following timer is about to begin: T ues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000.000 BRA V022 The following timer is about to begin: Wed. 1/5 4 : 06 am - 9 : 08 am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000. 5 BRA V022 PLASMA DISPLA Y Changing channels will interrupt a recording in progress. Recording In Progress Change Channel Now A Don't Change Channel D Changing channels will interrupt a recording in progress. Don't Change Channel Change Channel Now D A Recording In Progress REC PLASMA DISPLA Y PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 49 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
50 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 5 Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to highlight âÂÂschedule re minderâÂÂ, then press E NTER again. ⢠The reminder is now set (listed in SCHEDULE) and the appropriate icon appears on the show title. If there is a time conflict with a previously sched uled auto-tune reminder or recording, you w ill be alerte d. One of the messages below will appear. You ca n select to set a reminder for the conflicting program or cancel the reminder. When a scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is OFF) Depending on your settings, the reminder will appear on your TV screen shortly before the progr am is scheduled to start. This happens when you have selected âÂÂNOâ for the auto t une. The reminder remains on-screen for three minutes before it automatically disappears. Press ENTER to switch to the high lighted program in the reminder or hi ghlight âÂÂhide remi ndersâ to di smiss the reminder. If more than one reminder is set for the same time, press / to select which program to watch. Depending on the situation, the following screens may appear. The reminder remains on-screen for 15 seconds. Press A to leave the reminder in effect, or D to dismiss the reminder. When scheduled r eminder is due (a uto-tune is ON) If the âÂÂauto-tuneâ setting was set to âÂÂyesâ in the Remind Options, one of the following screens appears, depending on the situatio n. The screen remains visible for 15 seconds. Press A to make the Timer Al ert screen disappear. T ues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000.000 BRA V022 Wed. 1/5 4 : 06 am - 9 : 08 am Cancel Timer Accept D A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000. 5 BRA V022 PLASMA DISPLA Y T ues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am Accept A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000.000 BRA V022 Wed. 1/5 4 : 06 am - 9 : 08 am Accept A Timer Alert Ant. A 1000. 5 BRA V022 PLASMA DISPLA Y PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 50 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
51 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English Searching for programs The Search screen lets you se arch for programs alphabetically, by category, or by keyword. You can also search for HDTV programs. Searching by category This option supports searching for programs by category, and then by a further sub-category. 1 Select âÂÂSEARCHâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Press to move to the search category ba r, then press / to select a search category. ⢠Available categorie s may include: â¢M o v i e s ⢠Sports ⢠Children â¢E d u c a t i o n a l â¢N e w s â¢V a r i e t y â¢S e r i e s â¢H D T V 3 Press to highlight the search sub-categories then select a sub-category. ⢠Sub-categories availability depends upon the category you choose. 4 Press ENTER to list upcoming programs that match the categories you chose. 5 Highligh t a program listing then press ME NU to display the Episode Options menu. ⢠If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start watching it immediately. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 51 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
52 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 Searching by keyword This option supports searching for shows based on keywords you enter. The keywords you create are stored so you can use them again. 1 Select âÂÂSEARCHâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Pres s to move to the search category bar, then press / to select âÂÂKEYWORDâÂÂ. ⢠Previously entered keywords are displayed. S imply select one to search fo r it again. ⢠To edit or delete a ke yword, highlig ht it then pres s MENU . From the panel menu you can choose âÂÂedit searchâ or âÂÂdelete sear châÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER to display the Keyword Search menu. 4 Select âÂÂnew searc hâÂÂ. 5 If you want to change the cate gory, scroll up to select the category you want. â¢T o s e a r c h u s i n g o n l y t h e k e y w ord , leave the category set to âÂÂAllâÂÂ. ⢠If you select a category (âÂÂHD TVâÂÂ, for example) then youâÂÂll only see programs in that categ ory that also match the keyword. 6 Highlight âÂÂenter keywordâ then press ENTER . 7 Input the keyword for the search. ⢠H i g h l i g h t c h a r a c t e r s b y p r e s s i n g ///, t h e n p r e s s ENTER to input the letter or number. ⢠The new keyword is stored for future searches. 8 Select âÂÂDONE â to start the search process. 9 Highlight a program listing, then press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. ⢠If the program is currently showing, press E NTER to start watching it immediately. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 52 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
53 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English Alphabetical search This search is designed to display all programs that start with a particular letter. 1 Select âÂÂSEARCHâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Press to move to the search category ba r, then press / to select âÂÂALPHABETICALâÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER . 4 Select a letter, then press ENTER to display all prog rams starting with that letter. 5 Highligh t a program then press MENU to display the Episode Options m enu. ⢠If the program is currently showing, press ENTER to start watching it immediately. The search Episode Opti ons menu From the Episode Options menu you can s elect: ⢠go to Service bar â closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠tune to channel / watch now â exits the TV Guide On Screen⢠guide and tunes to the channel ⢠set recording â goes to the Record Options menu ⢠set reminder â goes to the Remind Opt ions menu ⢠cancel â closes the panel menu and returns to the highlighted program Navigation and search tips ⢠The / buttons move the highlight between options in the menu. Use the number buttons to input information. ⢠If a highlighted field has arrows on either side, press / to cycle through the options. â¢P r e s s ENTER on any option t o highlight the default command (e.g., Done ) then press ENTER again to execute and close the menu. ⢠Select Cancel then press ENTER to close the menu and return to the previous screen, or press MENU to close the menu without saving the changes. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 53 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
54 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 Scheduling recordings and reminders From the Schedule area you can review, edit or delete future recording sessions and reminders. 1 Select âÂÂSCH EDULEâ from the Serv ice bar at the top of the screen. Programs marked for reminding or to be recorded (referred to as scheduled âÂÂeventsâÂÂ) are listed. The icon on the right indicates the status of the event. ⢠Once only recording ⢠Daily Records the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual recording only) ⢠Regularly â Records the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time 1 ⢠Weekly recording (every week at the same time/day) ⢠Record Suspen d â The program is set to record, but is suspended because of a conflict with another recording or auto tune reminder. The recording resumes when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Off : The progr am remains in th e SCHEDULE list, but is not recorded. ⢠Once only reminder ⢠Daily Reminds for the same channel and tim e every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only) ⢠Regularly â Reminds the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time 2 ⢠Weekly reminder (every week at the same time/day ) ⢠Remind Suspend â A reminder is set for the program, but is suspended because of a conflict with another auto tune reminder or recording. The reminder activates when the conflict is cleared. ⢠Off : The program remains in the SCHEDULE list but the reminder is not sent. 1 The program records if it star ts any time up to the mid way point of the originally schedu led program. For example, up to 9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program. 2 The reactivated reminder appear s if the prog ram starts any time up to the midway point of the original schedule. F or example, up to 9:15 for a 9: 00 to 9:30 prog ram. 2 Highlight a program in the list then press MENU to display the Schedule Options menu. ⢠Highlight a program i n the list to see information related to that program (data appears in the Info Box). The Schedule Options menu Press MENU with either âÂÂSCHEDULEâ (in the Servi ce bar) or a program highlighted to access the Schedule Options menu. When âÂÂSCHEDULEâ is hi ghlighted in the service bar: ⢠go to Service Bar â closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠sort by â select a sort order for the program listings ⢠new manual recording â select then fill in the necessary fields to set the recording Select âÂÂschedule recordingâ t o save and exit or sele ct âÂÂcancelâ to exit witho ut saving. ⢠new manual reminder â select and then fill in all the necessary fields to set the reminder. Select âÂÂschedule reminderâ when youâÂÂre done to save and exit, or select âÂÂcancelâ to exit without saving. ⢠done â closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠cancel â closes the menu without saving changes and returns to the Service bar at the top of the scr een When a program is highlighted: ⢠go to Service Bar â closes the menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen ⢠watch now â selected program appears (this option is âÂÂtune to channelâ for a future program) ⢠cancel â closes the menu and returns to the highlighted program listing For recording: ⢠set recording â set the program to record (opens the Record Options menu) ⢠delete recording â remove the recordin g from the schedu le (requires confirmation) ⢠edit recording â edit the recording settings (opens the Record Options menu) For reminder: ⢠set reminder â set a reminder notice for the pr ogram (opens the Remind Options menu) ⢠delete reminder â remove the reminder from the schedule (requires confirmation) ⢠edit reminder â edit the reminder settings (opens the Remind Options menu) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 54 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
55 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Oper ation 10 English Changing setup options You can change TV Guide On Screen⢠settings from the Setup menu. Setup options are divided into three categories: System Settings, Channel Displa y, and Default Options. 1 Select âÂÂSETUPâ from the Service bar at the top of the screen. 2 Press to select a Setup option. Adjustment options appear with each highlighted menu item. ⢠System Settings â ZIP/postal code, cable setup, etc. ⢠Channel Display â Channel position, tuning channel, display on/off, etc. ⢠Default Options â General, recording and reminder defaults Changing the System Settings The System Settings include your ZIP/postal code and your cable TV setup. 1 Highligh t the âÂÂChange Sy stem Settingsâ item. 2 Press ENTER to display the current settings and the options to change them. 3 S elect one of the options, then follow the on-screen instructions. ⢠Yes, everything is correct (d isplays a helpful information screen). Press ENTER to qui t the TV Guide O n Screen ⢠System. ⢠Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect (displays a screen with alternate channel lineups). Press ENTER to display the Channel Editor screen. ⢠No, repeat setup process (d isplays Screen 1 shown on page 32). Changing the Channel Display settings From the Channel Display se ttings you can set/change: ⢠the display setting to always display (On), never display (Off), or display only when channel information is available (Auto Hide) ⢠the tuned channel number ⢠the channel position in the channel listing 1 Highligh t the âÂÂChange Ch annel Displayâ ite m. 2 Press ENTER to display the channel editor. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 55 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
56 En TV Guide On Screen⢠System Operation 10 3 Press / to highlight a channel then press ENTER to go to the Grid Options menu. From the Grid Options menu you can set: ⢠channel â On (display in channel list), Off (donâÂÂt display) or Auto Hide (hide when no program information is available) ⢠service â the type of service that the channel operates on (cable, etc.) ⢠tune channel â the channel number that t he channel listing is tuned to ⢠position â place that the channel appears in the channel list 4 After making all selections for the channel, highlight âÂÂdoneâ then press ENTER . ⢠To cancel without saving the changes, select âÂÂcancelâÂÂ. Changing the Default Options The menu provides options to change the default settings for recordings, reminders, an d other general settings. 1 Select the âÂÂChange De fault Optionsâ item. 2 S elect a default option category. A different panel menu appears for each option. General default options ⢠box size â the initial size of the Info Box (no, small, large, last used) ⢠box cy cle â the cycle behavior of the Info Box (no only, small only, large only, no & small, no & large, small & large, all) ⢠auto guide â Display TV Guide On Scre en⢠guide automatically when you turn on the TV Record defaults ⢠start â when to start a recording (up to 120 minutes earlier or later than the program start time, or On time) ⢠end â when to end a recording (up to 120 minutes earlier or later than the program end time, or On time) ⢠recorder â selects a recorder to be used for recording. Remind defaults ⢠auto tune â automatically tunes to the correct channel when a reminder becomes due (Yes or No) ⢠when â set the display time for the reminder (15 minute s early to 15 minutes late, or On time) 3 When the settings are complete, highlight âÂÂdoneâ then press ENTER . ⢠To cancel without saving the changes, select âÂÂcancelâÂÂ. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 56 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
57 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Adjustments and Settings Sleep Timer When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into standby. Press SLEEP to select the desired time. ⢠The timer starts counting. ⢠Each time you press SLEEP , the selection cycles as below: ⢠The factory default is âÂÂOffâÂÂ. NOTE ⢠To cancel the S leep Timer, select âÂÂOf fâ by pressing SLEEP . ⢠Five minutes be fore the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears every minute. You can also use this me nu to set the Sleep Timer. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSleep Tim erâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select the desired time. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. AV Selection Viewing options depend upon th e current environment (e.g., room brightness), the type of the current TV program, or the type of images input from external equipment. To change the view, follow the directions below. 1 Press AV SELECTION . ⢠The current AV Selection mode appears. 2 Press AV SELECTION again before t he displayed mode disappears. ⢠For AV source, the mode cycles in this order; STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, PURE and USER. ⢠For PC source, the mode toggles between STANDARD and USER. You can also use the menu to change the options. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂAV Selectio nâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select the desired option. ( / then ENTER ) For AV source For PC source 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠You can also press AV SELECTION on the remot e control unit to change the viewing option. ⢠Selecting the DYNA MIC viewing se tting causes all other viewing options to become unavailable (grayed out). 30 60 90 120 Off (cancel) (minutes) A V Selection ST ANDARD D YNAMIC MO VIE GAME PURE USER Item Description ST ANDARD F or a highly defi ned imag e in a normally bright room This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources. DYNAMIC F or a very sharp image with maximum contrast This mode does not allow manual image quality adjustment. This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources. MOVIE Fo r m o v i e s This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources. GAME Lowers image brightness for easier viewing This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources PURE R eflects input signals a s faithfully as possible For example, you may select this option to check image materials. USER Allows you to custom iz e settings as desire d You can set the mode for each input source. Item Description ST ANDARD F or a highly defined im age in a normally bri ght room USER Allows y ou to customize settings as desired You can set the mode for each input source. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 57 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
58 En Adjustments and Settings 11 Basic picture adjustments Adjust the picture to your preference unless DYNAMIC was selected. The DYNAMIC setting automatically adjusts the image. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select the desired level. ( / ) ⢠When an adjustment screen is displayed, you can also press / to change the item to be adjusted. 5 Press HOME MENU to ex it the menu. For AV source For PC source For PC source, the following screen appears: NOTE ⢠To perform advanced picture adjustments, select âÂÂPro Adjustâ in step 3 then press ENTER . For the subsequent procedures see âÂÂAdvanced picture adjustmentsâ on page 59. ⢠To rest ore the factory de faults for all items, press / to highlight âÂÂResetâ in step 3 then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ then press ENTER . Item button button Contrast F or less contrast F or more contrast Brightness F or less brig htness F or more brightness Color F or less color intensity F or more color intensity Tint Skin tones become purplish Skin tones become greenish Sharpness For less sharpness F or more sharpness Item button button Contrast F or less contrast F or more contrast Brightness F or less brig htness F or more brightness Red F or weaker red For stronger red Green F or weaker green F or stronger green Blue F or weaker blue For stronger blue Picture A V Selection Contrast Brightness Color Tint Sharpness Pro Adjust Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 Contrast 40 Picture A V Selection Contrast Brightness Red Green Blue Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 58 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
59 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Advanced picture adjustments The Plasma Display System provides various advanced functions for optimizing the picture quality. For details on these functions, see the following tables. Using PureCinema 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 Select âÂÂPureCinemaâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) 5 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠For the selectable paramete rs, refer to the table below. NOTE ⢠âÂÂStandardâ is unavailable for 480p or 720p@60 Hz or 1080p@24 Hz (HDMI) signals. ⢠âÂÂADVâ is unavailable for 1080p@24 Hz (HDMI) signals. Using Color Temp 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂColor TempâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) 6 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you have selected a desired parameter in this step, skip steps 7 and 8. ⢠An option is to apply a fine adjustment. To do this, select âÂÂManualâ first and then press and hold ENTER for at least three (3) seconds. Th e manual ad justment screen appears. Continue to step 7. 7 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 8 Select the desired lev el. ( / ) ⢠To adjust another item, press RETU RN , then repeat steps 7 and 8. ⢠Press / to select another item for adjustment. 9 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. PureCinema Automatically detects a film-ba sed source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high- definition picture quality. Selections Off Deactivat es th e P ureCinema. Standard Produces smooth an d vivid moving images (film specific ) by automatically detecting recorded image information when displaying DVD or high-defi nition images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per secon d. ADV P roduces smooth and quality moving images (as shown on theatre screens) by converting to 72 Hz when displaying DVD images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per secon d. Color Temp Adjusts the color temper ature, resulting in a better whit e balance. Selections High White with bluish tone Mid-High Intermediate to ne between High and Mid Mid Natural t one Mid-Low Intermediate tone betwe en Mid and Low Low White with reddish tone Manual Color tempe rature adju sted to your prefer ence Item button button R High Fine adjustme nt for bright portio ns F or weaker red F or stronger red G High For weaker green F or stronger green B High F or weaker b lue F or stronger blue R Low Fine adjustme nt for dark portions F or weaker red F or stronger red G Low For weaker green F or stronger green B Low F or weaker blue F or stronger blue PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 59 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
60 En Adjustments and Settings 11 Using CTI 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 S elect âÂÂCTIâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using Color Management 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂColor ManagementâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 7 Select the desired level. ( / ) ⢠To adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat steps 6 and 7. ⢠Press / to select another item for adjustment. 8 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using Color Space 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂColor SpaceâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using Intelligent Color 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂColor DetailâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂIntelligent ColorâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. CTI Color T ransient Improvem ent (CTI) provides imag es with clearer color contours. Selections Off Deactivates CTI On Activates CTI Item button button R Closer to magenta Closer to yellow Y Closer to red Closer to green G Closer to yellow Closer to cyan C Closer to gre en Closer to blue B Closer to cyan Closer to magenta M Closer to blue Closer to re d Color Management 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y R G C B M Color Space Changes t he color reprod uction spa ce. Selections 1 Optimized for vivid, vibrant color reproduction 2 S tandard color reproduction Intelligent Color Intelligen t Color (IC) au tomaticall y selects the op timum color to nes for an image. Selections Off Deactivat es Intelligent Color On Activates In telligent Color PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 60 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
61 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Eliminating noise from images 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂNRâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Choose âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâ or â BNRâÂÂ. 6 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Using the Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) functions 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂDREâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Choose âÂÂDynamic ContrastâÂÂ, âÂÂBla ck LevelâÂÂ, âÂÂACLâÂÂ, âÂÂGammaâ or âÂÂIntelli gent DREâÂÂ. 6 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. DNR Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) eliminat es video noise for cl ean, crisp images. Selections Off Deactivates DNR High Enhanced DNR Mid Standard DN R Low M oderate DNR MPEG NR MPEG NR , video noise reduction for MPE G-encoded content, elimin ates mosquito nois e (tiny irregularit ies in the imag e) from video when a DVD is played. The result is a noise-free image. Selections Off Deactivates MPEG NR High Enhanced MPEG NR Mid Standard MPEG N R Low Mod erate MPEG NR BNR Block Noise Reductio n (BNR) help s reduce mosq uito noise a ppearing in high-definition images. Selections Off Deactivates BNR On Ac tivates BN R Dynamic Contrast Dynamic Contrast (DC) emphasizes imag e contrast so that the difference between bright and dark ar eas become more distinct. Selections Off Deactivates Dynamic Cont rast High Enhanced Dynamic Contrast Mid Standard Dynamic Contrast Low Mod erate Dynamic Contra st Black Level Black Level (B L) emphasize s the dark portions of i mages so that the difference between br ight and da rk areas become more distinct. Selections Off Deactivates Black Level On Activates Black Level ACL Automatic Contrast Lim iter (ACL) automatically selects the optimum contrast for an imag e. Selections Off D eactivates ACL On Activates ACL Gamma Gamma adjusts t he image gradat ion characte ristics. Selections 1 Se lects gamma characteristics 1 2 Selects gamm a characteristics 2 3 Selects gamm a characteristics 3 Intelligent DRE Intelligent Dynamic Range Expander (DRE) optimi zes the image quality . Selections Off D eactivates Intelligent DRE On Activates Inte lligent DRE PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 61 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
62 En Adjustments and Settings 11 Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂOthersâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 5 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Choose âÂÂ3DYCâ or âÂÂI-P ModeâÂÂ. 6 Select the desired pa rameter. ( / then E NTER ) 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠In I-P Mode, th e individu al pa rameters are unavailable for 480p and 720p@60 Hz signal s. Sound adjustments Adjust the sound to your preference. See page 57. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / ) 4 Select the desired level. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore all factory defaults, press / to select âÂÂR esetâ in step 3 then press EN TER . A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ then press ENTER . 3DYC 3DY C optimizes characteristics for se parating brightness sig nals and color signals. This works for bot h video and still images. Selections Off Deactivates 3DYC High Enhanced 3D Y C Mid Standard 3DY C Low Moderate 3 DY C I-P Mode I-P Mode opti mizes conversion from interlace signals to progressive signals. This works for bo th video and still imag es. Selections 1 Optimum for video images 2 Standard setting 3 Optimum for still images Item bu tton button Tr e b l e For weaker treb le For stronger treb le Bass F or weaker bass For stronger bass Balance Decreases audio from the right speaker Decreases aud io from th e left speak er Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surr ound 0 0 Off Off 2 Sound ST ANDARD PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 62 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
63 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English FOCUS Focus shifts the sound-source direction (sound image) upward and produces clear sound contours. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂFOCUSâ . ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Front Surround Front Surround provides three-di mensional sound effects and/ or a deep, rich bass. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂFront SurroundâÂÂ. ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠(WOW) FOCUS is on and TruBass SRS is selected for Front Surround ⢠trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠WOW technology is incorpora ted under license from SRS Labs, Inc. Power Control Power Control provides conven ient power saving options. Energy Save There are three Energy Save modes to reduce power consumption. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPower Contro lâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂEnergy SaveâÂÂ. ( / then ENTE R ) 4 Select âÂÂSave1âÂÂ, âÂÂSave2â or âÂÂPicture OffâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠When the signal is coming from a PC, use the Home menu to set this option. No Signal off (AV mode only) The system automa tically enters Standby if no signal is received for 15 minutes. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂPower Contro lâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂNo Signal offâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 S elect âÂÂEnableâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Five minutes before the system is placed into Standby, a message appears as each minute counts down. ⢠The system may not enter Stan dby if the TV program signal has a high video noise level. Item Description Off Deactivates FOC US On Activates FOCUS Item Description Off Dea ctivates both SRS an d T ruBass SRS Reproduces highly effectiv e three-dimensi onal sound T ruBass (factory defa ult) P rovides deep, rich bass using a new technolog y T ruBass SRS Provides both T ruBass and SRS effect s Item Description Standard Maximum pic ture brightness; may increase glass panel buzzing Save1 Slightly reduced power co nsumption an d brightness; optimal setting fo r most uses Save2 Lowest power consumption ; slightly decreased brightne ss Picture Off Deactivates the screen to save power . T o restore the screen display , press any button other than VOL /â and MUTING . This setting is not memori zed by the system. Item Description Disabl e (factory defa ult) Does not place the system in to Standby Enable Places the system into St andby if no signal is received for 15 minutes PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 63 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
64 En Adjustments and Settings 11 No Operation off (AV mode only) The system automatically enters Standby when no operation is performed for three hours. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPower ControlâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂNo Operation offâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Five minutes before the system is placed into Standby, a message appears as ea ch minute counts down. Power Management (PC mode only) The system automatically enters St andby when no signal is received from the PC. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂPower ControlâÂÂ. ( / t hen ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPower ManagementâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂMode1â or âÂÂMode2âÂÂ. ( / then ENT ER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Image position adjustment (AV mode only) This function adjusts an imageâÂÂs horizontal/vertica l position on the Plasma Display. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂPositionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂH/ V Position AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Adjust the vertical position ( / ) or horizontal position (/) . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore the factory defaults, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4 then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ then press ENTER . ⢠Adjustments are stored separately for each input source. ⢠Depending on the d isplayed video, the image position may not change even after adjustment. Automatic image position and clock (Hertz) adjustments (PC mode only) Use Auto Setup to automaticall y adjust image positions and clock speeds when coming from a PC. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂAuto SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠Auto Setup begins. 4 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠When Auto Setup is finish ed, âÂÂAuto Setup completed.â appears. ⢠Although âÂÂAuto Setup complete d.â appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depend ing on conditio ns. ⢠Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or a monochrome pict ure. If Auto Setup fails, change the PC image and try again. ⢠The PC and the Plasma Display must be turned On before starting Auto Setup. Item Description Disable (factory d efault) Does not place the syst em into Standb y Enable Pla ces the syste m into Standby if n o operation is performed for th ree hours Item Description Off (factory d efault) No power management Mode1 ⢠Places the system into Standby when no sign al is received fr om the PC fo r eight m inutes ⢠Althoug h the PC is acce ssed and a sig nal is received again , the system stays off . ⢠P ress STANDBY /ON on the Plasma Display or TV on the re mote contro l to turn the panel On Mode2 ⢠Places the system into Standby when no sign al is received for eight seconds ⢠Access the P C (a signal is re ceived again), th e system turns On ⢠P ress STANDBY /ON on the Plasma Display or TV on the re mote contro l to turn the panel On . P osition H/V P osition Adjust Reset Option Auto Setup Manual Setup PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 64 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
65 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC mode only) Usually you can easily adjust th e positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Se tup to optimize the posit ions and clock of images when necessary. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂManual Setupâ . ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Perform adjustment. ( / or / ) ⢠With âÂÂClockâ or âÂÂPhaseâ selected, you can change the parameter using / . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠To restore all factory defaults, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4 then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select âÂÂYesâ t hen press ENTER . Selecting a screen size manually In single-screen mode, pre ss SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the screen. The Video signal determin es the available screen size options. ⢠The selectable screen sizes di ffer depending on the type of input signal. AV mode NOTE ⢠Avoid displaying signals that do not completely fill the screen. This may cause temp orary or permanent image retention depending on the frequency and duration. PC mode except for XGA signals PC mode for XGA signals (Ex. 1024 à768 input with PRO-1140HD/PRO-1540HD ) NOTE ⢠In 2-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the left screen. ⢠For the PRO-940HD the number of panel pixels is different. Signal processing and actual viewing conditions vary slightly. Manual Setup H/V P osition Adjust Clock Phase Reset 0 0 Item Description 4:3 For 4:3 âÂÂstandardâ pictures (side bar appears on each side) FULL F or 16:9 squeezed pictures ZOOM F or 16:9 letter box pictu res (bars may appear on the top and bottom on some progra ms) CINEMA For 14:9 letterbox pic tures (bars may appear on the top and bottom on some progra ms) WIDE In this mode pictures are stretch ed to fill the screen , side to side Item Description 4:3 Fills the screen without altering the input signal aspect ratio FULL F ull 16:9 screen display Dot by Dot Matches input signal to the same number of screen pixels Item Description 4:3 Matches input signal to the same number of screen pixels Optimized for 1024 à768 d isplay FULL1 F ull 16:9 screen display Optimized for 1024 à768 d isplay FULL2 F or wide signal display Use when displaying 1360 à768 signal resolution PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 65 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
66 En Adjustments and Settings 11 ⢠When watching a High Defini tion TV broadcast, press SCREEN SIZE to cycle through FULL, ZOOM, WIDE, and 4:3. ⢠High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE selected may hide some of the screen image. If this is the case, select FULL. ⢠Some HD broadcast s may display 4:3 content wi th side masks. Extended viewing with the sides masked can cause uneven wear. After viewing 4:3 content, try watching a program in full screen motion video. AV mode PC mode except for XGA signals PC mode for XGA signals NOTE ⢠The sel ectable screen sizes may d iffer depending on the conditions. Selecting a screen size automatically The Plasma Display automati cally selects an appropriate screen size when video signals are received from a connected HDMI device (s ee page 69). To activate this function, use the following procedure. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂAuto SizeâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂOn âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Manually select an appropriate sc reen size if an image does not automatically switch to the correct screen format. ⢠When the video signal contains no aspect ratio information, automatic screen sizi ng is unavailable. Selecting a screen size for 4:3 aspect rat io signals With the Auto Size function activated, choose whe ther the Plasma Display should choose the 4:3 mode or WIDE mode when 4:3 aspect ratio signals are receive d. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂ4:3 ModeâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂ4:3âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. 4:3 WIDE FULL CINEMA ZOOM 4:3 Dot by Dot FULL 4:3 FULL2 FULL1 Item Description Off (factory d efault) Deactivate s the Auto Si ze function On Activates t he Auto Size function Item Description WIDE (factory d efault) Wide im age without s ide masks 4:3 4:3 aspect ratio with side masks Auto Size Off On 4:3 Mode WIDE 4:3 4:3 WIDE PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 66 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
67 En Adjustments and Settings 11 English Changing the brightness on both sides of the screen (Side Mask) With the 4:3 screen size se lected for the AV mode, you can change the brightness of the gray vertical bars (side masks) that appear on the sides of the screen. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂSide MaskâÂÂ. ( / then E NTER ) 4 Select the desired parameter. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠Displaying pictures in 4:3 sc reen mode for an extended period may cause an after-image. View another program at full screen afterwards to avoid this issue. Language setting To change the language being used for on-screen displays (such as menus in French or Spanish instead of English), follow the instructions below. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂLanguageâ . ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select a language. ( / ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Item Description Fixed (factory defa ult) Always sets the same brightness for the gray side masks Auto Adju sts the brightness of the gra y side masks according to the brightness of im ages Language Menu English PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 67 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
68 En Using External Equipment 12 Using External Equipment About External Equipment You can connect many types of devices to your Pla sma Display System. Some examples are a DVD player, VCR, PC, game console, or camcorder. To view images com ing from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control or the INPUT button on the Plasma Display. CAUTION ⢠To protect equipment, always unplug the Plasma Display from the power outlet before adding to a DVD player, VCR, PC, game console, camcorder, or other device. NOTE ⢠Refer to the deviceâÂÂs operating i nstructions (DVD player, PC, etc.) before connecting the equipment. Watching a DVD image Connecting a DVD player Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player or other audio/visual equipment. Displaying a DVD image To watch a DVD image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2. NOTE ⢠Refer to your DVD player inst ruction manual for the signal type. ⢠The INPUT 2 terminals are checked whether they are connected in the following orde r; 1) Component Video, 2) S- Video, 3) Vi deo. Use the desired connection for viewing. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. Watching a VCR image Connecting a VCR Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a VCR or other audio/visual equipment. Displaying a V CR image To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1. NOTE ⢠INPUT 1 checks for S-Video conne ctions first then for Video. Use the desired connection for viewing. Plasma Display (rear view ) DVD player Component Video cable (sold separate ly) AV cable (sold sep arately) S-Video cable (sold separa tely) Plasma Display (rea r view) VCR S-Video cable (sold separ ately) AV cable (sold separa tely) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 68 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
69 En Using External Equipment 12 English Using HDMI Input The INPUT 5 and INPUT 6 terminals are HDMI terminals for digital video and audio signals. To use the HDMI terminal, specify the types of video and audi o signals being sent f rom the connected equipment. For signal types refer to the deviceâÂÂs operating manual. Before bringing up the menu, press INPUT 5 (or INPU T 6 ) on the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT 5 (or INPUT 6). For audio, the panel supports the following: ⢠Linear PCM (S TEREO 2ch) ⢠Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz NOTE ⢠PC signals are not supported. ⢠Images are sometimes slow to appea r with some external devices. Connecting HDMI equipment To specify the digital video signal type: 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂVideoâ . ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the type of digital video signals. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you select âÂÂAutoâÂÂ, the pane l automatically attempts to identify the type of digital video signal. 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠If you select a parameter other than âÂÂAutoâÂÂ, verify that t he setting results in th e appropriate colors. ⢠If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type. ⢠Refer to the external deviceâÂÂs ope rating instruct ions for digital video signal types. To specify the type of audio signa ls: 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂAudioâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the type of audio signals. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you select âÂÂAutoâÂÂ, the pane l automatically attempts to identify the type of audio signal. 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. NOTE ⢠If there is no sound, specify another audio signal type. ⢠Refer to the external deviceâÂÂs ope rating instruct ions for audio signal types. ⢠Depending on the equipment to be connected, you may also need to connect analog audi o cables. Input signal correlation table 1920 ïµ 1080i@59.94/60 Hz 720 ïµ 480p@59.94/60 Hz 1280 ïµ 720p@59.94/60 Hz 720(1440) ïµ 480i@59.94/60 Hz 1920 ïµ 1080p@24 Hz Plasma Display (rea r view) HDMI equipm ent HDMI cable wi th the HDMI mark (sold separately) Audio cable (sold separately) Use whe n inputtin g analog audio signals. Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Disp lay Item Description Auto (factory defa ult) Automatica lly iden tifies i nput digi tal vide o signals Color -1 Digital Comp onent Video signals (4:2: 2) locked Color -2 Digital Comp onent Video signals (4:4: 4) locked Color -3 Digital RGB signals locked Item Description Auto (factory defa ult) Automatically ident ifies input audio signals Digital Accepts digi tal audio signals Analog Accepts analog audio signals PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 69 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
70 En Using External Equipment 12 Using a game console or watching camcorder images Connecting a game console or camcorder Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder, or other audio/visual equipment. NOTE ⢠INPUT 4 checks for Component Video connections first then for Video. Use the desired connection for viewing. ⢠Only connect external equipment to terminals that are to be actually used. Displaying an image of th e game console or camcorder To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder, press INPUT 4 on the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4. Recording digital TV programs using a VCR To record, connect recording equipment such as a VCR to the panelâÂÂs MONITOR OUT terminals (rear of the Plasma Display). You can also record digital TV programs more easily by using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. Connect the supplied G- LINK cable to the G-LINK terminal on the rear of the Plasma Display. Position the G-LINK ca bleâÂÂs wand so that its light emitting section faces the re mote control sensor on the recording equipment. For more information, see page 73. Avoiding unwanted feedback You can prevent unwanted feedba ck from affecting the image quality. To block the signal from the output terminal causing interference , follow the steps below. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 S elect âÂÂMonitor O utâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂINPUT1 ProhibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT2 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT3 ProhibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT4 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT 5 Prohi bitâ or âÂÂINPUT 6 Prohib itâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Plasma Display (left side view) Camcorder/Game Console Component Video cable (sold separately) AV cable (sold separately) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 70 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
71 En Using External Equipment 12 English Connecting a recorder NOTE ⢠About the MONITOR OUT terminals The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following signals: ⢠Video signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal ⢠Video signals from a PC ⢠Digi tal video and audio signals f rom the HDMI termina ls ⢠When watching images from a VCR connected to the panelâÂÂs MONITOR OUT, select an input source (e.g., TV channel reception) on the VCR other th an an external input source. Selecting an external input source may cause distorted images or noise. ⢠Place the VCR in Standby when selecting TV programs to record using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. ⢠Using MONITOR OUT may cause delays between the speaker and AUDIO. If this delay occurs, try muting the speakers on the Plasma Disp lay. However , you may still experience some delay between audio and video. ⢠The MONITOR OUT terminals ca nnot output any signals for networked audio or video. ⢠If degraded picture quality is observed while viewing copy- protected VOD movies connect the Plasma Display directly to other TV sets. Do no t connect through a VCR. Connecting other audio equipment The panelâÂÂs digital audio output terminal (optical) can output Dolby Digital signal s. Using an optical digital cable, connect an AV receiver to the optical te r minal on the rear of the Plasma D i s p l a y . T h i s a l l o w s h i g h - q u a l i t y a u d i o , s u c h a s d u r i n g a d i g i t a l TV broadcast, to play. If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect MONITOR OUT (AUDIO) on the rear of the Plasma Display to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver. This method may cause sound de lays between the speakers and AUDIO. Try muting the speakers on the Plasma Display, however, you may still experience a de lay between audio and video. NOTE ⢠When using the digital audio ou tput terminal (optical), set according to the AV receiverâÂÂs requirements. For more information, refer to the AV re ceiverâÂÂs operating instructions. Connecting an AV receiver NOTE ⢠For details, refer to the audi o deviceâÂÂs operating instructions. ⢠The audio accompanying the im ages shown on the display is always output to the SU BWOOFER OUTPUT term inal. ⢠When signals are input from th e HDMI terminals, no digital or analog signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal. ⢠Input signals from the Home Media Gallery may cause audio delays between the speakers and OPTICAL. Try muting t he speakers on the Plasma Disp lay; however, you may still experience delays between audio and vi deo. Plasma Display (r ear view) VCR AV cable (sold separately) G-LINK cable (supplied) Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display Ferrite core Plasma Display (rea r view) AV receiver This connection is not required when connecting an AV amp equipped with surround sound to a subwoofer. Optical digital cable (sold separately) Subwoofer AV cable (sold separately) Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 71 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
72 En Using External Equipment 12 Switching the optical audio signal type Set up for the DIGITAL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL), according to your AV receiverâÂÂs operating instructions. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂDigital Audio OutâÂÂ. ( / then EN TER ) 4 S elect âÂÂDolby Digitalâ or âÂÂP CMâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Press HOME MENU again to exit the menu. Watching an image from a computer Connecting a personal computer Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer (PC). NOTE ⢠The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible. ⢠Ability to use Plug & Pla y depends on the computer. Displaying an image from a P C When connected to a PC, the input signal type is automatically identified. If the imag e from the PC does not come in clearly, you may need to use Auto Setup. See page 64. To watch an image coming from the PC, press PC on the remote control or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select âÂÂPCâÂÂ. NOTE ⢠The PC terminals are for PC use only. Do not connect audio/ visual equipment to PC terminals. Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub conn ector (front view) NOTE ⢠An Apple î Macintosh î adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Item Description Dolby Digital (factory d efault) Dolby Digital: output s in the Dolby Dig ital format PCM: outputs in the PCM format PCM Always outputs in the PCM forma t regardl ess of the types of si gnals Plasma Display (r ear view) Personal Computer RGB cable (sold separately) AV cable with a mini p lug (sold separately) (for P C audio conn ection ) Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display Pin No. Signal name 1 R 2 G 3 B 4 Not connected 5 Not connected 6 GND (ground) 7 GND (ground) 8 GND (ground) 9 5V 10 GND (ground) 11 Not connected 12 SDA 13 HD 14 VD 15 SCL 15 14 13 12 9 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 72 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
73 En Using External Equipment 12 English Computer compatibility chart G-LINK⢠connection To record with a VCR through the TV Guide On Screen⢠system, connect the VCR to the panel using the G-LINK cable. NOTE ⢠In order to use a VCR with the TV Guide On Screen⢠system, confirm the factors listed belo w. Se e âÂÂTV Guide On Screen⢠System Setupâ on page 32. ⢠The G-LINK cableâÂÂs wand must be positioned so that its light emitting section faces the VC RâÂÂs remote control sensor. ⢠The VCR is in Standby when selecting TV programs to record using the TV Guide On Screen⢠system. ⢠Avoid the cable loops whe n making the connection. Attaching the ferrite core To help prevent noise, attach the supplied ferrite core to the connector end of the G-LINK cable as shown. CAUTION ⢠Regarding the G-LINK cable, a ttach the supplied ferrite core. If you do not do this, this Plasma Display wil l not conform to mandatory FCC standards. When connecting the VCR Resolution Frequency 720 à400 70 Hz 640 à480 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 800 à600 56 Hz 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 1024 à768 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 1360 x 768 60 Hz G-LINK cable Ferrite core As close as pos sible Pull the cable slightly to take up any slack A . A Plasma Display (rea r view) AV cable (sold separately) G-LINK cable (supplied) Point to the rem ote control sensor VCR G-LINK cableâÂÂs wand Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Displa y Ferrite core PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 73 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
74 En Using External Equipment 12 Connecting control cables Connect control cables between the Plasma Display and other PIONEER equipment ha ving the logo. Th ese control cables carry command s from a Pioneer device through its remote control to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display. After the CONTROL IN terminal s have been connected, the remote control sensors on th e devi ce does not accept commands from the remote co nt rol. Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display to operate the dev ice. NOTE ⢠Make sure that the power is turned Off when connecting cables. ⢠Connect all components before plugging cables into the panel. About SR The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Plasma Display supports SR . This terminal supports linked operations with a PIONEER AV receiver. SR includes functions such as input switch linkage operation and DSP surround display. For more information, see the Pi oneer AV receiverâÂÂs operating instructions regarding SR support. NOTE ⢠When connecting control cables, use the SR cable. ⢠When connecting one or more Pioneer devices, directly connect the Plasma Display and an SR supported Pioneer amplifier. Do not daisychain other equipment between the Pioneer units. ⢠When operating devices using SR , volume on the P lasma Display is lowered temporarily. Plasma Display (re ar view) CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT When SR is not used: Use mono soun d control cables with mini plugs, no resistance (sold separately) When SR is used: Use the SR cable (sold as an option). PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 74 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
75 En Using External Equipment 12 English Enjoying the Home Media Gallery With Home Media Gall ery, you can enjoy di gital content such as movies, music and photo files. These files can be saved on one or more media servers co nnected by a home network (LAN) or from content stored on U SB devices. After connecting via an Ethernet hub to a media se rver with network software*, you can navigate through the serverâÂÂs digital content using the Plasma Display. For US B interface, the Plasma Display supports Mass Storage Class devices. * Referred to as a âÂÂmedia serve râ that contains digital content such as movies, music and p hoto files. PCs that have pre- installed media server software and re corders with a media server function are considered the media server. Us e PCs that have a Windows Medi a Connect (WMC) ser ver or DLNA compliant server for the Ho me Media Gallery functio n. Take a Windows Media Connect (WMC) server for exa mple: Microsoft Media Server is freeware and works with any music juke-box type software, although is optimized for Windows Media Player. Installing Windows M edia Connect Before installing Windows Me dia Connect, make sure that Windows XP SP2 and other requir ed software are installe d. See Microsoft Website for details re garding minimum system requirements and installation procedures. 1 Download the most recent version of Windows Media Player This can be downloaded either directly from the Microsoft Website, or using the Windows Update Installer. 2 Download the most recent Windows Media Connect software This can be downloaded either directly from the Microsoft Website, or using the Windows Update Installer. Supported file formats The table below shows supported file formats that can be played back or displayed on th e Plasma Display. These formats are applicable to both netw ork and USB sources. However, media server content protected by digital rig hts manage ment, such as WMDRM10 (Digital Ri ghts Management for Windows Media 10), may not play on the Plasma Display. ⢠Some formats may not be s upported depending on the server type or version used. ⢠Even with the format included in the above table, some functions may not operate pr operly depending on the content. ⢠Even with the format included in the above tab le, some files may not be played properly through a USB device. NOTE ⢠Content may not play or disp lay properly depending on the conditions of use. ⢠Sources for this panel includ e media servers that support DLNA (Digital Living Ne twork Alliance ) and Windows Media Connect (WMC) running on the LAN network, or SD Card, MS, MMC, xD Picture and CF th at comply with the Mass Storage File System through a USB interface. ⢠Supported formats and contents are subject to change. Visit the Pioneer website for updated information: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com ⢠The Home Media Gallery f unctions as a WMDRM10-ND (Microsoft Windows Media DR M for networke d device s). Content can only be navi gated from the media servers that support WMDRM10-ND. ⢠The system may not be able to display content from incompatible memory cards. ⢠You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until dimmed elements on the menu screen turn white. Digital Audi o Output termina l (Optical) NOTE ⢠When using the optical output te rminal for networked audio or video: If the Plasma Display and audio system are in the same room, you may experience an audi o delay between the plasma speakers and the audio sy stem. Try muti ng the speake rs on the Plasma Display to correct this delay. However, this action may cause delays between audio and video. Type of files Format Movie MPEG PS (mpg, mpeg, mpe, m2p), MPEG-2 TS/T TS, WMV (asf , wmv), MPEG4 (mp4) Music MP3 (mp3), LPCM, W A V (wav), WMA (asf , wma) Photo JPEG (jpg, jpeg), BMP (bmp), PNG (png), TI FF (tif , tiff), GIF (gif) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 75 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
76 En Using External Equipment 12 Making network connections To connect to a network, se t up the Home Media Gallery through the panelâÂÂs menu. Conne ct to a home network (LAN) via an Ethernet hub or cable directly to a media server. NOTE ⢠Although the Home Media Gallery supports 10BASE-T, it is better to use 100BASE-TX for improved display qualit y and speed. Connecting via an Ethernet hub If you already operate one or more media servers on a local area network (LAN), connect the Plasma Display to the Ethernet (LAN) hub using a st andard (âÂÂstraight-throughâÂÂ) Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diagram below. Connecting directly to a Media Server To run a PC as a media server , connect the Plasma Display directly to the PC using a twisted (âÂÂcross-overâÂÂ) Ethernet (LAN) cable. See the diag ram below. Confirming the IP Address After making the network connection, follow the instructions below to confirm the panelâÂÂs IP Address before accessing the network. (The setup is effective for âÂÂAutoâ only. To perform the procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be valid.) 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then EN TER ). 3 S elect âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂNetwork Setupâ ( / then ENTE R ). 5 Select âÂÂAutomatically acquir e IPâ ( / / / then ENTER ). ⢠The screen turns from âÂÂSel ectâ mode to âÂÂInputâ mode. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The IP Address is autom atically assigned. ⢠The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If t he system failed to acquir e the IP Addre ss or if you want to obtain different addresses, select âÂÂN oâ then enter âÂÂIP Addressâ and âÂÂSubnet maskâÂÂ. Use the 0 to 9 a n d /// buttons to enter an address, then press ENTER . You do not need to enter âÂÂDefault Gatewayâ and âÂÂDNS ServerâÂÂ. 7 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The âÂÂResetâ dialog appears on screen. 8 Select âÂÂOKâ and press ENTER . ⢠The home network module restarts. ⢠A message âÂÂSe tting up Home Media Gallery. Please wait until initialized.â appears on screen. ⢠When the initialization is finished, setting values become effective and the to p menu of the Home Media Gallery returns. NOTE ⢠For information on DHCP, refer to network deviceâÂÂs operating instructions. ⢠You may need to contact your service provider or network administrator when manually entering an IP Address. ⢠Some medi a servers block or are program med to block access to client servers. When connecting the Plasma Display, check th e media server for client server access rights. Connecting a USB device You can also enjoy content store d on memory cards by connecting a USB device to the Plasma Display. When you insert a USB memory or multi-card reader into the USB port, the root directory or the Device Li st screen appears. In addition, you can connect your digital came ra directly to the Plas ma Display using a USB connector cable. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then EN TER ). 3 Select âÂÂUSBâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The Device List is displayed on screen with the selected device highlighted if you have not checke d in the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ box after select ing âÂÂSetupâ and then âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ. If you have checked in the box, the list is skipped. Media Server 2 Viewed from the bottom of the Plasma Display Media Server 1 Plasma Display (rear view ) Ethernet Hub (Router with hub function ) Straight-through Cable Plasma Display (rear view) Viewed fr om the bottom of the Plasma Display Cross-over Cable Media Server 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 76 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
77 En Using External Equipment 12 English 4 Select the desired device ( / then ENTER ). ⢠You can select a device only when the Device List is displayed. 5 Press ENTER to navigate to a folder or play a file/content. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠If the Home Media Gallery is launched and the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ b ox is checked aft e r selecting âÂÂSetupâ and then âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ, the system displays the root directory immediatel y after inserting a USB device. In thi s case, you can start from step 5. When a multi-card reader is inserted, the Device List appe ar s with the se lected devi ce highlighted. In this case, you can start from step 4. Readable memory cards This system reads FAT12, FAT16, F AT32, or VFAT Mem ory Cards. Readable data files Movie, music and photo files can also be played with the exception of Digital Rights Management for Windows Media 10 (DRM) protected files. NOTE ⢠A single USB device can be co nnected at a time and no USB hub connected. ⢠This system may not be able to display modified or edited content from a PC or other equipment. ⢠This system supports the USB Mass Storage Class. ⢠Some digital cameras may re quire a setup procedure for Mass Storage Class data transfer. The setup is done on the camera. See the operating instructions supplied with the digital camera. Removing a USB device T o r e m o ve a US B de v ic e , e x it t h e Home Media Gallery first and then disconnect the device. NOTE ⢠Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before removing the USB device. If you remove the USB device while the Home Media Gallery scre en is displayed, data inside the memory may be damaged. ⢠Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after the system is switched On or Off. This action may cause data inside the memory to be damaged. ⢠PIONEER is not liable for any loss or damage to the d ata inside the USB memory. Starting the Home Media Gallery function 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S elect âÂÂMedia Na vigatorâÂÂ, âÂÂUS B âÂÂ, âÂÂMy Playlistâ or âÂÂSetupâ (/ t h e n ENTER ). ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 4 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Navigating the files and folders By selecting Media Navigator, th e prev iously selected server menu is automa tically di splayed on the screen by d efault (page 90). When only one server is found, the system automatically connects the server. You can also use the Tool Menu to switch to another server or manually se lect a server from the Server List. The displ ay is automati cally changed to a server li st if there are no previously navigated servers. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S elect âÂÂMedia Na vigatorâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A server menu appears. Th e fi le/folder configuration may vary depending on the server selected. ⢠After selecting a category , folder or container and navigating on subsequent sc reens, you can find a file and start the appropriate Pl ayer depending on the selected file. 4 Select the desired f older to navi gate or file/content to play (/ o r / t h e n ENTER ). 5 Press ENTER to display a subsequent screen. ⢠Subsequent screen(s) appears. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 6 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Plasma Display USB flash memory Digital Camera with USB Mass Storage Class Flash media via USB adapte r (Mu lti-card Reader ) Media Navigator USB My Playlist Setup Server XXXXXX Home Media Gallery 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 77 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
78 En Using External Equipment 12 Selectable screen display Menu display options are: âÂÂLi stâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumb nail ListâÂÂ. Press D then select âÂÂChange viewâ from the Tool Menu to choose from the screen display options. Using th e Tool M enu Press D on the remote control to access the pop-up Tool Menu. Various play and display modes ca n be selected from the Tool Menu. The selectable menu items differ depending on the submenu (see the table below). * 1 When a file is selected * 2 While music is played Menu items Func tion Screen on which Tool Menu is available Update to Latest Informati on Updates the ser ver connection s tatus Server List (connected/ not connected) Delete Serv er Delete s the ser ver (s) that are dimme d on the list Server List (ser ver not connected) USB Devices List Moves to the USB Devices List screen F older Contents List (USB)/Contents List (USB) Consecutive Playback*1 Continuously plays video content starting from the selected item Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Detailed Display*1 Displays the deta iled information on the selected content Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Sort Sorts items in Folder or Contents List Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Search Searches the desire d items in F older or Contents List by word F older Contents List/ Contents List Til X All X Da 2 Se X XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX List Thumbnail Thunbnail List All Photos Add to My Playlist Change view Sort Search Slide Show Settings Detailed Display Select Searver Stop Music 1/27 1 Tool D XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX All Photos 1/27 1 Tool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/19 Server XXXXXX Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/19 Server XXXXXX All Photos 1/27 1 Tool D XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX All Photos 1/27 1 Tool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/19 Server XXXXXX List screen Thumbnail screen Thumbnail List screen Slide Show Setu p Used to set up a s lide- show on the Photo Player Server List/Media Navigator/ USB/My Playlist/Playlist List (Movie/Music/Photo)/ F older Contents List/ Contents List/Ph oto Player Add to My Playlist *1 Adds the selected files to My Playlist Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List/Movie Player/Music Player/Photo Player Select Serve r Moves to the Server List screen Media Navigat or/Folder Contents List/Contents List Stop Musi c*2 St ops playback of a music file Media Navigato r/ Playlist List (Movie/ Music/ Photo)/F older Co ntents List/Contents List/Music Player/Photo Player Change Name Used to change content names in My Playlist Playlist List (Movie/ Music/Photo) Change view Switches the screen display to List, Thumbnail, or Thumbnail List F older Contents List/ Contents List Time Search Starts pla yback at the preset time on the Movie or Music Player screen Movie Player/Music Player Slow Playback Pla ys back in the slow mode on the Movie o r Music s creen Movie Player/Music Player BGM Setup Used to set up th e slide- show BGM on the Ph oto Player Photo Player Move Moves the order of content in My Playlist Contents List (Playlist) Delete from My Playlist* 1 Deletes the selected content from My Playlist Contents List (Playlist) Menu items Func tion Screen on which Tool Menu is available PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 78 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
79 En Using External Equipment 12 English Media Navigator While navigating thro ugh the folders a medi a server provides, you can select the desired file to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER . Screen Components 1 Thumbnail of the file se lected (if obtained) 2 Name of the server c urrently selected 3 Current menu level 4 Item being selected (highl ighted in yellow) 5 File number/total number of files 6 Number of servers connected 7 Key gu ide NOTE ⢠The Media Navigator is no t launched depending on the option selected in âÂÂAuto Co nnection Setupâ (page 90) . The screen displays after selecting a server in the server list. USB Like navigating thro ugh the media servers, you can select the desired file co ntained in the device selected on the USB Devices List screen to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER . You can also select the menu displayed on either âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ scree n. Press D and select âÂÂChange viewâ from the Tool Menu. NOTE ⢠The USB Devices List scre en may not be displayed depending on the option selected in âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ. âÂÂSingle S erver/USBâ is select ed for âÂÂAuto Connection Setupâ by default. You don't need to select a device in the USB Devices Li st when you use a single directory d evice (USB memo ry). My Playlist Each category (Movie, Music an d Photo) has five different Playlists in which you can regi st er up to 100 files each. The My Playlist option can contain sound and image fil es selected in the âÂÂMedia NavigatorâÂÂ. To edit a Playlist, use the Tool Menu (page 78). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 S elect âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMy Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 S elect a Playlist list from âÂÂMovie PlaylistâÂÂ, âÂÂM usic Playlistâ or âÂÂPhoto Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 5 Select the desired content ( / or / then ENTER ). ⢠The menu can be displayed as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select âÂÂChange viewâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). 6 Press ENTER to play or display. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Enjoying movie files You can display the menu as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select an option under âÂÂChange viewâ on the Tool Me nu. You can also navigate through the subsequent or precedi ng menu levels in the server o r U S B d e v i c e b y p r e s s i n g//// ENTER . When you select movie content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen, the Movie Play er automatically launche s. Select a category, folder, or device to access the submenu containing the required file or content. The Movie Player screen appears when you select a movie file from My Playlist, just like se lecting a file in the server. Screen Components 1 Movie ic on 2 Title (Category or Folder name) 3 Da te 4 Album name 5 Play time 6 Play status 7 Key gu ide 8 Progress bar 9 Audio mode icon 10 A-B repeat mode icon 11 Repeat mode icon 12 Random mode icon (appears when the mode is valid) Movie Music Photos User Files Media Navigator 1/4 1 Tool D Title Movie Server XXXXXX 4 5 6 1 3 7 2 T ool D Random C Repeat B A-B A XXXX XXXX 2006/11/30 00:00:59 Playback 00 : 00 : 45 L R A -B RDM 5 10 12 13 4 8 9 11 7 6 2 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 79 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
80 En Using External Equipment 12 Movie Play er key guid e NOTE ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used. ⢠During playback, an error may arise in time-related information depending on the content or server software. ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the content. Time Sear ch 1 In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select âÂÂTime Searchâ from the Tool M enu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂTime Searchâ dialog screen appears. 2 Select âÂÂHourâ and/or âÂÂMinuteâ for âÂÂInput Timeâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Enter the desired ti me using buttons 0 to 9 . 3 Press ENTER after the entry is complete. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The movie begins playing from the time you set. ⢠To cancel the Time Search, select âÂÂCancelâ and press ENTER . ENTER: P a uses while playback or plays back while in P AUSE : F ast reverse during playback or whe n in P AUSE. Each press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100 or the slo w mode speed be tween x 1/2, x 1/4, x 1/8, and x 1/16. When the beginning of the content is re ached, it pa uses. : F ast forward while playbac k or P A USE. Each press toggles the for ward speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20 , x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed betw een x 1/16, x 1/8, x 1/4, and x 1/ 2. When the end of the co ntent is reached, it pauses. : Skips 15 seconds backward a nd plays back or pauses while in P A USE : Skips 15 seconds forward an d plays back or pauses while in P A USE ï¤ (PLA Y): Plays back th e content ïÂÂ¥ (P AU SE): P auses the playback ï§ (STOP): Stops the Player and returns t o the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List) ï® (FF): Same as (only fast forward function whil e in the slow mode) ï (RWD): Same as (only fast reverse fun ction while in the slow mode) A (BLUE): Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired po int A to start and B to end during playb ack. T o can cel the mode, press A (BLUE) on the remote cont rol. B (RED): Every press toggles the repeat mode between âÂÂN o Repeat â and âÂÂR epeat Onceâ or be tween âÂÂNo R epeatâÂÂ, âÂÂRepeat Onceâ and âÂÂR epea t Allâ while in Playlist C (GREEN): Available only in P laylist or âÂÂConsecutive Playbackâ mode. Ever y press to ggles the rand om mode between âÂÂRandom Off â and âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. D (YELLOW): Switches the T ool Menu displa y on and off . Even if the T ool Menu is dis played while content is played back, a movie is kept playing but th e time counter and progress bar do not funct ion. INFO: Displays the Player status at th e bottom of th e screen while a movie is played back . Another press of the key displays a key guide, as well. P ressing the key once more canc els all the informat ion display. MTS: Ever y press of the key toggles the audio mode between âÂÂL RâÂÂ, âÂÂL â and âÂÂRâ RETURN: Same function as STOP VOL , VOL-: Adjusts the sound volume MUTING: Mutes the sound HOME MENU: Quit th e Home Medi a Gallery and returns t o the last entr y screen. R esumes the con tent selected again on the Home Medi a Galler y. Play modes Time Se arch (T ool Menu) Plays back the selected content from the time preset on the Movie Player Slow Playback (T ool Menu) Plays back the content in slow mode on the Movie or Music Player Add to My Playlist (T ool Menu) Adds the selected content to My Playlist List (Not available while movie cont ent in the Play list is played back.) Stop Movie Player ï§ (STOP), RETURN Stops the Movie Player F ast F or ward/ F ast R everse /, ï / ï® See the key g uide table For w a r d / Rev er s e (15 sec.) / See the key g uide table Play ENTER, ï¤ (PLAY) See the key g uide table A-B Repeat Mode A (BLUE) See the ke y guide tabl e Rep ea t Mo de B (RED) See the key guide table Ran do m Mode C (GREEN) See the key g uide table (T ool Menu) D (YE LLOW) See the key g uide table Time Search OK Cancel Input Time HM i n 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 80 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
81 En Using External Equipment 12 English 5 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠This function may not be supported depending on the content or server software. ⢠An error may arise in time-related information depending on the content or server software. Slow Playback 1 In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select âÂÂSlow Playbackâ from the Tool Menu. 2 Press ENTER . ⢠Slow playback begins. ⢠You can change the playback speed by pressing / while in the slow mode. ⢠To discontinue slow playback, press ENTER or PLAY . The system returns to th e normal playback mode. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠This function may not be supported depending on the content. Add to My Playlist 1 While navigating or playing, se lect the file to be added to M y P l a y l i s t (/// t h e n ENTER ). 2 Press D then select âÂÂAdd to My Playli stâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂPlaylist Selectionâ dialog screen appears. 3 Select a Playli st ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A check mark is provid ed beside the selected Playlist. ⢠When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER , the mark jumps to the new Play list from the previously selected one. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The file is added to the selected Pl aylist. ⢠To cancel the operation, select âÂÂCancelâ then press ENTER . 5 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Fast Forwa rd/Fast Reverse 1 While playing content, press and hold for Fast Reverse or press and hold for Fast Forward. Forward/Reverse (15 sec.) 1 While playing content, press and hold or to jump backward or forward in 15-second increments. A-B Repeat Mode 1 While playing content, press A where you want repeat to start. 2 Press A again where you want repeat to end. ⢠The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B mode icon changes. ⢠The selected movie scenes ar e repeatedly played back. ⢠To return to normal mode, press A again while in the A-B repeat mode. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in normal mode. Repeat Mode 1 While playing content in the Media Navigator or USB device, press B to select âÂÂRepeat OnceâÂÂ. ⢠The title being pl ayed is repeated. 2 Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (âÂÂR epeat Offâ is selected). ⢠After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠When playing content in the Playlist, you can select from âÂÂRepeat OffâÂÂ, âÂÂRepeat Al lâ (plays all items i n the Playlist repeatedly) or âÂÂRepeat Onceâ (plays the content being watched repeatedly). Random Mode 1 While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. ⢠Random Repeat playback start s. 2 Press C again to cancel the rand om mode (âÂÂRandom Offâ is selected). 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠The Random Repeat mode is on ly avai lable for content in the Playlist, or in âÂÂConse cutive Playbackâ m ode. Playlist1 20 Playlist2 0 Playlist3 0 Playlist4 0 Playlist5 0 Playlist Selection OK Cancel Select a Playlist to register PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 81 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
82 En Using External Equipment 12 Enjoying music files You can display the menu as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select an option under âÂÂChange viewâ on the Tool Me nu. You can also navigate through the subsequent or precedi ng menu levels in the server o r U S B d e v i c e b y p r e s s i n g //// ENTER . When you select music content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen, the Music Player automatically launches. Select a category, folder, or device to acce ss the submenu containing the required file or content. The Music Player screen appears when you select a music file from My Playlist, just like selecting a fi le in the server. NOTE ⢠The Music Player only displays a âÂÂListâ screen. Screen Components 1 Title (Category or Folder name) 2 Jacket image (Music icon) 3 Mu sic status icon 4 Contents list 5 Number of items 6 Detailed display 7 Play status 8 Time counter 9 Key guide 10 Progress bar 11 A-B repeat mode ico n 12 Repeat mode icon 13 Random mode icon Music Player key guide NOTE â¢F i l e s m a y n o t b e played back properly depending on the content. RDM XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX All Music 2/20 XXXX XXXX XXXX 00:01:00 Other T ool D Random C Repeat B A-B A Playback 00 : 00 : 14 A-B 5 13 13 4 10 8 11 12 9 7 2 6 : Moves up a curso r to a title above : Moves down a cursor to a title below ENTER: Plays back the selected mu sic content. P auses the music content being played if it is highlighted in th e Playlist screen or pla ys the selected music content if different c ontent is highlight ed by pressi ng / . : F ast reverse during playback or whe n in P AUSE. Each press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the be ginning of the content is reached, it pauses. : F ast forward duri ng playback or when in P AUSE. Each press toggles the forw ard speed betwee n x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100. When th e end of the content is reached, it pauses. RETURN: Returns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List). Conte nt being p layed does not stop. ï¤ (PLA Y): Plays back th e selected content. P ause s while in playback and plays while in P A USE. ïÂÂ¥ (P AU SE): P auses the playback ï§ (STOP): Stops the Player and does n ot return to the pr evious screen (Selec ting the âÂÂSto p Musicâ from the T ool Menu also stops the Playe r .) ï® (FF): Same as ï (RWD): Same as A (BLUE): Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired po int A to start and B to end during playb ack. T o can cel the mode, press A (BLUE) on the remote cont rol. B (RED): Every press toggles the repeat mode between âÂÂN o RepeatâÂÂ, âÂÂRepeat Onceâ and âÂÂR epeat Allâ C (GREEN): Every press toggles the random mode between âÂÂRandom Off â and âÂÂRandom Onâ D (YELLOW): Displays the T ool Menu. Even if the T ool Menu is displayed while conte nt is played back, music is kept playing but t he time counter and p rogress bar do not function . P AGE , P AGE-: Available only when th ere are one or more pages in the content. Change the pa ges back and fo rth. VOL , VOL-: Adjusts the sound volume MUTING: Mutes the sound HOME MENU: Quit th e Home Medi a Gallery and returns t o the last entr y screen PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 82 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
83 En Using External Equipment 12 English ⢠Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for the Movie Player. ⢠Refer to page 78 for the color button D (Tool Menu). NOTE ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used. A-B Repeat Mode 1 While playing content, press A where you want repeat to start. 2 Press A again where you want repeat to end. ⢠The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B repeat mode icon changes. ⢠The selected part of the titl e is repeatedly played back. ⢠To return to normal mode, press A again while in the A-B repeat mode. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. NOTE ⢠The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in normal mode. Repeat Mode 1 While playing content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device or Playlist, press B to select âÂÂRepeat AllâÂÂ. ⢠All titles in the folder or Playlist are played repeatedly. 2 Press B again to cancel t he repeat mode (âÂÂRepeat Onceâ is selected). ⢠The title being pl ayed is repeated. 3 Press B once more to cancel th e repeat mode (âÂÂRepeat Offâ is selected). ⢠After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops. 4 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Random Mode 1 While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. ⢠Random Repeat playback start s. 2 Press C again to cancel the rand om mode (âÂÂRandom Offâ is selected). 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Enjoying photo files You can display the menu as a âÂÂListâÂÂ, âÂÂThumbnailâ or âÂÂThumbnail Listâ screen. Press D then select an option under âÂÂChange viewâ on the Tool Me nu. You can also navigate through the subsequent or precedi ng menu levels in the server o r U S B d e v i c e b y p r e s s i n g //// ENTER . When you select photo content from the server menu on the Media Naviga tor screen, the Photo Play er automatically launches. The selected content is displayed in full screen by pressing ENTER . Select a category, folder or device to acce ss the submenu containing the required file or content. Pressing ENTER again allows a slides how to begin. After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles be tween âÂÂPLAYâ and âÂÂPAUSEâÂÂ. Inst ead of pressing ENTE R twice, you can press PLAY to start the slideshow immediately. The Photo Player screen appears when you select a photo file from My Playlist, just like se lecting a file in the server. Screen Components 1 Photo icon 2 Title (Category or Folder name) 3 Album name 4 Da te 5 Number of items 6 Play status 7 Key gu ide 8 Progress bar 9 Repeat mode icon 10 Random mo de icon Play modes Add to My Playlist (T ool Menu) Add s the selected content to My Playlist List (Not availa ble while music content is played back.) Time Search (T ool Menu) Plays back the selected content from the ti me preset on the Music Player Stop Music ( T ool Menu), ï§ (STOP) Stops the Music Player Fa s t F o r w a r d / F ast Reverse /, ï / ï® See the key guide ta ble Moves Up/Down a cursor / See the key guide ta ble Play ENTER, ï¤ (PLAY) See the key guide ta ble A-B Repeat Mode A (BLUE) Se e the key guide tabl e Rep ea t Mo de B (RED) Se e the key guide tabl e Ran do m Mode C (GREEN) See the key guide ta ble (T ool Menu) D (YELLOW) See the key guide ta ble T ool D Random C Repeat B XXXX XXXX 2006/11/30 Playback 6 / 27 RDM 4 10 9 13 8 7 5 6 2 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 83 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
84 En Using External Equipment 12 Photo Play er key guide ⢠Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for the Movie Player. ⢠Refer to page 78 for the color button D (Tool Menu). NOTE ⢠Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used. ⢠In rare cases, the image on the screen may appear jagged when photo content is selected directly from a USB device. If this is the case, the problem may be solved by viewing the photo content through the netw ork after having transferred it to the server PC. ⢠Even with the supported forma t, files may not be played properly depending on the content. Setting u p the slides how You can enjoy a slideshow with music in the background. To activate this feature, you must register music content in My Playlist List before hand (see âÂÂMy Playlistâ on page 79 and âÂÂSetting up BGMâ on page 85). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMedia Nav igatorâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Press D . ⢠A pop-up screen of the Tool Menu appears. 5 Select âÂÂSlide Show Setupâ ( / then ENTER ). 6 Select the desired setup item ( / then ENTER ). 7 Enter the setting in the âÂÂEffectâ or âÂÂIntervalâ box ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter another setup. ENTER: Starts disp laying a phot o or playing a slideshow . P auses while playba ck or pla ys back while in P AUSE. RETURN: Stops the Player and re turns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List) , : Displays the previous image content , : Display the next image content ï¤ (PLA Y): Plays a slidesh ow ïÂÂ¥ (P AU SE): P auses the slideshow ï§ (STOP): Stops the Player and returns t o the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/ Thumbnail List) ï® (FF): R otates the ima ge 90ú clockwise. Each press toggle s the rotation angle by 90ú between 90ú, 1 80ú, 270ú and 0ú. ï (RWD): Rota tes the image 9 0ú counter -clockwise. Each press toggles the rot ation angle by 90ú be tween 270ú, 180ú, 90ú, and 0ú. A (BLUE): Rotates the image 90ú clockwise. Each press toggle s the rotation angle by 90ú between 90ú, 1 80ú, 270ú and 0ú. B (RED): Every press toggles the repeat mode between âÂÂN o Repeatâ and âÂÂR epeat Allâ C (GREEN): Every press toggles the random mode between âÂÂRandom Off â and âÂÂRandom Onâ D (YELLOW): Displays the T ool Menu. If the T ool Menu is displayed while a slides how is played, th e slideshow and BGM are paused. INFO: Displays the Player status at th e bottom of th e screen while image content is play ed . Another press of the key displays a key guide, as well. No Player information is displayed when an image is sh own in full screen (no slideshow has been starte d). Other info rmation may display . P r essing the key once more cancel s all the information display . VOL , VOL-: Adjusts the sound volume MUTING: Mutes the sound HOME: Replaced by the Home Menu ke y . Quit the Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry screen. Play modes BGM Setup (T ool Menu) Sets up BGM Slide Show Setup (T ool Menu) Allows various slideshow setups on the Photo pla yer Add to My Playlist (T ool Menu) Adds the sele cted content to My Playlist List (Not availa ble while photo cont ent is disp layed.) Stop Photo Player ï§ (STOP), RETURN Stops the Photo Pl ayer Move File F orward/ Backward ( / //) See the key guide ta ble Slideshow ENTER, ï¤ (PLAY) See the key guide ta ble Rotate A (BLUE), ï / ï® See the key guide ta ble Rep ea t Mo de B (RED) See th e key guide tabl e Ran do m Mode C (GREEN) Se e the key guide tabl e (T ool Menu) D (YE LLOW) See the key guide tabl e Slide Show Setup Effect OK Cancel Interval 3 seconds Auto PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 84 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
85 En Using External Equipment 12 English 8 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The slideshow setup finishes. NOTE ⢠After setting the âÂÂIntervalâ time, it may take longer than the preset time until the next image is obtained. Starting the slideshow 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select photo content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device o r M y P l a y l i s t ( /// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The photo content is di splayed in full scre en. 4 Press ENTER or ï¤ (Play) to start a slideshow. ⢠The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically display one by one. See âÂÂSetting up the slideshowâ (page 84 ) for se tting up the interval time. ⢠To display a key guide, press INFO . 5 Press ENTER or ïÂÂ¥ (Pause) to stop the slideshow. ⢠The Photo Player goes i nto âÂÂPAUSEâ . 6 Press ENTER agai n to resume the slideshow. ⢠To cancel the slideshow and stop the P hoto Player, press RETURN or ï§ (Stop) during the playback. The previous screen returns. NOTE ⢠W h e n y o u p r e s s ///, ï /ï® while photo content is displayed, the Photo Player goes into âÂÂPAUSEâÂÂ. Setting up BGM 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select photo content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device o r M y P l a y l i s t ( /// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The Photo Player launches and photo content is displayed in full screen. 4 Press D th en se le ct âÂÂB GM Se t upâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂBGM Setupâ dialog screen appears. 5 Select a Playlist from the l ist as BGM ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A check mark is provid ed beside the selected Playlist. ⢠When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER , the mark jumps to the new Play list from the previously selected one. 6 Select âÂÂBGM ONâÂÂ, âÂÂBGM ON (R andom)â or âÂÂBGM OFFâ from the BGM status box ( / then ENTER ). 7 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). Rotating t he imag e 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select photo content in the Medi a Navigator, USB device o r M y P l a y l i s t ( /// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The photo content is di splayed in full scre en. ⢠To stop the slideshow, press ENTER again. 4 Press ENTER or ï¤ (Play) to start a slideshow. ⢠The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically display one by one. ⢠To display a key guide, press INFO . 5 While using Photo Player, press A to rotate a photo. ⢠The displayed image rotates by one quarte r clockwise. Each time A is pressed, the image rotates; 90ú, 180ú, 270ú and âÂÂR otate OffâÂÂ. ⢠The Photo Player goes into âÂÂPAUSEâ (the sl ideshow is in Stop mode). 6 Press ENTER agai n to resume the slideshow. ⢠The selected rotatio n mode is only eff ective fo r the image being displayed. The default setti ng (âÂÂRotate OffâÂÂ) returns when you move an d display content on a different screen. Repeating the slideshow 1 While playing a slideshow, press B to select âÂÂRepeat OnceâÂÂ. ⢠The slideshow being played is repeated. 2 Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (âÂÂRepe at Offâ is selected). ⢠After playing the currently selected slideshow, the Player stops. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Playing the slideshow at random 1 While playing a slideshow, press C to select âÂÂRandom OnâÂÂ. ⢠Random Repeat playback start s. 2 Press C again to cancel the rand om mode (âÂÂRandom Offâ is selected). 3 Press HOME MENU to exit the Home Media Gallery. Playlist1 20 Playlist2 0 Playlist3 0 Playlist4 0 Playlist5 0 BGM Setup BGM ON OK Cancel PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 85 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
86 En Using External Equipment 12 Other useful functions Search You can search the desired item s contained in the Folder or Contents List by word. Searched results are displayed on the screen. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select the de sired folder and/or content in the Media N a v i g a t o r ( /// t h e n ENTER ). 4 Press D then select âÂÂSearchâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A âÂÂSearchâ dialog screen appears. 5 Select the âÂÂContains the followingâ box in âÂÂSe t the search condition:â ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The software keyboard appears on the screen. 6 Enter the word for search on the software keyboard ( / // t h e n ENTER ). 7 Select âÂÂOKâ on the soft ware keyboard ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The software ke yboard disappears. ⢠To cancel the search, select âÂÂCancelâ then press ENTER . 8 Select âÂÂOKâ o n the âÂÂSearchâ dialog screen ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The searching sta rts based on th e word entered a nd search result s are displayed . ⢠Even while searching, you can select content to play. To return to the search screen, press RETURN during playback. 9 Press RETURN to cancel the search mode. Sort You can sort the items contained in the Folder or Contents List. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select the de sired folder and/or content in the Media N a v i g a t o r ( /// t h e n ENTER ). 4 Press D then select âÂÂSortâ from the Tool Menu ( / then ENTER ). â¢A â S o r t â d i a l o g screen appears. 5 Select âÂÂBottom-Upâ or âÂÂTop-Downâ in the âÂÂSort Orderâ box (/ t h e n E NTER ). 6 Select âÂÂOKâ on the âÂÂSortâ dialog screen ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The sorting starts based on your selection and sort results are displayed. ⢠Even while sorting, you can select content to play. To return to the sort screen, press RETURN during playback. 7 Press RETURN to cancel the sort m ode. NOTE ⢠The âÂÂSelect a sorting orde r.â screen can be displayed while navigating through the music categories. Adding files to My Playlist The Home Media Gallery function provides âÂÂMy Playlistâ - a self- contained play list that allows you to bookmark your favorite movie, music and photo files from the network. You can register, edit, and sort up to 100 fi les in each Playlist List. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMedia Nav igatorâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select the desired music cont ent to add to âÂÂMy Playli stâ (/ t h e n ENTER ). 5 Press D to open the Tool Me nu. ⢠A dialog screen appears. 6 Press ENTER . ⢠A check mark is provided in t he box at the selected Playlist List. 7 Press to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ. 8 Press ENTER . ⢠The selected conte nt is added to the Playli st. 9 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gall ery. XXXX 1/24 1 T ool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/30 Play Time 00:00:59 Server XXXXXX Search Contains the following: Title Set the search condition. OK Cancel XXXX 1/24 1 T ool D Title XXXX Album XXXX Date 2006/11/30 Play Time 00:00:59 Server XXXXXX Sort Bottom-Up Sort Order Title Select a sorting order. OK Cancel Playlist1 20 Playlist2 0 Playlist3 0 Playlist4 0 Playlist5 0 Playlist Selection Select a Playlist to register OK Cancel PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 86 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
87 En Using External Equipment 12 English Setup The âÂÂSetupâ is used for âÂÂNet work SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂDefault Settingsâ , âÂÂSoftware Updateâ and âÂÂHome Media Gallery VersionâÂÂ. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂNetwork SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂAuto Connection SetupâÂÂ, âÂÂDefault SettingsâÂÂ, âÂÂSoftware Updateâ and âÂÂHome Media G a l l e r y V e r s i o n â (/// t h e n ENTER ). âÂÂNetwork Setupâ When you selec t âÂÂNetwork Setupâ from the âÂÂSetupâ menu, a submenu is display ed to select âÂÂAutoâ or âÂÂManualâ for network connecti ons. To automatica lly set: The following setup is effectiv e for âÂÂAutoâ only. To perform the procedure, DHCP on your se rver or router must be valid. 1 Sele ct âÂÂAutomatical ly acquire IPâ then press ENTER . 2 Sele ct âÂÂYesâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S e l e c t â O K â . (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠A restart dialog screen appears. 4 Press ENTER again on the dialog screen. ⢠The setup finishes. ⢠The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns. To manually set: Before setting up, check your media server for IP Ad dress and Subnet mask. 1 Sele ct âÂÂAutomatical ly acquire IPâ then press ENTER . 2 Sele ct âÂÂNoâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 S e l e c t t h e s e t u p i t e m â s b o x (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠T h e s c r e e n t u r n s t o e n t r y m o d e f o r â I P A d d r e s s â a n d âÂÂSubnet maskâÂÂ. ⢠No need to enter âÂÂDefault Gatewayâ and âÂÂDNS ServerâÂÂ. 4 Enter the figur es using buttons 0 to 9 . ⢠Subnet mask (such as 255.255. 255.0) Enter the same figures as you checked. ⢠IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***) Enter the same figures as used in the media server (PC, etc.) you use. For ***, enter 3-digit figures (0 â 254) that have not been used for network connections yet. 5 Press ENTER on the setup itemâÂÂs box after the entry is complete. ⢠The screen turns to setup selection mode. ⢠Repeat steps 2 to 4 to complete the necessary setup. 6 S e l e c t â O K â (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠A restart dialog screen appears. 7 Press ENTER again on the dialog screen. ⢠The setup finishes. ⢠The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns. âÂÂAuto Connection Setupâ When you enjoy content on the network, you can select from the following option s: âÂÂLast Connected Serverâ an d âÂÂSingle Server/USBâÂÂ. See âÂÂAuto Connectio n Setupâ on page 90. âÂÂWake on LAN (WOL)â functi ons to turn the last accessed serverâÂÂs power on if th e server is WOL- compliant and is in Standby or sleep mo de, then display th e Media Navigator screen. Duri ng the WOL is activate d, the âÂÂStart S erverâ dialog screen displays and a message âÂÂThe server is starting up.â appears. If th e server is n ot WOL-compliant or the WOL functi on fails, the âÂÂS tart Serverâ dialo g appears on the âÂÂServer Listâ screen and a message âÂÂFailed t o start server.â displays on the dialog screen. For USB co ntent, the D evice List is displayed on the screen if you have not check ed in the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ box after selecting âÂÂSet upâ and then âÂÂAut o Connection SetupâÂÂ. You can select the desired device and then content in it . If you have checked in the box, th e list is skipped (default setting) and you can see the fo lder(s) or file(s) in the USB devi ce that has a single direc tory. âÂÂDefault Set tingsâ Setups you have entered within the Home Media Gal lery function return to de fault. When you sel ect âÂÂResetâÂÂ, a confirmatio n screen âÂÂTo activat e the default sett ings, restart Hom e Media Gallery. â will appear. Pre ss ENTER to reset to defaul t. When you se lect âÂÂCancelâÂÂ, the previous screen displays ( / then ENTER ). âÂÂSoftware U pdateâ Select âÂÂNextâ to follow the procedu re on the subseq uent screens or âÂÂCancelâ to re turn to the pre vious scre en ( / then ENTER ). When update is co mpleted, a confirmation message âÂÂTo activate the updated software, restart Ho me Media Gallery.â appe ars. Seeâ Software Updateâ on page 89. âÂÂHome M edia Gallery Versionâ You can confi rm the versio n and copyright inf ormation on the Home Media Galler y software . Select âÂÂOKâ to return to the previous sc reen ( ENTER ). 8 Press HOME MEN U again to exit the Home Media Gallery. Network Setup Auto Connection Setup Default Settings Software Update Home Media Gallery Ver sion Setup 1/5 1 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 87 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
88 En Using External Equipment 12 Editing files in My Playlist 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMy Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂMovie Play listâÂÂ, âÂÂMusic Playlistâ or âÂÂP hoto Playlistâ from the Playlist category ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Five playli sts are displayed . ⢠Press D to open the Tool Menu and select an item on this screen or next contents list screen ( / then ENTER ). ⢠Check the appropriate box: âÂÂChange NameâÂÂ, âÂÂMoveâ or â D e l e t e f r o m M y P l a y l i s t â (/// t h e n ENTER ). âÂÂChange Nameâ 1 Select âÂÂChange Nameâ from the Tool Menu. ⢠A dialog screen appears. 2 Select âÂÂPlaylist Nameâ ( then ENTER ). ⢠The software ke yboard appears. 3 S e l e c t â O K â o n t h e s o f t w a r e k e y b o a r d (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The software keyboard di sappears and âÂÂP laylist Nameâ in the âÂÂChange Nameâ di alog screen returns. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ when the new name is entered ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The editing finishes and âÂÂChange Nameâ dialog screen disappears. ⢠The new Playlist displays. ⢠The on-screen keyboard (â Software KeyboardâÂÂ) is displayed only when you se lect âÂÂSearchâ or âÂÂChange NameâÂÂ. âÂÂMoveâ You can change the listing order of the content registered in My Playlist . 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Tool Me nu. ⢠The content selected is placed in a yellow box (âÂÂSource Selectionâ mode). 2 Select the de sired content ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The selected conte nt is highlighted in the yellow box. A specific icon a ppears on the left (âÂÂDestinatio n Selection modeâÂÂ). 3 Press / to move the content up or down, then ENTER . ⢠The highlight in the yellow box disappears and the specific icon returns to the original one. ⢠Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move another content. 4 Press RETURN . ⢠A âÂÂPlaylistâ dialog screen appears. 5 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The dialog screen disappears and moving content finishes. ⢠To cancel, select âÂÂCancelâ then ENTER . âÂÂDelete from My Playl istâ 1 Select âÂÂDelete from My Playlistâ from the Tool Menu. ⢠A dialog screen appears. 2 Select âÂÂOKâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The dialog screen disappear s and the selected content is deleted from My Playlist. ⢠To cancel, select âÂÂCancelâ then ENTER . Playing/disp laying files from My Playlist 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMy Playlistâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select the de sired Playlist from âÂÂMovie Play listâÂÂ, âÂÂMusic Playlistâ or âÂÂPhoto Pl aylistâÂÂ. 5 Select the de sired Playlist List ( / then ENTER ). 6 S e l e c t t h e d e s i r e d c o n t e n t (/// t h e n ENTER ). ⢠The selected content is played or displ ayed. ⢠To return to the previous screen, press RETURN . 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gall ery. Switching the server When one or more servers are connected within the network, you can switch between servers. 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Gal leryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂMedia Nav igatorâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The previous server is selected. 4 Press D to ope n the Tool Menu. 5 Choose âÂÂSelect Serverâ ( / t hen ENTER ). ⢠The Server List is displayed. ⢠Pressing RETURN changes the screen to the Home Media Gallery. 6 Select the de sired server ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The screen changes from the selected server to the Home Media Gallery. 7 Press HOME MENU again to exit the Home Media Gall ery. NOTE ⢠The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously connected servers. When the Media Navigator is launched, available servers are automati cally sea rched and connected. To switch between connecte d servers, choose server to another one, select âÂÂSelect Serverâ from the Tool Menu. 1/5 Title Playlist1 T ool D 20 0 0 0 0 1 Movie Playlist Soft Keyboard OK Cancel Playlist1 Playlist Name a bc d e f g h ij k l m n o p qr yz st u v w x 1,2,3... a,b,c... A,B,C... @,$,=... Delete Clear Space PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 88 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
89 En Using External Equipment 12 English ⢠If a previously connected server can not be found or if the server is in the sleep mode, t he server name is dimmed (grayed out). ⢠In some cases, you may be able to start a media server if it supports âÂÂWake On LANâÂÂ. Se lect the server and press ENTER to have it transmit a âÂÂWake On LANâ command to the Plasma Display. ⢠You cannot select a server unles s that media server has been set up. Resetting to default You can reset the setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery function to defaul t (See âÂÂDefault Settingsâ on page 87). 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂDefault Settingsâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂResetâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠A restart dialog screen appears. 5 Press ENTER on the di alog screen. ⢠The setup finishes. ⢠The system restarts then th e Home Media Gallery screen returns. Other convenient features Software update is available on the Pi oneer website ( http:// www.pioneerelectronics.com ). Make sure that you have a USB flash memory. Firs t download the software according to the guidelines on the we bsit e and perform the following procedure for update: 1 Press HOME MENU . 2 Select âÂÂHome Media Galleryâ ( / then ENTER ). 3 Select âÂÂSetupâ ( / then ENTER ). 4 Select âÂÂSoftware Upd ateâ ( / then ENTE R ). ⢠A âÂÂSoftware Updateâ submenu appears. 5 Select âÂÂNextâ ( / then ENTER ). ⢠The next screen appears. Complete the procedure following the guidelines on the screen. 6 Press ENTER after the foll owing steps are complete: âÂÂDownloadâÂÂ, âÂÂWriteâ and âÂÂVerify â â¢ A restart dialog screen appears. 7 Press ENTER after reading a notice on the screen. ⢠The system is restarted th en the Home Media Gallery screen returns. ⢠Software update finishes. NOTE ⢠On average, it may take 15 minutes or more to complete a software update. Screen saver During navigation, the screen saver launches automatically if no activity is sens ed within five minutes. ⢠No screen saver is availa ble while a movi e or slideshow is played. ⢠Pressing any key cancels screen saver. When canceled with a USB devi ce being co nnected, connecting operation resumes. NOTE â¢P r e s s i n g INFO to display the Player status or key guide before screen saver is activa ted may cause image retention to appear. Do not display the Player status and key guide for an extended period of time while playing a movie or slideshow. Software Update Setup 1 Software Update T o check whether the software needs to be updated or not. Home Media Gallery must be connected to a USB device. Connect the USB device and press the Next button. Current Ver sion: 1.x.xx Next Cancel PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 89 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
90 En Using External Equipment 12 Dialog Screen Message ⢠The message consists of âÂÂError âÂÂ, âÂÂW arn ingâ and âÂÂInforma tion â and is displayed for 5 seconds. âÂÂAuto Connection Setupâ For extra convenience, you can toggle between the following features: âÂÂLast Connec ted Serverâ When you check in the âÂÂLa st Connected Se r ver â box, the Plasma Display accesses the last server using WOL (âÂÂW ake On L ANâÂÂ) first as the Me dia Navigator is selected from the Home Medi a Gallery . The Media Navigator displays th e last serv er when WOL succeeds, while a se r ver list is displayed when WOL fails. WOL is activated to turn the last accessed ser ver On if the ser ver is WOL-compliant and is in Standby or sleep mode. âÂÂSingle Serv er/ USBâ This function is used only wh en a USB memory device or a single server is connected. Y ou do not need this function when a multi-card r eader , or two or more servers are connected. USB: ⢠When USB memory is connected, the Devices List is skipped as long as you have checked in the âÂÂSingle Ser ver/USBâ box. If not, the list ma y be displayed at any t ime. Media Naviga tor (Ser ver ): ⢠When a single server is connected, the Server List is skipped as long as you have checked in the âÂÂSingle Ser ver/USBâ box. If not, the list ma y be displayed at any time. Wh en the âÂÂLast Connected Ser ver â box is checked, the other ser ver setup opt ion â âÂÂSingle Ser ver/USBâ â becomes invalid. Setup 1 Auto Connection Setup OK Cancel Last Connected Server Single Server/USB No. Message Problem 001 Content playba ck failed (001). No details are availab le for the error 100 A communication error occurred (100). No further details are available for the error 101 No response from the server (101). Timeout period reaches due to delayed server response 102 Disconnected from the network (102 ). Cables ar e disconnected 103 Invalid response was received from the server (103). Invalid response from the ser ver 300 This format is no t supported (300). A file that is not supported is selected 500 Authorization failed (500). F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion 501 Authorization failed (501). F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion 503 Authorization failed (503). Please check for trouble in routers, hubs, and other network devi ces. F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion 504 Authorization failed (504). The maxim um allowed number of devices are con nected to the server . F ailed to obtain WMDRM 505 Authorization failed (505). The con tent license is off . Please turn on th e license from the ser ver . F ailed to obtain WMDRM authorizat ion Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an extended period may cause an after- image. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 90 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
91 En Using External Equipment 12 English Glossary Default G ateway Default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another ne twork. A default gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within the local subnet. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addres ses to client hosts . In m os t c as e s, a b ro a db a n d r o ut e r se r ve s a s a D HC P s er v er i n a home network. DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to recognize products that meet the new standard for home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down in the DLNA Guidelines for interopera bility. This allows music, v ideo, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over a home network. This unit is compatible with mus ic, photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA Interoperabi lit y Guidelines v1.0. This unit can be used to playback music, photos and video stored on a DLNA-compatible server conne cted through a LAN cable. Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to the simplified sharing of digital co ntent, such as digital music, photos and video among networke d consumer electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of interoperability based on open industry standards, DL NA delivers technical design guidelines that companies can use to develop digital home products that share content through wired or wireless networks in the home. DNS (Dom ain Name S ervice) Server DNS Server is a server that de termines the name of network- computer within the Internet. The server functions to exchange IP address to the hostname, ho stname to the IP add ress. Ethernet A frame-based computer networki ng technology for local area networks (LANs). The Plasma Display supports 100BASE-TX. IP (Internet Protocol) Address A unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard, such as âÂÂ192.16 8.1.xxxâÂÂ. No duplicate numbers are allowed within the network. LAN Cable A cable that has an 8-pin modular plug on each end and is different from a telephone plug which has 4 pins. A straight cable is used when connecting the Plasma Display to a home network via a hub. A cross-over cable is used when connecting directly to a PC. Use category 5 (CAT-5) LAN cables. MAC (Media Access Control) A ddress An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as âÂÂ00:e0:36:01:23:xxâ and cannot be changed. Mass Storage Class de vices The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage devices, such as USB fla sh memory and digi tal cameras. PlaysFor Sure This unit incorporates PlaysFor Sure. âÂÂPlaysForSureâ is a new logo pro gram from Mic rosoft Corporation. You can check for the PlaysForSure logo at variou s online stores. Where you see the PlaysForSure logo, you can be sure that the digital media you are purchasing (mus ic, video, pictures) will play on this unit. Subnet mask Used when IP addresses are broken into several part s. It is expressed as âÂÂ255.255 .255.0âÂÂ. In most cases, the Subnet mask is automatically assigned by the DHCP server. USB (Universal Serial Bus) USB provides a serial bus stan dard for connecting device s, usually to computers such as PCs. The Plasma Di splay supports the Mass Storage Class. Windows Media Connect Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology to distribute music, photos and video stored on a PC with Windows XP installed to a ster eo system of TV. Using this technology you can pl ayback files sto red on the PC from various devices wherever you like in your home. Windows Media DRM Windows Media DRM is copyri ght protection technology developed by Microsoft Corpo ration. It enables content providers to distribute over th e Internet music, video and other digital media content in a protected, encrypted file format. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 91 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
92 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 Useful Remote Control Features Learning function of the rem ote control unit You can operate the connected AV products (AV Receiver, Cable Box, SAT tuner, VCR, DVD, DVD recorder, LD) using the remote controlâÂÂs learning func tion. The remote control can memorize other remote controlâÂÂs codes. Using the learning function 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the type of devi ce to be learned. 2 Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 Press a button to be learned. ⢠The LED lights up. ⢠For the functions that can be learned, see pages 99 to 102. ⢠When the deviceâÂÂs remote is memorized, the LED flashes. 4 Press EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. NOTE ⢠To exit the Learn mode before it is complete, press EDIT/ LEARN again. â¢I f t h e Mode switch selection is changed when EDIT/LEARN and 2 are pressed (the LED is flashing), the Learn session is canceled. â¢I f t h e Mode switch selection is changed when a button to be learned is pressed after EDIT/LEARN and 2 have been pressed (the LED lights up), the Learn session is not canceled and the selected mode and button remain effective. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute after having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is flashing), the Learn session is canceled. ⢠If a button to be learned is pressed after having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is lit), the Learn session is canceled in 30 seconds and the LED restarts blinking again. ⢠Code transmission finishes in approximately two seconds. Do not interrupt it halfway. Wa it until the LED flashes again. ⢠When using any of the receiver buttons ( a , INPUT , or VOL /â ), the learned manufacture r code remains the same regardless of the Mode switch position or even if the switch is shifted to a different position. Presetting manufacturer codes to control other devices Presetting manufacture r codes 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the type of devi ce to be preset. 2 Press EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 Press 0 â 9 to enter the manufacturer code. See page 94. ⢠Preset mode is finished when the LED blinks Off. Library Search In the event that the device code for a particular target unit is unknown, cycle through the availa ble codes for that type of device. Sample the functions from each code in order to find the code that properly operates the target device. 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the type of devi ce to be preset. 2 Press EDIT/LEARN and 3 at the same time. ⢠The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Library Search programming mode. 3 Press either SOURCE POWER , PLAY, 1 or CH to sample the selected code. 4 If the code is missing, press / to advance to the next code or return to the previous code and repeat step 3. 5 Press ENTER when the code that properly operates the target device is found. ⢠All the available buttons for the selected mode are programmed to the remote co ntrol. The re mot e control unit returns to normal oper ation (LED lights for one second to confirm addition). Delete Learning You can delete a learned code by either overwriting it wi th a new code on the same button or performing the procedure below. 1 Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. ⢠The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Learning mode. 2 Press and hold TV a for more than two seconds. ⢠The remote control unit starts deleting all learned codes in the selected mode (m arked by a lit LED). ⢠When complet ed, the LED blinks Off and the remote control unit returns to normal operation. 2 cm to 5 cm (0 .8 inches to 2. 0 inches) Remote control (Supplied accessory) Remote control of AV product PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 92 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
93 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English Manufacturing Reset All learned and preset codes can be returned to the factory defaults regardless of the mode. 1 Press EDIT/LE ARN and TV a at the sa me time. The Mod e switch setting is ignored. ⢠The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Manufacturing Reset mode. 2 Press D (yellow) to rese t the remote control. ⢠The manufacturing reset is complete. The LED flashes for one second then the remo te control unit returns to normal operation. NOTE ⢠To exit the Edit mode b efore it is complete, press ED IT/ LEARN again. â¢I f t h e Mode s witch select ion is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit session is canceled. ⢠If no operation is performed within one minute, the Edit session is canceled. ⢠When you enter an unliste d code, the LED flashes repeatedly. ⢠If the tables on pages 94 to 98 do not include your deviceâÂÂs manufacturer or the remote control does not work, use the Learn mode. ⢠The initial mode is âÂÂPIONEERâÂÂ. ⢠When using any of the receiver buttons ( a , INPUT , or VOL /â ) to cancel the Learn mo de, follow the procedure with the Mode switch set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ. You cannot cancel the mode otherwise. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 93 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
94 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 Programming codes CABLE SATELLITE Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes ABC 0003 0008 0014 0011 0017 General Instrument 0014 0011 P anasonic 0000 0008 0107 0021 Sony 1006 1506 1606 Global 1327 P anther 0637 Sprucer 0021 Americast 0899 GoldStar 0144 P aragon 0000 Starcom 0003 0014 Amino 1602 1822 Hamlin 0009 0273 Philips 1305 0317 Supercable 0276 Bell & Howell 0014 Hitachi 0014 0011 0154 Pioneer 1877 0877 0144 0533 0023 0260 1021 Supermax 0883 Bell South 0899 i3 Micro 1602 Thomson 1256 Birmingham Cable Communicat ions 0276 Jerrold 0476 0810 0276 0003 0012 0014 0011 P ulsar 0000 T ocom 0012 British T elecom 0003 PVP Stereo V isual Mat rix 0003 T or x 0003 Clearmaster 0883 KNC 0 008 Quasar 0000 T oshiba 0000 ClearMax 0883 LG 0144 Ra dioShack 0883 T rans PX 0276 Cleartron 1327 Memor ex 0000 RCA 1256 0021 T ristar 08 83 Coolmax 0883 Motorola 1376 0476 0810 0276 1187 1254 0014 1106 Regal 0279 0273 T S 0003 Daeryung 1877 0877 0477 00 08 Rembrandt 0011 United Cable 0003 Digeo 1187 Multitech 0883 R unco 0000 V2 0883 Digi 063 7 MultiVision 0 012 Samsung 0000 0144 Viewmast er 0883 Director 0476 Myrio 1602 1822 Scientific Atlanta 1877 0877 0477 0008 0017 ViewmaxP ro 1544 Dumont 0637 NTL 0003 V ision 0883 Gehua 0476 Optimus 0021 Sejin 1602 V or tex View 0883 General Instrument 0476 0810 0 276 0003 P ace 1877 0237 0008 Signature 0011 Zenith 00 00 0525 0899 Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes AlphaStar 0772 F ortec Star 1550 Legend 0269 Rea listic 0052 Amino 1615 Galaxis 0270 LG 1226 1414 1750 Samsung 1377 1142 1276 1108 1109 0270 1243 1442 1609 BeauSA T 1586 GE 0392 0566 Magnavox 0724 0722 Century 0856 General Instrument 0869 MegaSat 1551 Channel Master 0212 GOI 0775 1775 Memorex 0724 0269 Sanyo 1219 Chaparral 0053 0209 0216 Goodmans 1246 Mitsubishi 0749 SKY 0856 1856 0099 Coolsat 1806 Gradiente 0856 Motorola 0869 0856 Sony 06 39 1639 1640 Crossdigital 1109 Hisense 1535 NEC 0102 0178 1270 Star Choice 0869 Digiturk 1076 Hitachi 0819 1250 Netsat 0099 Star T rak 0180 DirecTV 1377 0392 0566 0639 1639 1142 0247 07 49 1749 0724 0819 1856 1076 1108 0099 11 09 1392 1414 1442 1443 1444 1538 1609 1640 1750 Homecable 0238 Next Level 0869 STS 02 10 HTS 0775 1775 OctalTV 1505 T ivo 1142 1442 1443 1444 1538 Hughes 0749 1749 1442 P anasonic 0247 0701 0152 Hughes Netwo rk Systems 1142 0749 1749 1442 1443 1444 1538 1750 P ansat 0647 1551 1807 T oshiba 0749 174 9 0790 0819 0082 1285 P aysat 0724 Humax 1790 Philips 1142 0749 1749 0724 0819 0856 1076 0722 0099 1442 UltimateTV 1392 1640 iLo 1535 Ultrasat 1806 Dish Network System 1505 1005 0775 1170 1775 Innova 0099 Uniden 0724 0722 0052 0074 0076 0238 IQ 0210 P ioneer 0329 1442 Dishpro 1505 1005 0775 1775 IQ P rism 0210 P roscan 0392 0566 US Digital 1535 Eastern 1612 Janeil 0152 P roton 1535 USD TV 1535 Echostar 1505 1005 0775 0159 0269 0280 1170 1775 Jerrold 0869 RadioShack 0869 V oom 0869 JVC 0775 1170 1775 RCA 0392 0566 0855 0143 1392 Zenith 08 56 1856 Expressvu 0775 1775 La va 1631 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 94 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
95 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English VCR Brand Codes Brand Cod es Bran d Codes B rand Codes ABS 19 72 Craig 0271 Go V ideo 0240 0432 0526 0649 0663 1137 1150 LG 0037 0045 0042 0209 0038 0040 1037 1137 Admiral 0048 0209 0479 Crown 0072 0278 0020 Adventura 0 000 Curtis Mathes 0060 0035 0162 0041 0760 1035 GoldHand 0072 Linksys 1 972 Aiko 0278 GoldStar 0037 0209 0038 0225 0226 1137 1237 LloydâÂÂs 0000 0208 Aiwa 0037 0000 0124 0307 0479 1137 Cybernex 0240 Loewe 0037 0081 CyberP ower 1972 Goodmans 0037 0000 0072 0278 0020 0062 Logik 0240 0072 Aka i 0041 0061 0106 0175 0242 Cyrus 0081 Lunatron 1137 Daewoo 0045 0104 0278 0020 0046 0210 0212 0561 1137 1278 Gradien te 0000 0008 Luxor 0048 0104 0043 0046 0062 0106 Akiba 0072 Graetz 0240 0104 0041 Akura 0271 Granada 0081 0104 0046 LXI 0037 Alba 0209 0072 0278 0020 Dansai 0072 Gr andin 0037 0000 0072 M Electronic 0000 0038 Alienware 1972 Daytron 0020 Grundig 0081 0072 0034 0207 0226 0378 Magnasonic 0593 1278 Allegro 1137 De Graaf 0042 0166 Magnavox 0035 0039 0081 0000 0149 0563 0593 1781 Ambassador 00 20 Decca 0081 0000 Hanseatic 0037 America Action 0278 Dell 1972 Haojie 0240 Magnin 0240 American High 0035 Denon 0042 Harley D avidson 0000 Manesth 0045 0072 Amoisonic 0479 DirecTV 0739 Harman/Kardon 0081 0038 0075 Marantz 0035 0081 0062 Amstrad 0000 Dual 0041 Harwood 0072 Marta 0037 Anam 0162 0037 0240 0278 0226 1037 Dumont 0081 0000 0104 0105 HCM 0072 Matsui 0209 0208 Durabrand 0039 0038 Headquarter 0046 Matsushita 0035 0162 0226 0227 1162 Anam National 0162 0226 Dynatech 0000 Hewlett P ackard 1972 Anitech 0072 Elbe 0038 HI-Q 0047 Media Center PC 1972 ASA 0037 0081 Elcatech 0072 Hinari 0240 0072 0208 MEI 0035 Asha 0240 Electrohome 0037 0043 Hita chi 0037 0240 0000 0042 0041 0065 0082 0089 0105 0166 0235 0292 1037 Memorex 0035 0162 0037 0048 0039 0047 0240 0000 0104 0209 0046 0307 0479 1037 1048 1162 1237 1262 Asuka 0037 Electrophonic 0037 Audiovox 0037 0278 Eme rex 0032 Awa 0043 Emerson 0035 0037 0184 0240 0045 0000 0121 0043 0209 0002 0278 0208 0061 0212 0479 0561 0593 1278 1479 1593 Baird 0000 0104 0041 Howard Computers 1972 Basic Line 0072 0278 0020 HP 1972 Memphis 0072 Beaumark 0240 H u g h e s N e t w o r k S ys t e m s 004 2 0739 Metronic 0081 Bell & Howell 0104 Humax 0739 Metz 0162 0037 0227 Blaupunkt 0162 0034 0226 0227 ESA 1137 Hush 1972 MGA 0240 0043 0061 BPL 0046 ESC 0240 0278 Hypson 0072 MGN T echnology 0240 Brandt Elect ronique 0041 EverFocus 1346 iBUYPOWER 1972 Microsoft 1972 Broksonic 0184 0121 0209 0002 0479 1479 1815 F erguson 0041 Imperial 0000 Mind 1972 Fidelity 0000 Inter funk 0081 Minolta 0042 0105 Bush 0209 0072 0278 Finlandia 0081 0104 IT T 0240 0104 0041 0046 0106 Mitsubishi 0081 0067 0043 0041 0061 0075 0173 0214 0242 0443 0807 Calix 0037 Finlux 0081 0000 0042 0104 0105 Canon 0035 1143 ITV 0037 0278 Capehart 0020 F irstline 0037 0045 0043 0209 0072 Jensen 0041 Motorola 0035 0048 Carver 0081 JVC 0045 0067 0041 0008 0206 0207 0366 1162 1707 MTC 0240 0000 Catron 0020 Fisher 0047 0104 0046 Multitech 0000 0072 CCE 0072 0278 Fronte ch 0020 Murphy 0000 CGE 0000 Fuji 0035 0033 Kaisui 0072 Myryad 0081 Changhong 0048 0081 F ujitsu 0045 0000 0366 KEC 0037 0278 NAD 0104 0058 Cimline 0072 F unai 0000 0593 1335 1593 Kendo 0209 0106 National 0226 Cineral 0278 Garrard 0000 Kenwood 0067 0041 0038 NEC 0 035 0037 004 8 0104 0067 0041 0038 0008 0040 0050 0082 0206 0457 CineVision 1137 Gateway 1195 1196 1972 KLH 0072 Citizen 0037 0278 1278 GE 0060 0035 0240 0065 0202 0226 0760 0761 0807 1035 1060 Koda k 0035 0037 Clatronic 0020 Kolin 004 3 0041 Colt 0072 Korpel 0072 Neckermann 0081 Condor 0020 GEC 0081 Lenco 0278 Nesco 0072 Craig 0037 0047 0240 0072 General 0045 0020 0366 Leyco 0072 Newave 0037 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 95 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
96 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 VCR Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Nikko 0037 Pye 0 081 SEG 0240 T ensai 0000 Nikon 0034 Qisheng 0060 SEI 0081 Thomas 0000 Niveus Media 1972 Quarter 0046 Seleco 0041 Thomson 0060 0067 0041 0202 Noblex 0240 Quartz 0046 Semp 0045 Thorn 0104 0041 Nokia 0240 0104 0041 0046 0106 Quasar 0035 0162 0077 1035 1162 Sensor y Science 0649 1155 Tivo 0618 0636 0739 1337 1996 Sentra 0020 Nordmende 0041 Quelle 0 081 Sharp 0048 0209 0062 0807 0848 1048 TMK 0240 0208 Northgate 1972 Radiola 0081 T oshiba 0081 0045 0042 0067 0043 0209 0041 1996 1972 1145 1008 0845 0377 0366 0212 0210 0057 0008 Oceanic 0000 0041 RadioShack 0000 1037 Shinco 0000 Olympus 0035 0226 Radix 0037 Shintom 0104 0072 Onkyo 0222 Randex 0037 Sho gun 0240 Optimus 1062 0162 0037 0048 0104 0058 0432 0593 1048 1162 1262 RCA 0060 0035 0240 0000 0042 0149 0077 0105 0106 0065 0202 0226 0058 0760 0761 0807 0880 1035 1060 Siemens 0037 0081 0104 Silva 0037 T otevision 0037 0240 Singer 0045 0072 T ouch 1972 Optonica 0062 Sinudyne 0081 T riumph 0208 Orion 0184 0121 0209 0002 0208 0479 1479 1815 Solavox 0020 Uher 02 40 Reali stic 0035 0037 0048 0047 0000 0104 0046 0062 Sonic Blue 0614 0616 1137 Unitech 0240 Osaki 0037 0000 0072 Sonolor 0046 0062 Universum 0037 0081 0240 0000 0106 Otto V ersand 0081 ReplayTV 0614 0616 Sontec 0037 P allad ium 0037 0041 0072 Re x 0041 Son y 0035 0032 0033 0000 0011 0022 0034 0275 0636 1032 1232 1546 1702 1703 1896 1972 V ector 0045 P anasonic 1062 0035 0162 0077 0225 0226 0227 0246 0378 0616 1035 1162 1262 Ricavision 1972 V ector Resear ch 0038 004 0 Ricoh 0034 Victor 0067 0041 0008 Rio 1137 Video Concepts 00 45 0040 0061 Roadstar 0037 0240 0072 0278 Stack 9 1972 Videomagic 0037 P athe Marconi 0041 Runco 0039 STS 0042 Videosonic 0240 P enney 0035 0037 0240 0042 0038 0040 1035 1237 Saba 0041 0206 0207 Sunstar 0000 Viewsonic 1972 Saisho 0209 0208 Suntronic 0000 Villain 0000 P entax 0042 0065 0105 Salora 0 043 0046 0075 0106 0443 Sylvania 0035 0081 0000 0043 0593 1593 1781 V oodoo 1972 P erdio 0000 W ard s 0060 0035 0048 0047 0081 0240 0000 0042 0072 0149 0062 0212 0760 Philco 003 5 0000 0209 00 38 0226 0479 0561 Sampo 0037 0048 Symphonic 0000 0593 1593 Samsung 0240 0045 0210 0212 0432 0649 0663 0739 0760 1014 Systemax 1972 Philips 0035 0081 0000 0062 0226 0563 0593 0618 0739 1081 1181 1266 T agar Systems 1972 T andy 0000 0104 W harfedale 0593 Sanky 0048 0039 T ashik o 0037 0000 White W estinghouse 0209 0072 Phonola 0081 Sansui 0000 0067 0209 0041 0082 0271 0479 1479 T atung 0081 0045 0000 0067 0041 0008 0366 XR- 1000 0035 0000 0072 P ilot 0037 Y amaha 0041 0038 P ioneer 008 1 0042 0067 0058 0168 0206 0235 1337 Sanyo 0047 0240 0104 0046 0159 0372 T eac 0000 0041 0278 0307 0526 0593 Ya m i s h i 0 0 7 2 Yo k a n 0 0 7 2 P olk Audio 0081 SBR 0 081 T ec 0020 Y ok o 0240 0020 P ortland 0020 Schaub Lorenz 0000 0104 0041 T echnics 0035 0162 0226 0246 Zenith 00 39 0033 0000 0209 0034 0479 1137 1139 1479 P rofitronic 0240 Schneider 0081 0000 0072 T eco 0035 0037 0048 0041 0038 0040 P roline 0000 Scott 0184 0045 0121 0043 0210 0212 P roscan 0060 0202 0760 0761 1060 T eknika 0035 0037 0000 ZT Group 1 972 Sears 0035 00 37 0047 0000 0042 0104 0046 0057 0105 1237 T eleavia 0041 P rotec 007 2 T elefunken 0041 P ulsar 0039 T enosal 0072 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 96 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
97 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English PVR DVD Brand Codes Brand Cod es Bran d Codes B rand Codes ABS 19 72 HP 1972 Niveus Media 1972 Systemax 1972 Alienware 1972 H u g h e s N e t w o r k S y st e m s 0739 Northgate 197 2 T agar Systems 1972 CyberP ower 1972 Humax 0739 P anasonic 0616 Tivo 0618 0636 0739 Dell 1972 Hush 1972 Philips 0618 0739 T oshiba 1008 1972 DirecTV 0739 iBUYPOWER 1972 RCA 0880 T ouch 1972 EverF ocus 1346 Linksys 1972 ReplayTV 0614 0616 Views onic 1972 Gateway 1195 1196 1972 Media Center PC 1972 Sonic Blue 0614 0616 Vood oo 1972 Hewlett P ackard 1972 Microsof t 1972 Sony 0636 1972 ZT Group 1972 Howard Computers 1972 Mind 1972 Stack 9 1972 Brand Codes Brand Cod es Bran d Codes B rand Codes Acoustic Solutions 0730 1242 Ci neVision 0876 0833 0869 Gate way 1073 1077 1158 1194 Lande l 0826 Adcom 1094 Citizen 1277 GE 0522 0815 0717 Lasonic 0798 1173 Advent 1016 Classic 1385 Go Video 0744 0715 0741 0783 0833 0869 1044 1075 1099 1144 1148 1158 1304 1443 1730 Lecson 1533 Afreey 0698 Clatronic 1165 Lenoxx 1127 Aiwa 0641 Coby 0778 0852 1086 1107 1165 1177 1351 LG 0591 0741 0801 0869 1526 Akai 0695 0770 0899 1089 Alba 0672 0539 0717 Crai g 0831 Go Vision 1071 1072 Lit eOn 1058 1158 1416 1440 Alco 0790 Curtis Mathes 1087 GoldSta r 0741 L oewe 0511 0741 Allegro 0869 C yberHome 0816 0874 1019 1023 1024 1117 1129 1502 1537 Goodmans 0790 1004 Logix 0783 Altacom 1224 GPX 0699 0769 Lunatron 0741 Am phi on Me dia W orks 0872 1176 1245 Gradiente 0490 0651 M agnavox 0503 0539 0646 0675 0821 1268 1506 AMW 0872 117 6 1245 Cydectin 1074 Greenhill 0717 Apex Digital 06 72 0717 0755 0794 0796 0797 0830 1004 1020 1056 1061 1100 Daewo o 0784 0705 0770 0833 0869 1169 1172 1234 1242 1441 1443 Grundig 0539 0695 0705 Malata 0782 1159 GVG 1169 Marantz 0539 H & B 1421 Matsui 0672 Arcam 0732 Dansai 0770 Harman/Kardon 0582 0702 McIntosh 1533 1273 1373 Aspire Digital 1168 1407 Dantax 1089 Hitachi 0573 0664 0695 1247 Memor ex 0690 0695 0831 1270 Audiologic 0736 Daytek 0872 Hiteker 0672 Metronic 0690 Audiovox 0790 1041 1071 1072 1121 1122 Decca 0770 iLo 1348 1472 Microsoft 0522 Denon 0490 0634 Initial 0717 1472 Minato 0752 Axion 1071 1072 1193 Denver 0778 1107 1316 Innovative T echnology 1542 M inowa 1165 B & K 0655 0662 Desay 1407 1455 Integra 0571 0627 Mint ek 0839 0717 1472 BBK 1224 Diamond Vision 1316 1609 1610 IRT 0783 Mirror 0752 Bel Canto Design 1571 Dick Smi th E lec tr on ics 0833 1730 Jaton 1078 Mitsubishi 1521 0521 Bellagio 1 245 Digitor 0690 JBL 0702 MixSonic 1130 1611 Blaupunkt 0717 Digitrex 0672 1056 Jens en 1016 Momitsu 1082 Blue P ar ade 0571 Digix 1272 JMB 0695 MTlogic 1265 Broksonic 0695 0868 1419 Disney 0675 1 270 JSI 1423 Mustek 0730 1730 Bush 0690 DiViDo 0705 JVC 0558 0623 0867 1164 1275 1602 Myr yad 0894 Byd:sign 0872 DSE 0833 1730 NAD 0591 0692 0741 California Audio Labs 04 90 Dual 1068 1085 jW in 1049 1051 Nakamichi 1222 C a m b r i d g e S o u n d w o r ks 0690 Durabrand 1127 Kawasaki 0790 NEC 0785 0869 Cary Audio Design 1477 DVD2000 0521 Kenwood 0490 0534 0682 0737 Nesa 0717 CA VS 1057 ECC 0730 KLH 0717 0790 1020 1149 1261 Next Base 0826 Celestial 1020 Emerson 0591 0675 0821 1268 NexxT ech 1402 Centrex 0672 1004 Enterprise 0591 Konka 071 1 0719 0720 0721 Nintaus 1051 Centrios 1577 ESA 1443 Koss 0651 0896 1423 Norcent 1003 0872 1107 1265 1457 Changhong 0627 1061 Fintec 1169 Kreisen 1421 Cinea 0831 Fisher 0670 Krell 1498 Olidata 0672 Cinego 1399 Funai 0675 1268 1334 Lafayette 1369 Onkyo 0503 0627 0792 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 97 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
98 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 DVD DVD-R LD Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Oppo 1224 Proscan 0522 Shinco 0717 T oshiba 0503 0695 1045 1154 Op toM ed ia E lec tr oni cs 0896 ProV ision 0778 Shinsonic 0533 0839 TRANS-continents 0831 1165 Orion 1419 Qwestar 0651 Sigma Designs 0674 T redex 0799 0800 0803 0804 Oritron 0651 RCA 0 522 0571 0717 0790 0822 1022 1132 1193 Slim Art 0784 TYT 0705 Otic 0826 SM Electronic 0690 0730 Umax 0690 P acific 0831 Recco 0 698 Sonic Blue 0869 1099 Universum 0591 P alsonic 0672 0852 Reoc 0752 Sony 0533 1533 0864 1033 1069 1070 1431 1432 1433 1548 Urban Concepts 0503 P anasonic 0503 0490 0632 0703 1010 1011 1362 1462 1490 1762 Revoy 0699 US Logic 0839 Rio 0869 V enturer 07 90 RJT ech 1360 Sova 1122 Vialta 1509 pe eKT on 1224 Roadstar 1051 Sungale 1074 1342 1532 Viewmaster 1224 Philco 069 0 0790 Rotel 0623 11 78 Superscan 0821 Vizio 1064 1226 Philips 0503 0539 0646 0675 0854 1158 1260 1267 1354 Rowa 0823 1004 SVA 0717 0860 1105 V ocopr o 1027 Sampo 0698 0752 1501 Sylvania 0675 0821 1268 W esder 0699 Samsung 0490 0573 0744 0820 0899 1044 1075 Symphonic 0675 1268 W intel 11 30 P ianoDisc 102 4 T AG McLaren 0894 Xbox 0522 P ioneer 052 5 0571 0631 0632 1475 1476 1571 Sansui 0695 T atung 0770 XMS 0770 Sanyo 0670 0695 0873 T eac 0571 0717 0692 0790 0809 0833 Xoro 1173 P olaroid 1020 1061 1086 1245 1316 1478 1480 1482 Schneider 0783 Xwave 1001 Schwaiger 0752 T echnics 0490 0703 Y amada 0872 1004 1056 1158 1416 P olk Audio 0539 Semp 0503 T echnosonic 0730 P ortland 0770 Sensor y Science 1158 T echwood 0692 Y a maha 0490 0539 0545 0817 P rima 1016 Sharp 0630 0675 0752 1256 1419 T edelex 0690 Y amakawa 0872 P rimare 0886 1467 1618 T erapin 1031 Zenith 05 03 0591 0741 0869 P rinceton 0674 Sharper Image 1117 Theta Digital 0571 Zeus 0784 P roceed 0672 Sherwood 0633 0770 1043 1077 Thomson 0522 Zoece 1265 Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Apex Digital 1056 Funai 0675 1334 Loewe 0741 Sensor y Science 1158 Aspire Digi tal 1168 Gateway 1073 1158 1194 Magnavox 0646 1506 Sharp 0630 0675 1419 Coby 1086 Go Video 0741 1158 130 4 1730 Mustek 1730 Sony 10 33 1069 1070 1431 1432 1433 CyberHome 1129 1502 H & B 1421 P anasonic 0490 1010 1011 Denon 0490 iLo 1348 Philips 0646 1158 Sylvania 0675 Di ck S mi th Ele ct ro nic s 1730 JVC 1164 1275 P ioneer 0631 1475 1476 Y amada 1056 1158 1416 Digitrex 1056 Kreisen 1421 P olaroid 1086 Zenith 0741 DSE 1730 LG 0741 RCA 0522 Emerson 0675 LiteOn 1158 1416 1440 Samsung 0490 Brand C odes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Aiwa 020 3 Magnavox 0194 0217 0241 Philips 0064 0194 Sega 0023 Carver 006 4 0194 0323 M a r a n t z 0064 0194 P ioneer 0059 0023 Sharp 0001 Denon 0059 0172 0241 Mitsubishi 0059 0241 P olk Au dio 0194 Sony 0193 0201 0270 Disco V ision 0023 NAD 0059 Quasar 0204 T echnics 0204 F unai 0203 Nagsmi 0059 Realisti c 0203 T elefunken 0059 Gol dS ta r 0172 NEC 0286 Renaissance 0323 Theta Digital 0194 Harman/Kardon 0194 Optimus 0059 Salora 0064 Victor 0245 Hitachi 0023 0395 P anasonic 0204 Samsung 0323 Y amaha 0217 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 98 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
99 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English Using the remote control unit to control other devices Receiver control buttons When a Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, use buttons 1 to 3 to operate the receiver. When a non-Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, the signals for 1 to 3 must first be âÂÂlea rnedâÂÂ. See page 92. 1R E C E I V E R ïµ (STANDBY/ON) Turns the Pioneer receiver power On and Off. 2 RECEIVER INPUT Selects the input source connected to the Pioneer receiver. 3 RECEIVER VOL /â Adjusts the Pioneer receiver volume level Press VOL to increase the vo lume and VOL â to decrease it. NOTE ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can memorize the control signal fr om another devi ce âÂÂs remote control. 3 1 2 Mode switch (with âÂÂTVâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 99 Wednesday, Augus t 2, 2006 6:01 PM
100 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 CBL/SAT control buttons When the CBL/SAT function ha s been preset by the remote controlâÂÂs learning function, the remote control buttons function as shown below. ⢠When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SAT, the cable converter or satellite broadc ast tuner connected to the display, use the buttons shown below to operate th e device ( 3 , 4 , 5 , 8 and 9 for cable converters and 1 to 7 for satell ite tuners): ⢠Cable converters or satellit e broadcast tuners made by other manufacturers not listed in th e system can be controlled using the remote control if buttons 1 to 9 have already learned the functions. See page 92. 1S A T M E N U Displays the satellite broad casting menu screen 2E N T E R , / / / ENTER: Activates the selected function /// : Selects items on the SAT GUID E screen or SAT MENU screen 3 0 â 9 Press a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch 4C H / â Selects a higher or lower channel 5 SOURCE ïµ Turns the device sending the image On and Off 6 SAT GU IDE Displays the satellite br oadcasting guide screen ⢠Set up this button with the learning function if necessary 7R E T U R N When the CBL/SAT menu is displayed, restores the immediately previous screen 8C H E N T E R * Enters the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons 9 CH RETURN* Switches between the current channel and the previous channel you were watching * Some cable converter manuf acturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN . Set up these buttons with the learning function if necessa ry. NOTE ⢠CABLE and SAT cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. 4 8 7 6 3 5 2 1 9 Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SATâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 100 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
101 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 English VCR control buttons When the VCR is preset by the remote controlâÂÂs learning function, the remote control buttons function as follows: ( Mode swit ch must be set to VCR). ⢠Press the input selector button (INPUT 1 â 6) that matches the input terminal connected to the VCR. The VCR can be operated using 1 to 8 . ⢠VCRs made by manufacturers not listed in the system c an be controlled using the remo te control if buttons 1 to 8 have learned the functi ons. See page 92. 1C H / â Selects the channel on the VCR 2 ï¤ (PLAY) Selects playback 3 ï (RWD) Rewinds the tape and allows picture search 4S O U R C E ïµ Turns the power of the VCR On and Off 5 ïÂÂ¥ (PAUSE/STILL) Pauses playback and displays still pictures 6 ï® (FF) Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search 7 ï« (REC) Starts recording 8 ï§ (STOP) Stops tape transport NOTE ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. 1 4 3 7 6 8 5 2 Mode switch (with âÂÂVCRâ selected) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 101 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
102 En Useful Remote Control Features 13 DVD/DVR control buttons When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode swit ch of the remote control unit is set to DVD/DVR. ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal co nnected to a DVD player or DVD recorder is pressed, these player s can be op erated using 1 to 12 . ⢠DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 12 have learned the func tions. See page 92 . 1 CH /â (DVD record er only) Changes the channel of the tuner built into the DVD recorder 2 ï¤ (PLAY) Selects playback 3 ï (SCAN)/ ï¯ (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing to go backward Pressing quickly o nce takes yo u to the start of the playing chapter. Each time it is pressed, playback jumps t o the start of previous chapter. 4 SOURCE ïµ Turns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder On and Off 5 ïÂÂ¥ (PAUSE/STILL) Pauses playback and di splays still pictures 6 DVD MENU (DVD, DVD reco rder) Displays the DVD menu 7 DVD TO P MENU (DVD , DVD recorder) Displays the DVD top menu 8 E N T E R , /// ( D V D , D V D r e c o r d e r ) ENTER: Activates the selected function /// : Selects items on the DVD MENU screen 9R E T U R N When the DVD menu is displayed, restores the immediately previous screen 10 ï® (SCAN )/ï° (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing for fast forward Pressing quickl y once takes yo u to the start of the nex t chapter. Each time it is pressed, playback jumps t o the start of the next chapter. 11 ï« (REC) (DVD recorder only) Starts recording 12 ï§ (STOP) Stops playback If pressing once fails to stop playback on the DVD player or DVD recorder, press twice to open the disc tray. 11, 12 STOP REC (DVD recorder only) Press and hold ï« then press ï§ to stop recording. This operation applies to Pion eer DVD recorders only. NOTE ⢠A DVD player and a D VD recorder cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. ⢠The remote control buttons can control some LD players. For the supported LD players, see the LD brands and codes on page 98. 1 4 3 9 11 10 7 12 5 2 6 8 Mode switch (with âÂÂDVD/ DVRâ sel ected ) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 102 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
103 En Appendix 14 English Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Solution GENERAL ⢠No power ⢠Is the po wer cord disconnected? (Se e page 25) â¢H a s POWER been turned on ? (See page 2 6) ⢠Check if you pressed TV ïµ on the remote control. (See page 26) If the indicator on the system lights up re d, press TV ïµ. ⢠Power is sudd enly turn ed off ⢠Is the sleep timer set? (See page 57) ⢠Check the power control setting. (See page 63) ⢠The syste mâÂÂs internal tempera ture has increa sed. Clear/clean the vents. (See pa ge 20) ⢠A malfunction may have oc curred in the ho me network module . ⢠The s ystem cannot be operated ⢠External influences such as lightn ing, static electr icity , etc., may cause failures. T r y turning off the Plasma Display or unpluggi ng th e power cord. Wait one to t wo minutes then restore power to the panel. ⢠Remote control unit doe s not operate ⢠Check if POWER is Off . Activate the button when the P OWER ON and STANDBY indicators are Off . ⢠Is the Mode switch set co rrectly? Slide it to the TV position. (See page 19) ⢠Are the batteries inserted with polarity aligned ( , âÂÂ)? (See page 24) ⢠Are the batteries low? (R eplace wi th new batter ies.) (See pa ge 24) ⢠P oint the remote control directly at the pa nelâÂÂs remote control se nsor . (See page 24) ⢠Is the panel under strong or fluorescent lighting? ⢠Is fluorescent light blinding the remo te control sensor? ⢠POWER ON indicator or ST ANDBY indicator is blinking ⢠The unitâÂÂs internal protective ci rcuits may hav e been activated. Unplug the panelâÂÂs power cord fro m th e power outlet. W ait one to two minu tes then plug in the panel again . If the problem is not so lved with this, contact t he ne arest P ioneer Auth orized Independen t Service Company , or the Customer Support Divi sion (see back cover). PICTURE/SOUND ⢠Image and sound are absen t ⢠V erify that the input so urce is a TV chan nel rather than from a PC or a DVD player . (See page 27) ⢠Check the P arenta l Control funct ion. ( See page 38) Enter a password to temporarily cancel the Pa rental Contro l function. (See page 42) ⢠Check the cable connection with the antenn a. (See page 23) ⢠Check the cable connection with the source device. (See pages 68 to 74) ⢠No picture ⢠Is the connection to othe r components cor rect? (See pages 68 to 73) ⢠Is a non-co mpatible PC signal being input? (See page 72) ⢠Is picture adjustment correct? (See page 58) ⢠Sound but no picture ⢠Check if energy-saving âÂÂPicture Off â option is selected. With this option selected, the screen is dea ctiv ated; only audio is output . T o restore the screen display , press any butto n other than VOL /â and MUTING . (See page 63) ⢠P ictu re but no sound ⢠Verify that the volume is se t high enough to hear . (See page 28) ⢠Check if the sound is muted. (See page 28) ⢠When usin g a video or PC input source, verify that the a udio terminals are also connected. (See pages 68 to 70 and 72) ⢠Sound is reversed between th e right and left speakers ⢠Sound but from only one speaker ⢠Check if the speaker cable conne ctions have been reversed between the right an d left or if the spea ker cable from either speaker has been disconnected. (See pa ge 21) ⢠Has the b alance been correc tly adjusted? (Se e page 62) ⢠P icture is cut off ⢠Is the image position correct? (See page 64) ⢠Has the correct scre en size been sele cted? (See pa ge 66) ⢠Colors are too dark/light or appe ar strange ⢠Adjust the picture tone. (See page 58) ⢠Is the room too bright? The picture may appear dim in a room that is too bright. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 103 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
104 En Appendix 14 OTHER ⢠TV - Guide data is u navailab le ⢠If TV -Guide data cannot be obtain ed with ANT .A selected for cabl e connection, se lect ANT .B for ov er the air . In additio n, perform the TV -Guide setup again (see page 33): - Select âÂÂNoâ for cable ser vice on Screen 3. - S elect âÂÂY esâ for an tenna service on Screen 5. - S elect â ANT B INâ on Screen 4. ⢠An exte rnal device connected to the USB terminal does not operate ⢠Con firm that th e device is connected t o the displ ay . (S ee page 76 ) ⢠Disconnect then re connect th e USB cable. (See pa ge 76) ⢠Check th at the USB cab le is shorter than 5 m. (See page 7 6) ⢠Check if the USB cable is prop erly connected. (See page 7 6) ⢠T urn Off then On the main power to co nfirm that the USB device is working. ⢠Check if the externa l device works corr ectly after the USB device was resta rted. ⢠V erify that the digi tal camera is set to take a pic ture. ⢠Confirm that the digi tal camera is place d in Mass Storage m ode. ⢠T o change the d igital cam eraâÂÂs config uration , refer to the came raâÂÂs instruc tion manual . ⢠Photo data stored in a digital still camera cannot be read through USB interf ace ⢠Con firm that th e device is connected t o the displ ay . (S ee page 76 ) ⢠V erify that the digi tal camera is turned On. ⢠P anel sounds/noises ⢠P anel generated sou nds, examples: F an mo tor noise, Electr ical Circuit Humming/Glass P anel buzzing are normal operation of a phosphor-based matrix display. Experiment with th e available Energy Save modes to find the best setting for your use. (See page 6 3) ⢠Screen shows uneven brightn ess on the sides ⢠Play content that completely fills the screen until une venness is mini mized. So me signals may require the A V mode sett ing to be changed. ( See page 65) Home Media Gallery/ NETWORK ⢠No ser ve rs are fo und ⢠Confirm that the PC is On an d not in Stan db y or Sleep. ( nothing is ch osen in âÂÂSele ct Ser versâ ). When th e PC has started with the âÂÂWake On LANâ (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has been prope rly done on the device manager for BIOS or W ind ows. ⢠Check the physical connections (hu b , 100BASE- TX/10BASE- T , or crossed cable and other cable qua lity when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommend ed to use 100BASE- TX for playback qualit y and display speed. ⢠Check th e logical connec tions (IP Ad dress se tup, DHCP , etc.). Confirm th e IP Address is co rrect if acquired by Auto IP and Firewall se tup. Also check if the IP Add ress is prope rly acquired with DHC P on the âÂÂNetwor k Setupâ screen t hat follows the âÂÂSetupâ menu. ⢠Check the PC if its media server (Windows Media Connect or DLNA compliant) is running. Restart if necessary. Check if one or more server s are On (this may cause malf unction). ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly . Reboot th e PC after confirming it s specifications and setup. ⢠Check th e media server setup. If a client is regist ered manua lly the setu p procedure may ha ve to be run again. An option âÂÂNot Allowedâ may have been selected for connections. ⢠W a it for a short period then select âÂÂUpdate to Latest Info rmationâ from the T ool Menu. (See page 78) ⢠No previously connected server(s) found (items i n âÂÂSelect S er versâ are dimmed ) ⢠Confirm that the PC is On an d not in Standb y or Sleep. ( nothing is ch osen in âÂÂSele ct Ser versâ ). When th e PC has started with the âÂÂWake On LANâ (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has been prope rly done on the device manager for BIOS or W ind ows. ⢠Check th e physical connections ( hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE- T or crossed ca ble and ot her cable qu ality when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommend ed to use 100BASE- TX for playback qualit y and display speed. ⢠Check th e logical connec tions (IP Address se tup, DHCP , etc.). Confirm the IP Address when acquired by Auto IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Ad dress is properly acquired with DHCP on the âÂÂNetwork Setupâ screen t hat follows the âÂÂSetupâ menu. ⢠Check the PC if its media server (Windows Media Co nnect or DLNA compliant) is running. Restart it if necessary. Check if one or more server s are On (this may cause malf unction). ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly . Reboot th e PC after confirming it s specifications and setup. ⢠Check th e media server setup. A setup procedure may be required for connections if a client is register ed manually . An option âÂÂNot Allowedâ may have been selected for connections. ⢠W ait for a while and select âÂÂUpdat e to Latest Info rmationâ from the T ool Menu. (See pa ge 78) ⢠An availab le server is selected but cannot be naviga ted ⢠Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing, if the targ et folder has be en deleted, or if one or more folders have been cor rupted on the ser ver . ⢠Check if the re are too many files in each folder . ⢠A server is arbitrarily selected ⢠This arbi tra ry selection happens when the server you use d before had been set to display the top menu screen (if you reset it, oth er servers connected are al so reset). Whe n the âÂÂSingle Server/USBâ option is selected on the â Auto Connection Setu pâ screen that follows th e âÂÂSetupâ menu, the ser ver is automatically accessed if only one server is connected. Use the T ool Menu to select the proper server . (See page 78) ⢠File/folder config uration di ffers from one ser ver to an other (st range conf iguration ) ⢠The Media Navigator displays the se r ver contents as classifi ed by the server . ⢠If no informat ion (such as ID3 tag) i s contained i n the file, files cannot be classified on the server . Problem Possible Solution PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 104 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
105 En Appendix 14 English If one of the following erro r code s appear on screen, chec k the corresponding message. Home Medi a Galler y/PLAYB ACK ⢠Image or sound is interrupted or distorted (B lock noise appears) ⢠Check the physical conne ctions (hub , 100B ASE- TX/10BASE- T , or crossed ca ble and other c able quality when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommende d to use 100BASE- TX for playback quality and display speed. ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly. R eboot th e PC aft er confirming its specifications and setup. ⢠Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile . Also check if the file is damaged. ⢠When connected by a wireless LAN, ch eck if the bit rate is sufficient. ⢠Some files that com ply with the supported format may not be played back or displaye d. ⢠Cannot play or display ⢠C heck th e physical conne ctions (hub, 100B ASE- TX/10BASE- T , or crossed cab le and other cabl e quality when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommende d to use 100BASE- TX for playback quality and display speed. ⢠Check if the PC is operating properly. R eboot th e PC aft er confirming its specifications and setup. ⢠Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile . Also check if the file is damaged. ⢠Check if the leasing contract for the ser ver has expired. ⢠When connected by a wireless LAN, ch eck if the bit rate is sufficient. ⢠Some files that com ply with the supported format may not be played back or displaye d. ⢠It takes time to ca pture and display a large-sized image. If this is the c ase, no operat ion may be performed. ⢠See the Pioneer website (www .pioneerelectr onics.com) for the forma ts that are supp orted. Home Media Gallery/FIRMWARE ⢠No updates are possible on USB ⢠Check i f the device is Mass Stor age Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is da maged (power unit, mode su ch as Mass St orage mode an d media for mat, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poo r device spee d may result in interru pted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate proble m). When using a digit al camera that is not Mass Storage C lass compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader . ⢠Confirm that the device is correctly insert ed or remov ed. ⢠Check that the firmware file has been co rrectly downloaded. Also check the file size. ⢠See the Pioneer website (www .pio neerelectronics.com) for details. Home Media Gallery/USB ⢠USB devices are n ot properly re cognized ⢠Che ck if the device is Mass St orage Class com pliant, if it is connected properly , noth ing is damaged (po wer unit, mode su ch as Mass St orage mode an d media for mat, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poo r device spee d may result in interru pted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate proble m). When using a digit al camera that is not Mass Storage C lass compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader . ⢠Confirm that the device is correctly insert ed or remov ed. ⢠No USB hu b is supported. When y ou connect a ho me ne twork, connect directly to the deviceâÂÂs USB port. ⢠Image or sound is interrupted or distorted (B lock noise appears) ⢠V erify that the file compl ies with the supported for mat, bit rate or profi le. Also check the file for da mage. ⢠Some files that com ply with the supported format may not play back or display properly . ⢠Check if the de vice is Mass Storag e Class compliant, if it is connecte d proper ly , no thing is da maged (po wer unit, mode su ch as Mass St orage mode an d media for mat, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poo r device spee d may result in interru pted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate proble m). When using a digit al camera that is not Mass Storage C lass compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader . Code Message Check SD04 and SD11 P owering o ff . Internal temperatur e too high . Check temp erature around PD P . Check if the ambien t temperature of the Plasma D isplay is high. SD05 (PRO -1540HD/PRO-1140 HD) Internal protection circuit turns po wer off . Is there a shor t in speaker cable? (PRO-940HD) Internal protection circuit turns po wer off . Check the speaker cable connect ions betwee n the Plasma Displa y and the speakers. Contact the ne arest P ioneer Aut horized Independen t Service Company or the Customer Support Division. (See ba ck cover) Problem Possible Solution PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 105 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
106 En Appendix 14 This product in part uses âÂÂOpenSSLâ software. To the extent the Op enSSL software is bein g used, the following notification applies: Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and bina ry forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r. 2. Redistributions in binary form must re produce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaim e r in the documentation and/or other mate rials provided wi th the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentio ning featur es or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis produc t includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Op enSSL Toolkit. (http: //www.openssl.org/)â 4. The names âÂÂOpenSSL Toolkitâ and âÂÂOpenSSL Projectâ must not be used to endo rse or promote products derived from this software without prior wri tten permission. For written permission, pl ease contact opens s l-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called âÂÂOpenSSLâ nor may âÂÂOpenSSLâ appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form what soever must retain the following acknowledgme nt: âÂÂThis product includ es software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Op enSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)â THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJEC T âÂÂAS ISâ AND A NY EXPRESSE D OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI ES OF MERCHANTABILIT Y AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE Open SSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL , SPEC IAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES ( INCLUDING, BU T NOT LIMITE D TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA , OR PROFI TS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, ST RICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@ cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implem entation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are ahered to. The follo wing conditions apply to all code found in t h i s d i s t r ib u t i o n , be it t he R C 4 , R S A , l ha s h , D E S , e tc . , c o d e ; n ot ju s t t h e S SL co de . Th e SSL documentation included wit h this distribu tion is covered by the same copyright te rms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric YoungâÂÂs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a te xtual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and bina ry forms, with or without modification , are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must reta in the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclai mer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must re produce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaim e r in the documentation and/or other mate rials provided wi th the distribution. 3. All advertising materials ment ioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: âÂÂT his product includes cryptographic so ftware written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com )â The word âÂÂcryptographicâ can be left out if the rouines from the lib rary being used are not cr yptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) fr om the apps directory (applic ation code) you must includ e an acknowledgement: âÂÂThis product includes soft ware written by Tim Hudso n (tjh@cryptsoft.com)â THIS SOFTWA RE IS PROVID ED BY ERIC YOU NG âÂÂAS ISâ A ND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRA NTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARR ANTIES OF MERCHANTAB ILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTO RS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMEN T OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS I NTERRUPTION) HO WEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CO NTRACT, STRICT LI ABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBI LITY OF SUCH DAM AGE. The licence and distribution te rms for any publically avail able ve rsion or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put und er another dist ribution licence [including th e GNU Public Licence.] PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 106 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
107 En Appendix 14 English Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED â AS ISâÂÂ, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANT IES OF MERCHA NTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRI GHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CL AIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWIS E, ARISI NG ROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEAL INGS IN THE SOFTWARE. âÂÂPortions of this software are copyright (c) <year> The FreeType Project (www. freetype.org). All rights rese rved.â [please rep lace <year> with the value from the Fr eeType version you actually use] If only executable code is distrib uted, then the accompanying do cumentation must state that âÂÂthis software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Groupâ COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify libpng yo u may insert additional notices i mmediately following this sentence. libpng version 1.2.6, Septemb er 12, 2004, is Copyright (c) 2004 Glenn Rand ers-Pehrson, and is distribute d according to the same disclaimer and li cense as libpng-1.2.5 with the following indi vidual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1 .0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2 002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and ar e distributed according to the same disclaime r and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the foll owing individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following a dditions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or agai nst infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This li brary is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performa nce, a ccuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0 .97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 2 0, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaime r and license as libpng-0.96, with the foll owing individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Tom Lane Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0 .89, June 1996, through 0.9 6, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1 996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed acc ording to the same disc laimer and lic ense as lib png-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 107 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
108 En Appendix 14 libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1 996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, I nc. For the purposes of this copyright and license, âÂÂContributing Authorsâ is define d as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilg er Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is s upplied âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, th e warranties of merchantability and of fitn ess for any purpose. The Contributing Aut hor s and Group 42, Inc. assume no liabil ity for direct, indirect, inci dental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which ma y result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, co py, modify, and distribute th is source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, withou t fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source co de must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any so urce or altered source distribution. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and en courage th e use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknow ledgment is not required but would be appreciated. A âÂÂpng_get_copyrightâ function is available, for convenient use in âÂÂaboutâ bo xes and the like: printf (âÂÂ%sâÂÂ,png_get_copyright (NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course ) is supplied in the file s âÂÂpngbar.pngâ and âÂÂpngbar.jpg (88x3 1) and âÂÂpngnow.pngâ (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software . OSI Certi fied Open Source is a certification mark of t he Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp@users.sourceforge.net September 12, 2004 Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are pe rmitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following di sclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materi als provided wi th the distribution. - Neit her the name of the Xiph.org Foundatio n nor the names of its cont ributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BU T NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN N O EVENT SHA LL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL , SPECIAL, EXEMPLA RY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING , BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SE RVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, O R PR OFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRI CT LI ABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THI S SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The GIFLIB distributi on is Copy right (c) 1997 Eric S. Raym ond THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EX P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICUL A R PURPOSE AND NO NINFRINGEMEN T. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FO R ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TO RT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWAR E. Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Le ffler PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 108 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
109 En Appendix 14 English Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS-ISâ AND WITHOUT WAR R ANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRES S, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMI TATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERC HANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOS E. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SI LICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIR ECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULT ING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING O UT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Copyright (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler âÂÂCopyright (c) 1998-2003 The OpenSSL P roject. All rights reserved. â This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Proj ect for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)â Linux Source Notice The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system. The machine readable copy of the correspondin g source code is available for the cost of di stribution. To obtain a copy, please visit http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information. GNU General Public License Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 F ree Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license do cument, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble T h e l i c e n s e s f o r m o s t s o f t w a r e a r e d e s i g n e d t o t a k e a w a y y o u r freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Publ ic License is intended to guarante e your freedom to share and change free software-t o make sure the software is free for a ll its u sers. This General Public License appl ies to most of the Free Software FoundationâÂÂs software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is cove red by the GNU Library Gene ral Public License instead. ) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are refe rring to freedom, not price. Our General Pu blic Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copi es of free softwa re (and charge f or this service if you wish), that you receive sou rce code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the righ ts th at you have. You must make sure th at they, too, receive or can get the source cod e . And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permiss ion to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each authorâÂÂs protection and ours, we want to make ce rtain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for th is free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its re cipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authorsâ reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened consta ntly by software patents. We wish to av oid the danger th at redistributors of a fr ee program will indi vidually obtain patent licenses, in effect maki ng the program proprietary. To pre vent this, we have made it cl ea r that any patent must be licensed for ever yoneâÂÂs free use or no t l icensed at al l. The precise terms and conditio ns for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODI FICATION 0. This License applies to any program or ot her work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public Lic ense. The âÂÂProgram âÂÂ, below, re fers to any such program or work, and a âÂÂwork based on the Programâ means either the Program or any de rivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translat ion is included withou t limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) Each l icensee is address ed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. Activities other than copying, di stribution and modificati on are not covered by this License; th ey are outside its scope. The a ct of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from th e Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of havi ng been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 109 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
110 En Appendix 14 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim co pies of the ProgramâÂÂs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of w arranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a c opy of this License alon g with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee . 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modif ied files to carry prominent notices stating that you ch anged the files and the date of any chang e. b) You must cause any work that you distribut e or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally re ads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordina ry way, to print or display an announc ement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions , and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is int e ractive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themse lves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you di stribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the sa me sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Pr ogram, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees ex tend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of th is sectio n to claim rights or co ntest your rights to work writte n entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distributi on of derivative or coll ective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with th e Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or di stribution medium does not bring the ot he r work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distri bute the Program (or a work based on it, under Sectio n 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 ab ove provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machi ne-read able source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium cust omarily used fo r softwa re interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any thir d party, for a charge no more than your c ost of physically performing source distribution, a complete mach ine-readable copy of the co rresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offe r to distribute corresponding source co de. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b abov e.) The source code for a work means the prefe rred form of the work for making modifi cations to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any as sociated interf ace definition file s, plu s the scripts used to control compilation an d installation of the execut able. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on whic h the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object co de is made by offering ac cess to copy from a designated place, then offering equivale nt access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third part ies are not compelled to copy the sourc e along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Prog ram except as expressly provided und er this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublic ense or distribute the P rogram is void, and wi l l automatically terminate your rights under thi s License. However, parties who have receiv ed copies, or rights, from you under this Lice nse will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this Lice nse, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mo dify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohi b ited by law if you do not accept this License. There fore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any wor k based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, dis t ributing or modifying the Pr ogram or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automaticall y receives a license fr om the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these te rms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipientsâ ex ercise of the rights granted her ein. You ar e not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 110 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
111 En Appendix 14 English 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whe ther by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously y our obligations under this License an d any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Pr ogram at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalt y-free redistribution of the Pr ogram by all tho se who receiv e c opies directly or indirectly through you, then th e only way you could satisfy both it and th is License would be to refrain entirely f rom distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held in valid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to in duce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribu tion system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contri butions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the P r ogram is restricted in certai n countries either by patent s or by copyrighted interfa ces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an expl icit geographical dist ribution limitat ion excluding those countries, so that distributi on is permitted only in or among countri es not thus excluded. In such ca se, this License incorporates th e limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new ve rsions of the General Public Li cense from time to time. Such new versions will be si milar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing ve rsion number. If the Program specifies a ve rsion number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, yo u have the option of following the terms and cond itions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Found ation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For softwa re which is copyrighted by the Free Softwa re Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our deci sion will be guided by the two goals of preserving th e free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoti ng the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCE PT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WR ITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIE D, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI E S OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PE RFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIV E, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESS ARY SERVICING, REPA IR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE TH E PROGRAM AS PERMI TTED ABOV E, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA GES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BE EN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDI TIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the pub lic, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to th e program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most eff ectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where the full notic e is found. <one line to give the programâÂÂs na me a nd an idea of w hat it does.> Copyright (C) yyyy name of author This program is free software; you can re distribute it and/or modify it under th e terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundatio n; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope th at it wi ll be useful, but WIT HOUT ANY WA RRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR P URPOSE. See the GNU General Publ ic License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Lice nse along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Pl ace - Suite 330, Boston, MA 0211 1-1307, USA. Also add information on how to contac t you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short no tice like this when i t starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 111 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
112 En Appendix 14 Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WA RRANTY; for details type âÂÂs how wâÂÂ. This is free software, a nd you are welco me to redistribute it under cert ain co nditions; type âÂÂshow câ for details. The hypothetical commands âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than âÂÂsho w wâ and âÂÂshow câÂÂ; they could ev en be mouse-clic ks or menu items-whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you wo rk as a programmer) or your s chool, if any, to sig n a âÂÂcopyright disclaimerâ f or th e program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program âÂÂGnomovisi onâ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subrouti ne library, you may consider it m ore useful to permit linking propri etary applications with the libra ry. If t his is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distri bute verbatim copies of this license do cument, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released vers ion of the Lesser GPL. It al so counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, vers ion 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and ch ange it. By contrast, the GNU General Publ ic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and chan ge free software-to make sure th e software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Publ ic License, applies to some specially desi gnated software pack ages-typically librar ie s- of the Free Software Foundation and other auth ors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think care ful ly about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is th e better strategy to use in any particular case, based o n the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receiv e source code or can get it if you want it; that yo u can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make re strictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrend er the se rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if yo u distribute copies of the library or if you modi fy it. For example, if you distribute co pies of the library, whether gratis or for a f ee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, t oo, receive or can get the source code. If yo u link other code with the library, you m ust provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they ca n relink them with the library after making changes to the libr ary a nd recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-s tep method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and /or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to ma ke it very clear that there is no warranty for the free li brary. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original authorâÂÂs reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free progr am. We wish to make sure that a company cann ot effectively restrict the us ers of a free program by obtaining a re strictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent lice nse obtained for a version of the library mu st be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some librari es, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public Lice nse. This license, the GNU Lesse r General Public License, ap plies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public Licens e. We use this license for certain libraries in order to pe rmit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is li nked with a library, whe ther statically or using a share d library, the combina tion of the two is leg ally sp eaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordi nary General Public License ther efore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License perm its more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the âÂÂLesserâ General Public License because it does Less to protect the userâÂÂs freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It al so provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain li brary, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To ac hieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 112 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
113 En Appendix 14 English A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only , so we use t he Lesser Ge neral Public License. In other cases, permission to use a partic ular library in non-free progr ams enables a greater number of people to use a large b ody of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free progr ams enables many m ore people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as it s variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser Genera l Publ ic License is Le ss protective of the usersâ freedom, it does ensure t hat the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modi fied version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pa y close attention to the diffe rence betwe en a âÂÂwork based on the libraryâ and a âÂÂwork that uses the libraryâÂÂ. The former contai ns code derived from the library, whereas th e latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU Lesser G eneral Public Lice nse TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODI FICATION 0. This License Agreement applie s to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright hold er or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public Licens e (also called âÂÂthis LicenseâÂÂ). Each licensee is addressed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. A âÂÂlibraryâ means a co llection of software functions and/or data prepare d so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to fo rm executables. The âÂÂLibraryâÂÂ, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been di stributed under the se terms. A âÂÂwork based on the Libraryâ means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Libr ary or a portion of it, either verbatim or wi th modifications and/or translated straight forwardly into anothe r language. (Hereinaft er, translation is included without limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) âÂÂSource codeâ for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modification s to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all module s it conta ins, plus any associated interf ace definition files, plus the scripts us ed to control compilation and installation of the library . Activities other than copying, di stribution and modificati on are not covered by this License; th ey are outside its scope. The a ct of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (ind ependent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim co pies of the LibraryâÂÂs complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately pub lish on each copy an appropriate copy right notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any w arranty; and distribute a copy of t his Licens e along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical ac t of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or co pies of the Library or any portion of it, thus fo rming a work based on the Library, and copy a nd distribute such modifications or work und er the terms of Sect ion 1 above, provided th at you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modi fied to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the dat e of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library re fers to a function or a tabl e of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument pa ssed when the facility is invoked, then yo u must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does no t supply such function or table, the faci lity still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely we ll-defined inde pendent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requ ires that any application-s upplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not suppl y it, the square root funct ion must stil l compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modi fied work as a who le. If identi fiable sectio ns of that work are not derive d from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independen t and separate works in themselv es, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as sepa rate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the dist ribution of the whole must be o n th e te r m s o f t hi s L i c e nse, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest yo ur rights to work written en tirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of de ri vative or coll ective works based on the Libr ary. In addition, mere aggregation of another wo rk not based on the Library with the Libr ary (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does no t bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the or dinary GNU General Publ ic Lice nse instead of this Lice nse to a given copy of the Lib rary. To do this, you must alter all the notices th at refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public Li cense, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that vers ion instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this chang e is made in a given copy, it is irreversib le for that copy, so the ordinary GN U General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and deri vative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 113 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
114 En Appendix 14 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or deri vative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable for m under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provide d that you accompany it with the comp le te corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distribute d under th e terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of ob ject code is made by offering access to copy from a designa t ed place, then off ering equivalent acce ss to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirem ent to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the so urce along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work wi th the Library by being compi led o r l i n k ed w i t h i t, i s c a ll e d a â w or k t h a t us e s t h e Li b r a ry â . S u ch a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library , and therefore falls outside the scope of this Li cense. However, linking a âÂÂwork that uses the Libraryâ with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contai ns portions of the Library), rather than a âÂÂwork that uses the libraryâÂÂ. The executable is the refore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a âÂÂwork that uses the Libraryâ uses ma terial from a header file th at is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even th ough the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the w ork can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defin ed by law. I f s u c h a n o b j e c t f i l e u s e s o n l y n u m e r i c al paramet ers, data structure layouts and a ccessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestri cted, regardless of whet her it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this ob ject code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Sec tion 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the o bject code for the work under the terms of Secti on 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or no t they are linked directly with the Lib rary its elf. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or li nk a âÂÂwork that uses the Libraryâ wi th the Library to produ ce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under te rms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customerâÂÂs own use and reverse engineering for debuggi ng such modifications. You must give prominent notice wi th each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must d o one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding mach ine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Secti ons 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable âÂÂwork that uses the LibraryâÂÂ, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then reli nk to produce a modified exec utable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions fi les in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the appl ication to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with th e Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the userâÂÂs computer system, rath er than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified versio n of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is inte rface-compatible with t he version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer , valid for at least three years, to g ive the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, fo r a charge no more th an the cost of performing this distribution. d) If di str ib ut ion of the wo rk is m ad e b y of fe rin g a cc ess to copy from a designated place, off er equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already re ceived a copy of these materials or that you have al ready sent this user a copy. For an executable, the requi red form of the âÂÂwork that uses th e Libraryâ must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special except ion, the materials to be distri buted need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either so urce or binary form) with the major componen ts (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contra dicts the lice nse restrictio ns of other proprietary libr aries that do not normally accompany the opera ting system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facil ities that are a w ork based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other l ibrary facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other l ibrary facilities is othe rwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, unc ombined with any other library facilities. Thi s must be distributed under the terms of the Sections a bove. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, li nk with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, l ink with, or distri bute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate y our rights under this License. However, partie s who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have thei r licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full complianc e. 9. You are not required to accept this Lice nse, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to mo dify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. There fore, by modifying or distributing the Library (o r any work based on the Library), you indi cate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all i ts terms and co nditions for copying, distri buting or modifying the Library or works based on it. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 114 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
115 En Appendix 14 English 10. Each time you redistribute th e Library (or any work based on the Library), th e recipient automatically receives a license fr om the original lice nsor to copy, distri bute, link with or mo dify the Library subject t o these te rms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the re cipientsâ e xercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whe ther by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously y our obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-fr ee redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies di rec tly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisf y both it and th is License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held in valid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to in duce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validi ty of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which i s implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contri butions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the dist ribution and/or use of the Libr ary is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfa ces, the original copyright holder who pl aces the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limita tion excluding those countries, so that distributi on is permitted only in or among countri es not thus excluded. In such ca se, this License incorporates th e limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation ma y publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Pu blic License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spir it to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concern s. Each version is given a di stinguishing version number. If the Library specif ies a version number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, yo u have the option of following the terms and cond itions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Li brary does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorpora te parts of the Library into othe r free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the aut hor to ask for pe rmission. For software which is copyrighte d by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundat ion; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our de cision will be guided b y the two goals of preserving the free status of all de rivatives of our free s oftware and of promo tin g the sharing and reuse of software generally . NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, TH ERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRA RY, TO THE EXTE NT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCE PT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WR ITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY â AS ISâ WITHOUT WA RRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI E S OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PE RF ORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFE CTIVE, YOU ASSUME TH E COST OF ALL NECES SARY SERVICIN G, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MO DIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LI BRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA GES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NO T LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE O R LOSSES SUST AINED BY YOU O R THIRD PARTIE S OR A FAILUR E OF THE LIBR ARY TO OPERAT E WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PA RTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDI TIONS PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 115 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
116 En Appendix 14 How to Ap ply The se Term s to Your New Lib raries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free sof tware that everyone can redistribute and change . You can do so by permitting redistribution under th ese terms (or, alternatively, und er the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the e xclusion of warranty; and each file should have at leas t the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where th e full notice is found. <one line to give the libraryâÂÂs name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) year name of author This library is free software; you can redist ribute it and/or modify it under the te rms of the GNU Lesser General Public Licens e as published by the Free Software Foundatio n; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be usef ul, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; with out even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser Gene ral Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with th is library; if not, write to the Free Sof tware Foundation, Inc., 59 T emple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Also add information on how to contac t you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you wo rk as a programmer) or your s chool, if any, to sig n a âÂÂcopyright disclaimerâ f or th e library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the li brary âÂÂFrobâ (a library for twea king knobs) written by James R andom Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice ThatâÂÂs all there is to it! PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 116 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
117 En Appendix 14 English Specifications * This conforms to HDMI1.1 and HDCP1.1. HDMI (High Definition Multi media Interface) is a dig ital interf ace that sends both video and audio signals through a single cable. HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protec tion) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital content that use Digital Visual Interface (DVI). ** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0 specifications. ⢠Design and specifications are su bject to change without notice. Item 60" Plasma Display Model: PRO-1540HD 50" Plasma Display Model: PRO-1140HD 42" Plasma Display Model: PRO-940HD Number of pixels 1365 à768 pixels 1365 à768 pixels 1024 à76 8 pixels Aud io A mpl ifi er 13 W 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 â¦) 13 W 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 ⦠) 13 W 13 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 8 ⦠) Speakers â â W oofer: 4.8 cm à13 cm cone t ype T weeter: 2.5 cm semidome type Surround Syste m SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass P ower R equire ment 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 46 0 W (30 W Standby) 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 355 W (26 W Standby) 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 3 12 W (26 W Standby) W eight Main unit: 51.5 kg (113.6 lbs.) Main unit: 34.3 kg (75.7 lbs.) Main unit: 29.2 kg (64.4 lbs.) Stand: 2.5 kg ( 5.5 lbs.) (including bolts) T otal: 31.7 kg (69.9 lbs.) Recept ion System (Digit al) A TSC D igital TV syste m Circuit type 8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation T uner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch . 14 to 69 CA TV Ch. 2 to 13 5 Audio format Dolby Digit al Reception System (Analog) Americ an TV standard NTSC syste m Circuit type Video signal dete ction PLL full syn chronous detecti on, PLL digital Synthesizer system T uner VHF/UHF VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch . 14 to 69 CA TV ANT/CAB LE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125 Audio multiplex BTSC system T erminals Rear ANT/CABLE A IN 75 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for DTV /VHF/UHF/CATV in ANT B IN 75 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out INPUT 1 S - VIDEO in, VIDEO in , A UDIO in INPUT 2 C OMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in , VIDEO in, A UDIO in INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO i n, AUDIO in PC Analog RGB in, AUDIO in INPUT 5 H DMI in*, AUDIO in INPUT 6 H DMI in*, AUDIO in MONITOR OUT VID EO out, AUDIO out Digital Audio Output Optical G-L IN K 1 ETHERNET 1 CONTROL IN 1 CONTROL OUT 1 SPEAKER 8 ⦠to 16 ⦠8 ⦠to 16 ⦠â SUB WOOFER OUTPUT V ariable CableCARD Point o f Deployment Side INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO i n, VIDEO in, A UDIO in USB USB in** On-screen display languages English/F renc h/Spanish PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 117 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
118 En Appendix 14 Dimensions PRO-1540HD Unit: mm (inch) PRO-1140HD Unit: mm (inch) PRO-940HD Unit: mm (inch) 1470 (57-7/8 ) 880 (34-21/32) 118 (4-21/32) 1224 (48-3/ 16) 717 (28-1/4) 115 (4-1/2) 559 (22) 679 (26-3/4) 115 (4-1/2) 273 (10-3/4) 719 (28-5/16) 1040 (40-15/16) PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 118 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
119 En Appendix 14 English Trademarks ⢠In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are regi stered tr ademarks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/ or one of its a ffiliates. In C ana da, TV GUIDE is a registered m ark of Transconti nental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemst ar- TV Guide International, Inc. ⢠FOCUS, WOW, SRS a nd h î symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS and WOW technologies are incorpora ted under license fr om SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and t he double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ⢠HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-D efinition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trad emarks of HDMI L icensing LLC . ⢠This product includes FontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAv enue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. ⢠DDC is a registered trademark of Vi deo Electronics Standards Asso ciation. ⢠CableCARD i s a trademark o f Cable Tele vision Lab oratories, Inc. ⢠This software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group. ⢠The names of the compa nies or institution s are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions . ⢠The PlaysForSure logo , Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Microsoft Corpora tion in the United States and/or other countries. ⢠DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED⢠are trad emarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Ne twork Alliance. License ⢠The TV Guide On Screen system is manuf actured under license from Gemstar-TV Gu ide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. ⢠Content owners use Windows Me dia digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WM DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to re voke the softwareâÂÂs ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not a ffect unprotected content. When you downlo ad licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may inc lude a revocati on list with the licenses. Content owne rs may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content th at requires the upgrade. ⢠This product is protected by certain intell ectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distributio n of such technology outside of this product is prohibited with out a license from Microsoft. ⢠The DLNA logo is permitted to the pro duct that has obtained a DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) certificat e. Patent ⢠The TV Guide On Screen system is prot ected by one or more of the following United State s patents 4,908,713 ; 6,498,895; 6,850,693; 6,396,546 ; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 to Gemstar- TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries. Disclaimer Notice ⢠Gemstar-TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates a re not in any way li able fo r the accuracy or availability o f the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarante e service availability in your area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide In ternational, Inc. and/or its re lated affili at es be liable for any damages in connect ion with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other da ta in the T V Guide On Screen system. Copyright protection ⢠This product incorporates copyright protectio n technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other inte llectual property ri ghts. Use of this copyright protection te chnology must be authorized by Macrovision Co rporat ion, and is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only unl ess otherwis e authorized by Macrovision. Reve rse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Important Notice about so ftware upgrade from Pioneer Attention Pioneer PDP Owners: Thank you for purchasing a Pioneer Digital Cable Ready (DCR) comp atible Plasma TV. You have purchased the most advanced product of its kind available today. However, as technology advances, DCR systems may continue to evolve. To maintain compatibil ity with DCR systems and f eatures, your Plasma TV may benefit from, or require software upgrades. As part of our commitment to our customer s, Pioneer will send you upgrade software and instructions as needed to keep your DCR compatible Plasma TV up to date with this technology . Please take the time to register your DCR compatib le Plasma TV at www.pioneerelectronics.com This registration enables us to keep yo u up to date on changes t hat may occur. Thank you very much. Note: DCR function works only in the USA. DCR is unavailable in Ca nada. Software update for th e Home Media Gallery You can also update the software for the Home Media Galler y at the Pioneer website above. For det ails, see page 89. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2006 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 119 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM
Printed in China <ARB1573-A> Published by Pione er Corporation. Copyrigh t é 2006 Pioneer Co rporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico ,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 PDP_PRO1540HD.book Page 120 We dnesday , August 2, 2006 6:01 PM